JP2024045598A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine capable of performing processing in an optimal manner. [Solution] In the ART state, a start period is executed first, and when the start period ends, it becomes a first unit execution. When a new execution occurs in the first unit execution, an initial number of games is determined, and when it is determined that an additional number of games is to be added, the additional number of games is added to the initial number of games. When the remaining number of continued games becomes 0 in the execution of the first unit execution, a continuation lottery process is executed, and a new execution of the first unit execution starts when a continuation win is obtained. In this case, an addition lottery process for determining the initial number of games is repeatedly executed each time the first standby period and the second standby period have elapsed. Also, the second standby period is set by executing a predetermined number of times a determination of the magnitude relationship between the dispersion value set based on the previous second random number and the number of repetitions. [Selected Figure] FIG. 9

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to a tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-045989 A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to make the game content suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can provide suitable game content.

In order to solve the above problem, the present invention provides a game device comprising: a predetermined storage and execution means for storing predetermined game information in an information storage means;
a specific storage and execution means for storing specific game information in the information storage means;
A progress control means for controlling the progress of a game;
a notification control means for executing a notification process based on the information transmitted by the progress control means;
When the predetermined game information is stored in the information storage means, a game status becomes a predetermined game status.
When the specific game information is stored in the information storage means, the game situation becomes a specific game situation,
The progress control means
a profit-awarding process execution means for executing a profit-awarding process in a mode corresponding to a set value set as a target for use from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the degree of advantage of a player;
A setting-related execution means for executing a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value;
a predetermined erasing means for executing a predetermined erasing process for erasing the information stored in the information storage means when the setting-related process is executed;
Equipped with
the predetermined erasing means is configured to, when erasing information stored in the information storage means in the predetermined erasing process, include the specific game information in the information to be erased, while excluding the predetermined game information from the information to be erased;
the progress control means includes means for transmitting, to the notification control means, specific information enabling the notification control means to determine whether or not the specific game information is stored in the information storage means after the specific deletion process is executed;
The notification control means is characterized in that it includes a means for executing a notification process corresponding to the specified game information not being stored in the information storage means when the specific information corresponding to the specified game information not being stored in the information storage means is received.

According to the present invention, it is possible to make the game content suitable.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the slot machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized from a display window. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. (a) It is a front view of a common display area, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of information corresponding to a stop order displayed on a dual-purpose display section. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device and the display content of the stop order on the combined display unit. FIG. 2 is an electrical configuration diagram of the slot machine. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU; 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a start waiting process executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing bet handling processing executed by the main MPU. 12 is a flowchart showing a setting process at the time of start executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the role selection process executed by the main MPU. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for a normal mode when three coins are bet. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for a normal mode when two coins are bet. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved when the lottery table for the normal mode is selected. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for the first RT mode when three coins are bet. It is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels and the winning pattern that is established when the first RT mode lottery table is selected. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for the second RT mode when three coins are bet. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved when the lottery table for the second RT mode is selected. FIG. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining index values with different winning probabilities among the setting values of "1" to "6". It is a flowchart which shows the reel control process performed by main side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the corresponding processing executed by the main MPU when a game ends. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state and a gaming section that exist in a slot machine. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a first section and a second section, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each gaming state in the second section. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB role and the second CB role, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB state and the second CB state. 3 is a flowchart showing CB processing executed by the main MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how the gaming state shifts to the CB state and how the shift to the CB state is restricted. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of notifications related to winning states of the first CB combination and the second CB combination. (a) to (j) are time charts showing how various notifications are executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of bets on gaming media. It is a flowchart which shows the internal notification control process performed by production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the control processing executed by the production side MPU at the start of supply. It is a flowchart which shows the process for non-internal notification performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st CB internal medium notification process performed by production side MPU. A flowchart showing the second CB internal notification processing executed by the production side MPU. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of the main side RAM. (a) It is a flowchart which shows all clear processing performed by main side MPU, and (b) It is a flowchart which shows partial clear processing which is performed by main side MPU. 13A to 13H are time charts showing how partial clear processing and full clear processing are executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control processing of the game section performed by main side MPU. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of a direct win in the ART state in the direct lottery process, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the selection probabilities of each of modes A to C in the stay mode lottery process. and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the respective selection probabilities of immediate lighting and lighting standby in the lighting lottery process of the section display section. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining stay mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a stay mode setting process executed by a master MPU; 13A to 13H are time charts showing the timing at which the section display unit is switched from an off state to an on state in a second section. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control process of the game section performed by main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing ending handling processing executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing an ending performance control process executed by the performance side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous lottery process at the time of the game start performed by main side MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of a direct win in the ART state in the direct lottery process, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of a transition win in the pseudo bonus state in the transition lottery process. . 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process executed by a main MPU. 11 is a flowchart showing a stop order notification control process executed by a main MPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the situation when an index value IV=5 is reached and it is notified that the first reel will stop on the left reel, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the situation when an index value IV=5 is reached and it is notified that the first reel will stop on the right reel. (a) A flowchart showing pseudo bonus processing at the start of the game executed by the main MPU, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning the ART state transition in the ART state transition lottery process. It is. 13 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus process executed by the main MPU. A flowchart showing the advantageous termination processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the performance control process for pseudo bonuses performed by the performance side MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how the pseudo bonus state progresses. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution contents of an ending performance in an image display device, and FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution contents of a revival performance in an image display device. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the ART state. An explanatory diagram to explain the allocation of game numbers in the ART state. 13 is a flowchart showing ART processing executed by the main MPU at the start of a game. 13 is a flowchart showing the ART state processing executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a loop lottery process executed by a master MPU. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how the loop lottery process is executed. 12 is a flowchart showing the next set of addition processing executed by the main MPU. 12 is a flowchart showing a process for starting the current set executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production control process for ART performed by production side MPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how various effects progress in the first unit execution time. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination of symbols that will result in a first CB win and a combination of symbols that will result in a second CB win in the second embodiment, and (b) the first CB combination or the second CB combination. It is a time chart showing the flow of the game in the case of winning. It is a flowchart which shows the switching control process of the internal notification performed by the performance side MPU in 3rd Embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing termination preparation state processing executed by the main MPU in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the loop lottery process performed by main side MPU. 12 is a flowchart showing a process for starting the current set executed by the main MPU.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of the present invention applied to a slot machine 10, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and Fig. 3 is a front view of the cabinet 11.

As shown in Figures 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed into a box shape that is open at the front as a whole by fixing multiple wooden panels.

As shown in Figures 1 and 2, a front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 with an axis 12a on the left side of the front door as a pivot axis so that the internal space of the housing 11 can be opened and closed. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the back side of the front door, and this locked state is released by unlocking the key cylinder 14 with a specified key.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 20 has three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R are made of a transparent or semi-transparent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is formed into a cylindrical shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis becomes the rotational axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis that extends substantially horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window portion 21L, 21M, and 21R. There is. Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 21L, 21M, 21R. Furthermore, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed as if they were moving from top to bottom through the respective display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. When this start lever 41 is operated when game media such as medals and virtual medals have been bet, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate simultaneously.

On the right side of the start lever 41, there are stop buttons 42, 43, 44 that are operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 is located directly below the display window 21L, 21M, 21R that corresponds to the reel 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 becomes capable of stopping the left reel 32L when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reel started spinning.

One game (play) is the period from when the start lever 41 is operated to when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate, when the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are operated to when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop to when the various processes, such as the awarding of game media and management of the game status, are completed.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals as investment value is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back of the front door 12 if the acceptance is permitted, and if the acceptance is prohibited, the medals are guided to the hopper device 53. The medals are led to a medal receiving tray 59 from a medal discharge port 58 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of discharging medals stored in a storage tank to a medal receiving tray 59 through a medal discharge port 58 when a winning is achieved corresponding to the provision of game media on the main line ML, which will be described later. have. As shown in FIG. 1, below the medal slot 45, a return button 46 is provided which is pressed when the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 become stuck in the selector 52.

On the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, there are provided a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time, and a second credit insertion button 48 for inserting two virtual medals at one time. In this slot machine 10, there are two situations in which the number of gaming media (medals or virtual medals) that can be bet (i.e., bet setting) at one time is "3" and "2".

The first credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and three or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In this case, the number of virtual medals decreases by three, but the number of bets becomes "3". The first credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In this case, the number of virtual medals decreases by two, but the number of bets becomes "3". The first credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "2", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In this case, the number of virtual medals decreases by one, but the number of bets becomes "3". The first credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In this case, the number of virtual medals decreases by two, but the number of bets becomes "2". The first credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In this case, the number of virtual medals decreases by one, but the number of bets becomes "2".

If the first credit insertion button 47 is operated when the number of stored virtual medals is less than the difference between the available number of bets and the current number of bets, the number of bets increases by the number of virtual medals, and the number of virtual medals becomes 0.

In a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the number of bets decreases by two virtual medals and becomes "2". In a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the number of bets decreases by one virtual medal and becomes "2". In a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the number of bets decreases by two virtual medals and becomes "2". In a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the number of bets decreases by one virtual medal and becomes "2".

If the second credit insertion button 48 is operated when the number of stored virtual medals is one and the current number of bets is "0," the number of bets becomes "1" and the number of virtual medals becomes zero.

The first credit input button 47 has a wider pressing surface than the second credit input button 48, which is pressed when the player operates the button. This improves the operability of the first credit input button 47.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. This slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores surplus input medals and medals paid out at the time of winning as virtual medals until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached, and the virtual medals are stored in the storage memory. When the payment button 51 is operated under the above situation, virtual medals are dispensed from the medal ejection port 58 as real medals.

As shown in Figures 2 and 3, inside the cabinet 11, a power supply unit 54 is provided to the left of the hopper unit 53. The power supply unit 54 is provided with a power switch 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a setting key insertion hole 57 into which a setting key held by the amusement hall manager is inserted and operated to change the setting value of the slot machine 10 within the range of "1" to "6."

Next, we will explain the symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIG. 4 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, numbers "0" to "20" are assigned to correspond to each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and these numbers can be visually recognized by the main controller 70, which will be described later, from the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. This is a number to recognize the symbols in a certain state, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, in the following explanation, the numbers will be used.

There are seven types of symbols: "Bell" symbol (e.g., 20th on left reel 32L), "Replay" symbol (e.g., 19th on left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (e.g., 18th on left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (e.g., 15th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., 9th on left reel 32L), and "White 7" symbol (e.g., 5th on left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of the various symbols are different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIG. 5 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. Each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

In this slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect the positions where the symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols of the right reel 32R. When the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is started with a specified number of gaming media bet, and if a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of giving gaming media, Either the benefit of re-gaming or the transition of gaming status is granted.

In other words, in this slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line that can result in a win. The main line ML is set as a line that extends in a straight line. Therefore, even if a combination of symbols that can result in a win is formed on a line that extends in a straight line, such as the subline SL1 that connects the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, the subline SL2 that connects the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R, the subline SL3 that connects the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the lower pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and the subline SL4 that connects the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R, no win is formed.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, a description will be given of the correspondence between the symbol combinations that result in winnings and the benefits that will be awarded when the winnings occur. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the combination of symbols that result in a winning combination and the benefits that are awarded when the winning combination occurs.

The minor winning combinations that will award gaming media include the 1st Bell, 2nd Bell, 1st Watermelon, 2nd Watermelon, and Cherry. In more detail, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, then the 1st Bell is awarded. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern, then the 2nd Bell is awarded. If either the 1st Bell or the 2nd Bell is awarded, then the number of gaming media to be awarded will be "11".

If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "watermelon" pattern, the first watermelon win is obtained. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" pattern, the second watermelon win is obtained. In the case of either the first watermelon win or the second watermelon win, the number of game media to be awarded is "5". In the case of the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML being a "cherry" pattern, regardless of the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, a cherry win is obtained. In the case of a cherry win, the number of game media to be awarded is "2".

Winnings that grant the privilege of replay, which allows you to play the next game without betting gaming media, include the regular replay winnings, first chance replay winnings, second chance replay winnings, first RT replay winnings, second RT replay winnings, first fall replay winnings, and second fall replay winnings. In detail, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, or if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, then a regular replay will be won.

On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the first chance replay will occur. It will be a prize. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Replay" symbol, a second chance replay occurs. It will be a prize.

On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, the 1st RT replay prize is won. becomes. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Replay" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Replay" symbol, the 2nd RT Replay prize is won. becomes.

If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern, the first fall replay is won. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, the second fall replay is won.

If any of the above-mentioned replay wins occur, a replay benefit will be granted that will allow you to play the next game without having to bet on game media. Specifically, if one of the replays wins in a game in which "3" gaming media is bet, there is no need to bet on the gaming media, but the next game is played with "3" gaming media bet. It becomes possible to start playing the game. Additionally, if you win any replay prize in a game in which you bet the game media "2", you will not need to bet on the game media, but you will start playing the next game with the game media "2" bet. It becomes possible to do so.

Among the various replay winnings mentioned above, the first RT replay winning, the second RT replay winning, the first falling replay winning, and the second falling replay winning not only trigger the award of the replay winning privilege but also trigger the transition to the lottery mode. In this slot machine 10, a plurality of types of lottery modes are set so that the types of roles to be drawn and the probability of winning for each role are different in the lottery process (FIG. 16), and the transition between these lottery modes is This occurs when a replay prize that triggers a shift to lottery mode is established. The contents of each lottery mode and the conditions for transition to each lottery mode will be explained in detail later.

There are first CB winnings and second CB winnings as state transition winnings in which only the gaming state transition is performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Red 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Red 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol. In this case, the 1st CB prize will be awarded. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "white 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the 2nd CB It will be a prize. When the first CB winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the first CB state, and when the second CB winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the second CB state.

The first CB state and the second CB state are game states in which when a combination of symbols corresponding to a small winning combination stops on the main line ML, a winning is established and medals are paid out regardless of the presence or absence of a winning combination. For example, even if the winning flag corresponding to the first bell winning is not set to "1", if the combination of symbols corresponding to the first bell winning stops on the main line ML, the game media will be delivered to the player. Granted. On the other hand, replay winnings are established on the condition that the corresponding winning combination has been won in the lottery.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, reel control that is different from that in the non-CB state is performed. In the non-CB state, reel control is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, allowing the reels to slide for up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. That is, in the non-CB state, reel control is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop the reel until a specified time (190 msec) has elapsed after the stop buttons 42 to 44 were operated. On the other hand, in the first CB state and the second CB state, the above reel control, that is, the same reel control as in the normal game, is performed for the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, but the above reel control is not performed for the left reel 32L. Regarding the left reel 32L, a reel control is performed in which the left reel 32L is allowed to slide only up to one symbol at most after the left stop button 42 is operated. That is, in the first CB state and the second CB state, reel control is performed on the left reel 32L to stop the reel before a prescribed time (75 msec) shorter than the prescribed time elapses after the left stop button 42 is operated.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, the reel control that only slides a maximum of one symbol is not limited to the left reel 32L, but may be performed on the reel corresponding to the first operated stop button only to slide a maximum of one symbol, or may be performed on a predetermined reel only to slide a maximum of one symbol. Furthermore, reel control that only slides a maximum of one symbol on the reel corresponding to the stop button operated in a certain order may be performed, such as reel control that only slides a maximum of one symbol on the reel corresponding to the second or last operated stop button.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, if a combination corresponding to a replay win is won, the replay win takes priority, and if a replay win is not possible, the first bell win may occur. Also, the first bell win may occur even if a combination corresponding to a replay win is not won.

The first CB state and the second CB state are both game states that do not increase the number of game media owned by the player. Moreover, the first CB state and the second CB state are both game states that reduce the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state compared to the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. Details of the first CB state and the second CB state will be explained later.

Next, we will explain the devices used to make various announcements and perform various effects.

As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 are provided on the upper part of the front door 12, and an image display device 63 is also provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Furthermore, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light-emitting effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair on the left and right, and are controlled to output sound or audio corresponding to the abnormality when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, and are also controlled to output sound or audio corresponding to the winning result. Furthermore, the speakers 62 are controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display device. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the display is controlled so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. The image display device 63 is also controlled so that an image corresponding to the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface. In other words, the image display device 63 executes a display performance.

The gaming panel 20 of the front door 12 is provided with a credit display section 65 below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, which displays the number of virtual medals stored, a dual-purpose display section 66 which displays the number of gaming media to be awarded when a small win is won, and also displays the content of the notification when the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63, and further displays the results of the management of the gaming history, and a section display section 67 which displays information indicating that the gaming section is the second section. The credit display section 65 is made up of a 7-segment display, and each segment uses a single-color LED such as green.

FIG. 7A is a front view of a common display area 68 in which a dual-purpose display section 66 and a section display section 67 are provided. The common display area 68 includes a dual-purpose display section 66 provided by two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b arranged side by side in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 7(a), and a light emitting section. The section display section 67 is aggregated.

If any of the minor prizes (first bell prize, second bell prize, first watermelon prize, second watermelon prize, or cherry prize) corresponding to the granting of game media is achieved, that minor prize is established. At the end of the game, the number of game media awarded corresponding to the small win is displayed on the combined display section 66. Specifically, when either the first bell winning or the second bell winning is achieved in the non-CB state, "1" is displayed on each of the left 7 segment display 66a and the right 7 segment display 66b. By this, it is announced that "11" game media have been awarded. In addition, if either the first watermelon winning or the second watermelon winning is achieved in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. By this, it is announced that "5" game media have been awarded. In addition, when a cherry winning is achieved in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "2" is displayed on the right-hand 7-segment display 66b, indicating "2" game media. You will be notified that the has been granted.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, the number of game media awarded by winning a small prize is "1", as described in detail below. Therefore, when a small prize is won in the first CB state or the second CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "1", thereby notifying that "1" game media has been awarded.

On the other hand, even if a winning event that does not award gaming media occurs, such as a replay winning event or a CB winning event, no display corresponding to that winning event is made on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and in this case the seven-segment displays 66a, 66b remain in a hidden state. The display of the number of gaming media awarded on the dual-purpose display unit 66 ends when gaming media is bet on to start the game following the game for which the display was made, and at the time this bet is made the seven-segment displays 66a, 66b go into a hidden state.

When the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63, information corresponding to the notified stopping order is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. FIG. 7B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. As shown in FIG. 7(b), in this slot machine 10, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified by the image display device 63, and the first stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop is the middle reel. 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The stop order is that the left reel 32L is the first stop, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second stop is the middle reel 32M. A stop order in which the second stop is the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the left reel 32L, a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are arbitrary, and a stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest are arbitrary. There is an arbitrary stopping order and a stopping order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary.

Notification of the stopping order on the image display device 63 may be performed when a role including the first bell winning data is won in the role selection process in the non-CB state, when a role including the first RT replay winning data is won, when a role including the second RT replay winning data is won, when a role including the first fall replay winning data is won, or when a role including the second fall replay winning data is won. Specifically, when a role including the first bell winning data is won, the first bell winning is achieved if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning role among the above stopping orders. When the first bell winning is achieved, the gaming medium "11" is awarded to the player as already explained.

When a combination including the first RT replay winning data is won, the first RT replay winning occurs when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above-mentioned respective stop orders. When the first RT replay winning occurs, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode in which it is easier to win a combination including any replay winning data (i.e., it is easier to win any replay winning) than in the normal mode. When a combination including the second RT replay winning data is won, the second RT replay winning occurs when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above-mentioned respective stop orders. When the second RT replay winning occurs, the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode in which it is easier to win a combination including any replay winning data (i.e., it is easier to win any replay winning) than in the first RT mode.

If you win a combination that includes the first falling replay winning data, the first falling replay winning will be avoided if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stopping orders. Ru. If the first fall replay winning is achieved, the lottery mode will shift from the first RT mode to the normal mode, but by avoiding the establishment of the first falling replay winning, this transition to the normal mode can be avoided. . In addition, if you win a combination that includes the 2nd falling replay winning data, the 2nd falling replay winning will be won if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order that corresponds to the current winning combination among the above stopping orders. Avoided. When the second falling replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode, but the transition to the first RT mode is avoided by avoiding the establishment of the second falling replay winning. Can be done.

When any of the above stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a of the combined display unit 66 remains in a non-display state, while the right 7-segment display 66b displays the stop order of the order to be notified. The display contents are as shown in FIG. 7(b), and the display contents of the stop order of the combined display unit 66 are set in a one-to-one correspondence with the notification contents of the stop order of the image display device 63. However, this is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which multiple types of display contents of the combined display unit 66 are set in correspondence with some or all of the notification contents of the stop order of the image display device 63.

The display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display section 66 is different from the display content that is displayed when the dual-purpose display section 66 displays a display corresponding to the provision of game media. This makes it easier to distinguish whether the content displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66 corresponds to the number of game media awarded or the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIGS. 8A and 8B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device 63 and the display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display unit 66.

When the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced on the image display device 63, as shown in Fig. 8(a), the image display device 63 displays the same number of unit display images G1 to G3 as the number of stopping operations required to end the game, and each unit display image G1 to G3 displays an image corresponding to the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 8(a) shows the stop order being notified when the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, so the left unit display image G1 displays an image of "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, the middle unit display image G2 displays an image of "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M, and the right unit display image G3 displays an image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R.

In the image display device 63, an image is displayed that notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, whereas in the combined display unit 66, as shown in FIG. 8(b), an "L" corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed. In other words, in the image display device 63, unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed, and an image corresponding to the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed in each unit display image G1 to G3, whereas in the combined display unit 66, a display unrelated to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed. As a result, even if the combined display unit 66 displays a display corresponding to the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display content on the image display device 63.

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than that of the image display unit 63. This also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66 compared to the image display unit 63. The combined display unit 66 is also located on the opposite side to the image display unit 63, across the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R that allow the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be viewed. This means that the combined display unit 66 is positioned away from the image display unit 63, which also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display unit 63 are started after the lottery process for the winning combination is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is enabled. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 is started before the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display unit 63, but these displays may be configured to start simultaneously or approximately simultaneously, or the display start order may be reversed. In addition, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the image display unit 63 is ended when a stop command is issued for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed.

The dual-purpose display section 66 is arranged at the center of the common display area 68, whereas the section display section 67 is arranged at the corner side of the common display area 68. The section display section 67 is a display section for informing that the game section is the second section of the first section and the second section. The second section refers to the second section of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the player to achieve a win that is advantageous to the player when winning a winning combination that is different depending on the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop. By notifying the stop order, the expected value of acquiring gaming media in one game (the expected value of the value obtained by subtracting the "number of gaming media bet on in one game" from the "expected number of gaming media awarded in one game") will increase. This is a section where one or more possible advantageous gaming states (preparation state, pseudo-bonus state, and ART state) can be started, and this is a section where the advantageous gaming state can continue. On the other hand, the first section is a section in which the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state does not start and the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state does not continue.

The interval display unit 67 is turned on when the player is in a favorable gaming state in which the expected value of the gaming medium is 1 or more by being notified of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which allows the player to win a favorable winning combination in the case where the winning combination is different depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, or the winning combination in which the winning combination is different depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this case, the preparation state, pseudo bonus state, and ART state correspond to the above-mentioned favorable gaming state, while the second interval that is not the preparation state, pseudo bonus state, or ART state does not correspond to the above-mentioned favorable gaming state. Therefore, when moving from the first interval to the second interval, the interval display unit 67 may or may not switch from the off state to the on state. If the section display unit 67 remains off when moving to the second section, the section display unit 67 will change from off to on when the preparation state, pseudo bonus state, or ART state begins in the second section.

When the interval display unit 67 is turned on, it remains on until the second interval ends, and turns off when the second interval ends and transitions to the first interval. Therefore, the second interval may be maintained even if the pseudo bonus state or ART state ends and the normal game state is restored. In this case, the interval display unit 67 remains on even if the pseudo bonus state or ART state ends, and turns off when the second interval ends.

As described above, once the section display section 67 is turned on in the second section, the lighting state is maintained until the end of the second section. The display section 66 is turned on when a game medium is given, and turned off when the next game starts, and the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped is displayed on the image display device 63. When the game ends, it is turned on and turned off when the game ends. Therefore, in a configuration in which the section display section 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 so as not to be too noticeable to the player, only the section display section 67 in the common display area 68 lights up in the situation of the second section. This makes it possible to actively bring about the current situation, and it becomes easier for the game hall manager to check the section display section 67.

In addition, instead of maintaining the section display unit 67 in a lit state during the second section, the section display unit 67 may be configured to flash at a predetermined cycle during the second section. Also, other displays such as a liquid crystal display device may be used as the combined display unit 66 and the section display unit 67.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main controller 70 is attached to a back plate 11b that forms the back surface of the housing 11. The main control device 70 includes a main control board 71 housed in a board box 81. An MPU 72 is mounted on an element mounting surface, which is one board surface of the main control board 71. The board box 81 is formed transparent so that the MPU 72 housed in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81. Although the board box 81 is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 housed in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81. The main controller 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 in a board box 81 such that an opposing wall 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10. Therefore, by opening the front door 12 toward the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 and exposing the internal space of the housing 11, it becomes possible to visually see the opposing wall 82 of the board box 81, and It becomes possible to visually observe the MPU 72 through the opposing wall portion 82.

The board box 81 is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies back and forth, and these plurality of case bodies are provided with a structure to prevent separation of these case bodies and to leave traces when these case bodies are separated. A coupling portion 83 is provided. A plurality of coupling portions 83 are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 81 . As a result, even if some of the joints 83 are broken and the case body is separated in a state in which separation of the case body is prevented using some joints 83, another joint By bringing 83 into the connected state, it is possible to prevent the case body from separating again. Furthermore, when the case body is separated, the joint part 83 is destroyed and traces thereof remain, so by visually checking the joint part 83, it is possible to ascertain whether or not the case body has been illegally separated. Become. Further, a sealing sticker 84 is pasted on one side of the board box 81 other than the one side on which the coupling portion 83 is arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the seal 84 is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. This makes it possible to leave traces of the seal 84 if it is peeled off when the case body is separated.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70. The production control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 63 in the front door 12 in an overlapping manner. The production control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 based on commands received from the main control device 70. Note that, like the main control device 70, the production control device 90 includes a control board housed in a board box.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram of FIG. 9.

As already explained, the main control board 71 of the main control device 70 is equipped with an MPU 72. The MPU 72 is provided with a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 72, a RAM 74 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73, a first random number circuit 75 that sequentially updates a first random number within a predetermined numerical range based on a clock signal output from a clock circuit, a second random number circuit 76 that sequentially updates a second random number within a predetermined numerical range based on a clock signal output from the clock circuit, and a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency. In addition to the above, the MPU 72 also includes an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the ROM 73 and RAM 74 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 72, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 72, there is a reel unit 31, a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, and a medal input. An inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted from the mouth 45, credit insertion detection sensors 47a and 48a that individually detect the operation of each credit input button 47 and 48, and a payment detection sensor 51a that detects the operation of the payment button 51. , a payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, a reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54, a setting key detection sensor that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57, etc. Various sensors are connected, and signals from each of these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

The output side of the MPU 72 is connected to the reel unit 31, the selector drive unit 52a provided on the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the combined display unit 66, the section display unit 67, the performance control device 90, etc. In each game, the rotation drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31 is performed by the MPU 72. The selector 52 has a function of guiding a medal inserted from the medal insertion port 45 to the hopper device 53 after detecting it with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a when acceptance is permitted, and discharging it to the medal receiving tray 59 without detecting it with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a when acceptance is prohibited. The selector drive unit 52a has a function to switch the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permitted state and an acceptance prohibited state, and specifically, it operates the path switching piece provided on the selector 52 between an acceptance permitted position and an acceptance prohibited position. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state by switching between the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a.

Further, the MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when a small winning combination is established and medals are to be paid out. Further, the MPU 72 controls the display of the dual-purpose display section 66 so that when the award of game media occurs, the number of game media to which the award is made is displayed. Furthermore, the MPU 72 controls the display of the section display section 67 so that, when a notification start opportunity occurs in the second section, a notification that it is the second section is performed. Furthermore, the MPU 72 controls the display of the dual-purpose display section 66 so that a display corresponding to the game management results is displayed. In addition, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the production control device 90 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to the production control device 90 to notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63. In this case, display control of the dual-purpose display section 66 is performed so that a display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the effect control device 90, whereas direct display control of the dual-purpose display section 66 is performed by the MPU 72. In other words, direct display control is performed in the production control device 90 for the image display device 63, which is the target of relatively complicated display control, and the dual-purpose display unit 66, which is the target of relatively simple display control. Direct display control is executed by the MPU 72. Thereby, while reducing the processing load on the MPU 72, it is possible to perform both a display that emphasizes increasing attention to the performance and a display that emphasizes reliability.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply section and a power outage monitoring circuit that supply drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 70, and the power outage monitoring circuit supplies power to the power supply section from an external power source. monitors the current voltage, and outputs a power outage signal to the MPU 72 when the voltage falls below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes processing at the time of a power outage by receiving a power outage signal, and after the power is restored, it is possible to return to the processing state before the power outage. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power outage power supply section for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power outage in a situation where the supply of operating power from an external power source is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, data is retained in the RAM 74 when backup power can be supplied from the power supply unit during a power outage (for example, on the 1st or 2nd day). be done.

The performance control device 90 is equipped with a performance control board 91 for controlling the execution of various notifications and various performances. The performance control board 91 is equipped with an MPU 92. The MPU 92 has a built-in ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92, and a RAM 94 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 93 are executed. It also has built-in a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generating circuit, etc.

Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips. In addition, although backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 from the power-off power supply part of the power supply unit 54 in a situation where the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, the configuration is such that backup power is supplied to the RAM 94. Good too.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. As already explained, the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and various commands are received from the MPU 72. The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. Based on the commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63, thereby enabling various notifications and various performances to be performed.

Although not shown, the performance control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, etc. in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the image display device 63. The VDP is involved in reading and writing data from the video RAM, and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the image display device 63. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns to be displayed on the image display device 63. This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referenced when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, etc. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63. When the MPU 92 determines the execution content of the performance based on a command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, it outputs a drawing list to the VDP that indicates the content of the image corresponding to each update timing according to the execution content of the determined performance. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and creates display data in the video RAM using the read image data. The VDP then outputs an image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73, and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are respectively referred to as the main side MPU 72, the main side ROM 73, and the main side RAM 74, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the production control device 90 are respectively referred to as the production side. They are called MPU92, production side ROM93, and production side RAM94.

Next, the processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 10.

In the main processing, initialization processing is first performed (step S101). In the initialization process, interrupts by timer interrupt processing are permitted, and various initial settings are made for the register group, I/O device, etc. in the main MPU 72. Thereafter, it is determined whether the power is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on (step S102). If the power is turned on with the ON operation performed using the setting key (step S102: YES), if the reset button 56 is not pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: NO), After executing the partial clearing process (step S104), the setting value updating process is executed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: YES), after executing the all clear process (step S105), the setting value update process is executed (step S106). In the partial clearing process (step S104) and the all clearing process (step S105), some or all areas of the main RAM 74 are initialized. The contents of these partial clear processing (step S104) and all clear processing (step S105) will be explained later.

In the setting value update process, the current setting value is read under the condition that the setting key is inserted and turned ON, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. When the setting value update process is executed, either the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) has been executed before, so when the setting value update process starts, the credit display unit 65 displays the setting value as "1". In the setting value update process, the setting value is updated by 1 every time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. Note that if the reset button 56 is operated when the setting value is "6", the setting value is updated to "1". If the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the setting value selected at that time becomes the setting value set in the current setting value update process, and the setting value update process ends. In this case, the display of the setting value on the credit display unit 65 ends. Then, the process moves to normal processing (step S107). The normal processing will be described in detail later.

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process from step S108 onwards is executed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power was cut off. In the power recovery process, the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the setting value of the slot machine 10 is normal or not (step S108). Specifically, if the setting value is any of "1" to "6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the setting value is normal, it is determined whether the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S109). The power outage flag is provided in the main RAM 74, and if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped and a predetermined power outage process is normally executed, the power outage flag is set to "1". If the power outage flag is set to "1", it is confirmed whether the RAM determination value is normal or not (step S110). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the value is normal or not.

If an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S108 to S110, it means that the power outage processing at the previous power outage was executed normally. In this case, by writing the value of the stack pointer saved in the main side RAM 74 to the stack pointer of the main side MPU 72 and restoring the data saved in the main side RAM 74 to the register of the main side MPU 72, the register of the main side MPU 72 can be changed. The state is restored to the state before the power was cut off (step S111). Furthermore, the power failure flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S112). Thereafter, after transmitting a power restoration command for recognizing the execution of the power restoration process to the production side MPU 92 (step S113), the process returns to the address before the power was cut off (step S114).

In the return command, information indicating whether or not either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data described later is stored in the main RAM 74 is set. That is, in step S113, it is determined whether or not the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if the first CB winning data is stored, a return command in a state in which information indicating that the first CB winning data is stored is set is sent to the production side MPU 92. Also, in step S113, it is determined whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if the second CB winning data is stored, a return command in a state in which information indicating that the second CB winning data is stored is set is sent to the production side MPU 92. Also, in step S113, if it is determined that neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, a return command in a state in which information indicating that neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored is sent to the production side MPU 92.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in any of steps S108 to S110, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S115), and by clearing all output ports of the main MPU 72 to "0", all actuators connected to the relevant output ports are disabled. is turned off (step S116), and an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager and the like of the occurrence of an error (step S117). And it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing a partial clear process (step S104) or a complete clear process (step S105).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 11. Note that the timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 milliseconds.

In the register saving process (step S201), the values of all registers in the main MPU 72 used in normal processing to be described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set to "1" or not. If the power outage flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203, and a power outage process is executed.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power outage processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed, and if the transmission has not been completed, this processing is ended, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing, and the command transmission is completed. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is stored in the main RAM 74. Thereafter, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a determination value for determining whether the data in the main side RAM 74 is normal or not when the power outage is resolved is calculated and stored in the main side RAM 74, and subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If the power outage flag is not set to "1" in step S202, various processes starting from step S204 are performed. In step S204, a watchdog timer clearing process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S205, interrupt end declaration processing is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the main MPU 72 itself. In step S206, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motor provided on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In step S207, the status of various sensors connected to the input port is read, and sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether the read results are normal or not. Here, the slot machine 10 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting fraud on the hopper device 53. As already explained, the hopper device 53 has a function of dispensing medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 when a winning corresponding to the provision of game media on the main line ML is achieved. The hopper device 53 is provided with a dispensing device for dispensing the medals stored in the storage tank toward the medal discharging port 58, and a dispensing detection sensor for detecting the medals dispensed from the dispensing device. . When it is necessary to pay out game media, the payout device is driven and controlled to pay out medals, and the paid out medals are detected by a payout detection sensor. Then, when the number of medals detected by the payout detection sensor reaches the number of game media to be paid out, the payout of medals from the payout device is stopped. In this case, a tampering jig is inserted from the front of the slot machine 10 through the medal ejection port 58, and the tampering jig prevents the payout detection sensor from detecting medals, thereby reducing the number of medals that should actually be paid out. It is assumed that there is a fraudulent act in which more medals are paid out than there are medals. In this slot machine 10, even though the payout device is controlled to pay out medals, if the payout detection sensor does not detect any medals for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the payout device is activated as a payout error. Although the control will be stopped, if the above-mentioned fraudulent act is performed, a large number of medals will be paid out during the above-mentioned predetermined period. Note that when a payout abnormality occurs, an abnormality notification is executed, but the abnormality notification is canceled by performing an abnormality release operation on the key cylinder 14 after the medals are replenished.

In order to prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent acts, the slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting an object moving from the medal discharge port 58 toward the payout detection sensor. A plurality of object detection sensors are provided along the path from the medal discharge port 58 toward the payout detection sensor. In the sensor monitoring process of step S207, if the object detection sensors are in a detection state in the order of the object detection sensor on the payout detection sensor side → the object detection sensor on the medal discharge port 58 side within the abnormality detection period (for example, 5 seconds), it is determined to be normal, but if the object detection sensors are in a detection state in the order of the object detection sensor on the medal discharge port 58 side → the object detection sensor on the payout detection sensor side within the abnormality detection period, it is determined to be an intrusion abnormality. If it is determined to be an intrusion abnormality, the intrusion abnormality flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" and an intrusion abnormality command corresponding to the intrusion abnormality is sent to the performance side MPU 92. As a result, the performance side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that an intrusion abnormality notification is executed. The intrusion abnormality notification is temporarily stopped by stopping the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10, but if the intrusion abnormality flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" after the supply of operating power is resumed, an intrusion abnormality command is sent again to the performance side MPU 92, and the intrusion abnormality notification is resumed. In order to release the state in which the intrusion abnormality flag is set to "1", it is necessary to execute a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105).

In step S208, timer subtraction processing is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S209, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the outside. In step S210, command output processing is performed to send various commands to the production side MPU 92. In step S211, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S212, the values of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 are restored to the corresponding registers in the main MPU 72.

In step S213, a management process is executed to manage the game history and to display the contents corresponding to the management results on the combined display unit 66. Specifically, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section to the total number of games is calculated, and the calculated ratio is displayed on the combined display unit 66. In this case, the calculation of the ratio of the total number of games in the second section to the total number of games may be performed for each set value. In this configuration, even if the set value is changed, the calculation may continue without initializing the information on the ratio performed for each set value. Thereafter, in step S214, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 12.

First, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S301). Thereafter, a start waiting process is executed (step S302). FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the start waiting process.

First, it is determined whether or not a bet setting flag for replay provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S401). The bet set flag at the time of replay specifies whether or not the same number of bets as the number of bets in the previous game have already been set when any replay winnings have been achieved in the previous game. This is a flag for If a negative determination is made in step S401, on the condition that any replay winning has been achieved in the previous game (step S402: YES), the bet number setting counter 74a provided in the main side RAM 74 (FIG. (see), the value of the bet number history counter similarly provided in the main side RAM 74 is set (step S403). The bet number setting counter 74a is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of bets for the game to be executed, and the bet number history counter is for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of bets for the previous game. is the counter. Thereafter, the bet setting flag at the time of replay is set to "1" (step S404).

If a positive determination is made in step S401, if a negative determination is made in step S402, or if the processing of step S404 is executed, a bet handling process is executed (step S405). Figure 14 is a flowchart showing the bet handling process.

If the current gaming state is not the second CB state (step S501: NO), "3" is set as the upper limit bet number, which is the upper limit number of game media that can be bet in the current game (step S502). If the current gaming state is the second CB state (step S501: YES), "2" is set as the upper limit number of bets, which is the upper limit number of game media that can be bet in the current game (step S503). That is, in this slot machine 10, the upper limit number of bets is set to "2" when the player is in the second CB state, and the upper limit number of bets is set to "3" when the player is not in the second CB state.

When the process of step S502 or step S503 is executed, the stored virtual medals are It is determined whether a valid bet operation has been made for one or more coins (step S505). The main side RAM 74 is provided with a credit counter 74b (see FIG. 9) as an area for storing the number of stored virtual medals. In step S504, it is determined whether the number of stored virtual medals is one or more by determining whether the value of the credit counter 74b is one or more. Further, when the first credit input button 47 is operated, it is determined that a valid bet operation has been performed, and when the second credit input button 48 is operated, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is If the value is 1 or less, it is determined that a valid bet operation has been performed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S505, a bet setting process is executed (step S506). In the bet setting process, when the first credit input button 47 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is greater than or equal to the upper limit bet number, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is changed. The maximum number of bets is set, and the value corresponding to the number of virtual medals used for the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than the maximum number of bets. If so, the value of the credit counter 74b is added to the bet number setting counter 74a, and then the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0". In the bet number setting process, when the second credit input button 48 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is 2 or more, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is is set to "2", and the value corresponding to the number of virtual medals used at the time of the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than 2, If there is, the value of the credit counter 74b is added to the bet number setting counter 74a, and then the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S504, if a negative determination is made in step S505, or if the process of step S506 is executed, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a detects that a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45. It is determined whether one medal has been detected (step S507). When an affirmative determination is made in step S507, if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is less than the upper limit number of bets (step S508: NO), the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is incremented by 1 (step S509). ), if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is equal to or greater than the upper limit bet number (step S508: YES), the value of the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S510). When the process of step S509 or step S510 is executed, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is greater than or equal to the upper limit number of bets, and the value of the credit counter 74b is greater than or equal to the upper limit storage memory number (specifically, "50"). Under the condition (step S511: YES), the reception prohibition process is executed (step S512). By executing the reception prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

If a negative judgment is made in step S507, if a negative judgment is made in step S511, or if the processing of step S512 is executed, it is judged whether or not the current gaming state is the first CB state (step S513). If the current gaming state is the first CB state (step S513: YES), the bet setting completion flag at the time of acceptance provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S515) on the condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "3" (step S514: YES). On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not the first CB state (step S513: NO), the bet setting completion flag at the time of acceptance is set to "1" (step S515) on the condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is 2 or more (step S516: YES).

The bet set flag at the time of acceptance is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the number of game media that can start one game has been bet. When the gaming state is the 1st CB state, one game cannot be started in a situation where "3" game media is not bet, and when "3" game media is bet, 1 It becomes possible to start the second game. Furthermore, if the gaming state is not the 1st CB state, one game cannot be started in a situation where two or more game media are not bet, and if two or more game media are bet, It becomes possible to start the second game.

Returning to the explanation of the start waiting process (FIG. 13), after the bet corresponding process is executed in step S405, it is determined whether the settlement button 51 has been operated (step S406). If the settlement button 51 has been operated (step S406: YES), the settlement process is executed (step S407), and the bet setting completion flag at the time of acceptance in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S408). In the settlement process in step S407, if the bet setting completion flag at the time of replay in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1", the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the number of medals corresponding to the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b are discharged to the medal tray 59. In this case, the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" and the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0". On the other hand, if the replay bet setting flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", the hopper device 53 is controlled and driven so that the number of medals corresponding to the value of the credit counter 74b is discharged into the medal tray 59. In this case, the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

Returning to the explanation of the normal processing (FIG. 12), after executing the start waiting processing in step S302, it is determined whether or not either the replay bet set flag or the acceptance bet set flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S303). If a negative determination is made in step S303, the process returns to step S302. If a positive determination is made in step S303, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S302.

When the start lever 41 is operated (step S304: YES), the main line ML is activated and then the reception prohibition process is executed (step S305). By executing the reception prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged into the medal tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

Thereafter, in step S306, a start setting process is executed to perform various settings when the game is started, and in step S307, a loop lottery process is executed to perform a lottery corresponding to the ART state. In S308, a winning combination lottery process is executed to perform a winning combination lottery process in the current game, and in step S309, each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is driven and controlled in a manner corresponding to the result of the current winning combination lottery process. Executes reel control processing for.

After that, a medium provisioning process is executed (step S310). In the media awarding process, when a small winning combination is achieved in the current game, a process for awarding the player with the number of game media corresponding to the small winning combination is executed. Specifically, when awarding virtual medals, a value corresponding to the current minor prize winning is added to the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74, and when the value of the credit counter 74b has reached the upper limit storage memory number, drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit stored storage number is dispensed to the medal receiving tray 59. In addition, in the media awarding process, the dual-purpose display unit 66 is display-controlled so that a display corresponding to the number of game media that is currently subject to awarding is displayed. The display corresponding to the number of gaming media on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until a new bet on gaming media is made.

After that, a response process is executed at the end of the game to enable the setting of the game state and game zone corresponding to the result of this game (step S311). In addition, an external output setting process is executed to output the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall (step S312). After that, an acceptance permission process is executed (step S313). As a result of the acceptance permission process being executed, the medal inserted from the medal insertion port 45 is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a and then collected by the hopper device 53.

Next, the setting process at the time of start executed in step S306 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 15.

First, both the replay bet set flag and acceptance bet set flag in the master RAM 74 are cleared to "0" (step S601). Then, if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the master RAM 74 is "3" (step S602: NO), a first bet number command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S603), and if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the master RAM 74 is "2" (step S602: YES), a second bet number command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S604). The first bet number command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the number of bets on the currently started game is "3", and the second bet number command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the number of bets on the currently started game is "2".

When the processing of step S603 or step S604 is executed, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the master RAM 74 is set to the bet number history counter in the master RAM 74 (step S605). Note that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" when the current game ends.

Next, the role selection process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 16.

In step S701, a first random number used to determine whether a winning combination has been achieved is obtained. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the first random number at that time is latched from the first random number circuit 75. The first random number circuit 75 generates a first random number between "0" and "65535", and when the main MPU 72 confirms the operation of the start lever 41, it stores the value latched in the first random number circuit 75 in the main RAM 74. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain the first random number when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The first random number circuit 75 is configured to latch the value of the free-running counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the first random number, the lottery table for determining whether the hand is a hit or a miss is read from the main ROM 73 (step S702). In this slot machine 10, six levels of winning probability from "1" to "6" are prepared in advance, and by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turning it ON and performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to set which winning probability is used to execute the lottery process for the hand. The setting value "n+1" is more advantageous for the player than "n". Specifically, since the setting value "n+1" has a higher winning probability of a predetermined hand than "n", the setting value "n+1" is more advantageous for the player than "n". In addition, even if the setting value is the same level, it is more advantageous for the player if the number of gaming media bet is "3" than "2". In addition, even if the setting value is the same level, there are three types of lottery modes in which the lottery table differs in the main MPU 72: normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode. In addition to the state of each of these lottery modes, there are also a first CB state and a second CB state as game states. In step S702, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current setting value, the current number of bets, the current lottery mode, and the current game state is selected.

Taking the case where the set value is "3" as an example, the lottery tables corresponding to each of the normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode in the non-CB state will be described. First, the normal mode lottery table that is selected in the normal mode will be explained. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal mode lottery table selected when the number of bets is "3", and FIG. 18 is selected when the number of bets is "2". FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal mode lottery table when a two-card bet is made. Note that in the following description, reference is made to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 19 as appropriate.

As shown in Figures 17 and 18, index values IV are set in the lottery table for normal mode, whether three coins or two coins are bet. Each index value IV is associated with a winning role and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery role in relation to the maximum value ("65535") of the first random number circuit 75. The number of index values IV is the same when three coins are bet and when two coins are bet, and the type of winning role set for each index value IV is the same when three coins are bet and when two coins are bet, except for index value IV=17.

Specifically, the first bell winning data is set for index values IV = 1 to 4. When an index value IV = 1 is selected, as shown in FIG. 19, if the first stop (the reel on which the first stop command was issued) is the left reel 32L, the first bell winning is surely achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and the first bell winning does not occur in other cases. When an index value IV = 2 is selected, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the first bell winning is surely achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and the first bell winning does not occur in other cases. If an index value IV = 3 is reached and a win is made, the first bell will definitely be won if the first stop is the right reel 32R, regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and the first bell will not be won in any other cases. If an index value IV = 4 is reached and a win is made, the first bell will definitely be won, regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44.

As already explained in this slot machine 10, in the non-CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled so that they can be slid up to a maximum of 4 symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. It will be done. In other words, reel control is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop the reel before a predetermined time (190 milliseconds) elapses after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize corresponding to a winning combination, and to avoid winning a prize corresponding to a non-winning combination. becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R constitutes a combination of symbols for winning a prize. If five or more symbols exist between the constituent symbols, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the timing of operation of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (this phenomenon is also referred to as a "missing shot"). say). The 1st bell prize, the 2nd bell prize, and various replay prizes are won in such a manner that if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order, no missed prizes will occur. The cherry winning, the first CB winning, and the second CB winning are winning modes in which a missed prize may occur depending on the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 relative to the rotational position of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

As shown in Figures 17 and 18, the first bell winning data and the second bell winning data are set for index value IV=5. When a win occurs with index value IV=5, as shown in Figure 19, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell winning is guaranteed to occur regardless of the types of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in all other cases the first bell winning is guaranteed to occur.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the first watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=6. In the case of winning with index value IV=6, as shown in FIG. 19, the first watermelon prize can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first watermelon prize will not be achieved. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the second watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=7. In the case of winning with the index value IV=7, as shown in FIG. 19, the second watermelon prize can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second watermelon prize will not be achieved.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the cherry winning data is set to the index value IV=8. In the case of a win with the index value IV=8, as shown in FIG. 19, a cherry win can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L, there is a possibility that a cherry prize will not be achieved.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the first chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV=9. In the case of a win with the index value IV=9, as shown in FIG. 19, the first chance replay win is guaranteed regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. do. Further, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the second chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV=10. If a win is achieved with the index value IV=10, as shown in FIG. 19, the second chance replay win will definitely be achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. do.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the index values IV=11 to 16 are set with normal replay winning data and first RT replay winning data. In this case, if you win with the index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. , if the third stop (the reel where the last stop command occurred) is the right reel 32R, the first RT replay win will definitely be achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases In this case, a normal replay prize is guaranteed regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, if you win with the index value IV = 12, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to A first RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop button 44, and in other cases, a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Also, if you win with index value IV = 13, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, each stop button 42 to A first RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop button 44, and in other cases, a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Also, if you win with index value IV = 14, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to A first RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop button 44, and in other cases, a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, if you win with index value IV = 15, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to A first RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop button 44, and in other cases, a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, if you win with index value IV = 16, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to A first RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop button 44, and in other cases, a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44.

For the index value IV=17, only the 1st CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 17 in the normal mode lottery table when 3 coins are bet, and even in the normal mode lottery table when 2 coins are bet. For example, as shown in FIG. 18, only the second CB winning data is set. In other words, the 1st CB winning data is data that is set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3", and the 1st CB winning data is the data that is set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3". It can be true. In addition, the 2nd CB winning data is data that is set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on gaming media is "2", and the 2nd CB winning data is only set when the number of bets on gaming media is "2". It can be true. When the first CB winning data is set, if the number of bets on the game medium is "3", the first CB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 19. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first CB prize will not be achieved. When the second CB winning data is set, if the number of bets on the gaming medium is "2", the second CB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second CB prize will not be achieved.

Here, winning data other than the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is erased in the game in which the winning was made, regardless of whether or not the corresponding winning was made, and is not carried over to subsequent games following the game in which the winning was made. In contrast, the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are stored and held in memory until the corresponding winning is made, even in subsequent games following the game in which the winning was made, except when the clearing process of the main RAM 74 is performed (partial clearing process (step S104) or full clearing process (step S105) for the first CB winning data, and full clearing process (step S105) for the second CB winning data). In this case, in a game in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery.

In other words, if the first CB winning data is set in the main RAM 74 as a result of a game being played with the number of bets being "3", and the first CB winning data is carried over because the first CB winning data is not established, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets being "3", and the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets being "2". Also, if the second CB winning data is set in the main RAM 74 as a result of a game being played with the number of bets being "2", and the second CB winning data is carried over because the second CB winning data is not established, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets being "3", and the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets being "2". This is not limited to the case where the lottery mode is the normal mode, but is the same for the first RT mode and the second RT mode. This makes it possible to prevent either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data from being newly stored even if either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data has already been stored, and makes it possible to prevent multiple CB winning data from being accumulated and stored.

When the lottery table for normal mode when betting three coins in FIG. 17 is selected, the probability of winning when index value IV=1, the probability of winning when index value IV=2, and the probability of winning when index value IV=3 are each about 1/6.6. The probability of winning when index value IV=4 is about 1/13.1. The probability of winning when index value IV=5 is about 1/500. The probability of winning when index value IV=6 and the probability of winning when index value IV=10 are about 1/164. The probability of winning when index value IV=7 is about 1/146. The probability of winning when index value IV=8 is about 1/423. The probability of winning when index value IV=9 is about 1/328. In addition, the probability of winning when index value IV=11, the probability of winning when index value IV=12, the probability of winning when index value IV=13, the probability of winning when index value IV=14, the probability of winning when index value IV=15, and the probability of winning when index value IV=16 are each approximately 1/41. In addition, the probability of winning when index value IV=17 is approximately 1/6.6.

On the other hand, when the normal mode lottery table for 2-card bets shown in FIG. The probability is lower than when Specifically, when the normal mode lottery table when betting 2 coins is selected, the probability of winning at each index value IV = 1 to 16 is the same as when the regular mode lottery table when betting 3 coins is selected. The probability is lower than 2/3 of the probability when As a result, a game that is executed in a situation where ``3'' game media is bet is more likely to involve the granting of game media than a game that is executed in a situation where ``2'' game media is bet. It is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of a small prize winning and a replay winning in which a replay is given.

However, when the normal lottery table when two coins are bet is selected, the probability of winning when index value IV=17 is approximately 1/2.2. In contrast, when the normal lottery table when three coins are bet is selected as described above, the probability of winning when index value IV=17 is approximately 1/6.6. This makes it possible to make the probability that the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in a game executed when "2" gaming media is bet higher than the probability that the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in a game executed when "3" gaming media is bet.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the probability of occurrence of a small role prize that involves the provision of gaming media and a replay prize that gives a replay is higher in a situation where the number of bets is ``3'' than in a situation where the number of bets is ``2''. The probability that CB winning data (first CB winning data or second CB winning data) is stored in the main RAM 74 is higher in a situation where the number of bets is "2" than in a situation where the number of bets is "3". The high configuration is not limited to the normal mode, and the same applies to the first RT mode and the second RT mode.

As already explained, in the normal mode lottery table, first RT replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data as winning data with index values IV=11 to 16. The probability of winning one of these index values IV = 11 to 16 is approximately 1/6.8 in a situation where the number of bets on gaming media is "3", and the probability of winning one of these index values IV = 11 to 16 is approximately 1/6.8 if the number of bets on gaming media is "2". In this situation, it is approximately 1/10.9. If a win is achieved with index value IV = 11 to 16, the stop order of the first stop, second stop, and third stop of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds to the winning combination. When the order is reached, the first RT replay prize is established and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) becomes the first RT mode lottery table.

Next, we will explain the lottery table for the first RT mode that is selected when the setting value is "3" and the first RT mode is in a non-CB state. Figures 20 and 21 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode. Note that Figure 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode when three coins are bet, but even in the lottery table for the first RT mode when two coins are bet, the number of index values IV is the same as that of the lottery table for the first RT mode when three coins are bet, and the type of winning role set for each index value IV is the same as that of the lottery table for the first RT mode when three coins are bet, except for index value IV = 23.

In the first RT mode lottery table when betting 3 coins, as shown in FIG. 20, the winning data set for each index value IV = 1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value This is the same as the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 17). Although not shown, the winning data set for each index value IV = 1 to 10 in the first RT mode lottery table when betting two coins and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same as when betting two coins. This is the same as the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 18). Therefore, when comparing the same number of bets, the types of winning combinations for which game media can be awarded and the winning probabilities of those winning combinations are the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode, and The winning probabilities of chance play and second chance replay are also the same in each of the normal mode and the first RT mode.

The first CB winning data is set to the index value IV=23 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) when 3 coins are bet, and the winning probability is approximately 1/6.6. In addition, as already explained, the 1st CB winning data is also set in the index value IV = 17 in the normal mode lottery table (Figure 17) when betting 3 cards, and the winning probability is approximately 1/6.6. ing. Therefore, the probability of winning the first CB winning data is the same in both the normal mode and the first RT mode.

Although not shown in the figure, the second CB winning data is set to index value IV=23 in the lottery table for the first RT mode when two coins are bet, and the winning probability is approximately 1/2.2. The second CB winning data is also set to index value IV=17 in the lottery table for the normal mode when two coins are bet (Figure 18), and the winning probability is approximately 1/2.2. Therefore, the winning probability of the second CB winning data is the same in both the normal mode and the first RT mode.

The winning data set for index values IV = 11 to 22 is different from that in normal mode. In detail, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 20, second RT replay winning data is set as winning data for index values IV = 11 to 16 in addition to normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 11 to 16 is approximately 1/6.8 when three coins are bet, and approximately 1/10.2 when two coins are bet.

When the index value IV = 11 is a winning combination, as shown in Figure 21, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the second RT replay win is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay win is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Also, when the index value IV = 12 is a winning combination, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the second RT replay win is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay win is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, when the winning is made with index value IV=13, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the second RT replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, when the winning is made with index value IV=14, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the second RT replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, if the winning combination is an index value IV=15, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, then the second RT replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the normal replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 42-44. In addition, if the winning combination is an index value IV=16, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, then the second RT replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the normal replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 42-44.

In the first RT mode, if a winning combination occurs with index value IV = 11 to 16, and the first, second, and third stops of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R match the stopping order corresponding to the winning combination, a second RT replay win is established and the lottery mode transitions from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When transitioning to the second RT mode, the lottery table referenced in the combination lottery process (Figure 16) becomes the lottery table for the second RT mode.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the first RT mode lottery table, first fall replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data as winning data with index values IV=17 to 22. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=17 to 22 is about 1/10.9 when betting 3 coins, and about 1/16.4 when betting 2 coins.

21, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay prize is surely won regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and otherwise the first fall replay prize is surely won regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Also, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the normal replay prize is surely won regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and otherwise the first fall replay prize is surely won regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Furthermore, in the case where a winning combination is achieved with an index value IV=19, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay winning combination is achieved without any guarantee regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning combination is achieved without any guarantee regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In the case where a winning combination is achieved with an index value IV=20, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay winning combination is achieved without any guarantee regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning combination is achieved without any guarantee regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, when the index value IV=21 is a winning combination, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the normal replay winning combination is reliably achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and otherwise the first fall replay winning combination is reliably achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when the index value IV=22 is a winning combination, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay winning combination is reliably achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and otherwise the first fall replay winning combination is reliably achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. When the first fall replay winning combination is achieved, the lottery mode transitions to the normal mode. When the lottery mode transitions to the normal mode, the lottery table referenced in the lottery process for winning combinations (FIG. 16) becomes the lottery table for normal mode.

Because the lottery table for the first RT mode is set as described above, the probability of winning a role that allows a replay win in the first RT mode (hereinafter also referred to as the replay probability) is approximately 1/4.1 if the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3". In contrast, the replay probability in the normal mode is approximately 1/6.7 if the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3". In other words, when the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3", the first RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode. In addition, when the number of bets on the gaming medium is "2", the replay probability is approximately 1/6.1 in the first RT mode and approximately 1/10.3 in the normal mode. Therefore, even when the number of bets on the gaming medium is "2", the first RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode.

Next, a second RT mode lottery table that is selected when the set value is "3" and the second RT mode is in a non-CB state will be described. FIGS. 22 and 23 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the second RT mode lottery table. Note that FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second RT mode lottery table when 3 coins are bet, but even in the 2nd RT mode lottery table when 2 coins are bet, the number of index values IV is 3. It is the same as the lottery table for the 2nd RT mode when betting, and the types of winning combinations set for each index value IV are the same as the lottery table for the 2nd RT mode when betting 3 cards, except for the index value IV = 18. is the same as

In the lottery table for the second RT mode when three coins are bet, as shown in FIG. 22, the winning data set for each index value IV = 1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same as those in the lottery table for the normal mode when three coins are bet (FIG. 17) and the lottery table for the first RT mode when three coins are bet (FIG. 20). Although not shown, the winning data set for each index value IV = 1 to 10 in the lottery table for the second RT mode when two coins are bet and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same as those in the lottery table for the normal mode when two coins are bet (FIG. 18) and the lottery table for the first RT mode when two coins are bet. Therefore, when compared with the same number of bets, the types of roles that allow the award of game media and the winning probability of those roles are mutually the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode, and the winning probability of the first chance play and the second chance replay are also mutually the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode.

The first CB winning data is set to the index value IV=18 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 22) when 3 coins are bet, and the winning probability is approximately 1/6.6. Also, as already explained, the index value IV = 17 in the normal mode lottery table (Figure 17) when betting 3 coins and the index value IV = 23 in the first RT mode lottery table (Figure 20) when betting 3 coins. The 1st CB winning data is set, and the winning probability is approximately 1/6.6. Therefore, the probability of winning the first CB winning data is the same in each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode.

Although not shown, the 2nd CB winning data is set to the index value IV=18 in the 2nd RT mode lottery table when betting 2 cards, and the winning probability is approximately 1/2.2. , the 2nd CB winning data is also set in the index value IV = 17 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 18) when 2 coins are bet and the index value IV = 23 in the 1st RT mode lottery table when 2 coins are bet. , the probability of winning is approximately 1/2.2. Therefore, the probability of winning the second CB winning data is the same in each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode.

The winning combination data set for index values IV=11 to 17 is different from that in the normal mode and the first RT mode. In detail, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, as shown in Fig. 22, in addition to the normal replay winning data, the second fall replay winning data is set as the winning data for index values IV=11 to 16. The probability of winning any of these index values IV=11 to 16 is approximately 1/6.8 when three coins are bet, and approximately 1/10.2 when two coins are bet.
23, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, when the index value IV=12 is won, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Furthermore, in the case where a winning combination is achieved with index value IV=13, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay winning combination is achieved without any guarantee regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning combination is achieved without any guarantee regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In the case where a winning combination is achieved with index value IV=14, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay winning combination is achieved without any guarantee regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning combination is achieved without any guarantee regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, when the index value IV=15 is a winning combination, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the normal replay winning combination is reliably achieved regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning combination is reliably achieved regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, when the index value IV=16 is a winning combination, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay winning combination is reliably achieved regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning combination is reliably achieved regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the second fall replay winning combination is achieved, the lottery mode transitions to the first RT mode. When the mode transitions to the first RT mode, the lottery table referenced in the role lottery process (Figure 16) becomes the lottery table for the first RT mode.

In the second RT mode lottery table, only normal replay winning data is set at index value IV=17. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 17 is set higher than the probability of winning for other hands. Specifically, if you bet 3 cards, you will win at about 1/9.3, and if you bet 2 cards, you will win at about 1/9.3. If it were the time, it would be about 1/14.1 to win. If a win is achieved with this index value IV=17, a normal replay win will be achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44.

As described above, the lottery table for the second RT mode is set, so that the replay probability in the second RT mode is about 1/3.8 if the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3". In contrast, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1/6.7 if the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3", and the replay probability in the first RT mode is about 1/4.1 if the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3". In other words, in a situation where the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3", the second RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode and the first RT mode. In addition, in a situation where the number of bets on the gaming medium is "2", the replay probability is about 1/5.7 in the second RT mode, while it is about 1/10.3 in the normal mode and about 1/6.1 in the first RT mode. Therefore, even in a situation where the number of bets on the gaming medium is "2", the second RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode and the first RT mode. However, this is not limited to this, and the replay probability may be the same or approximately the same in the first RT mode and the second RT mode, or the replay probability may be significantly higher in the second RT mode than in the first RT mode.

In addition to the lottery table for the normal mode, the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the lottery table for the second RT mode, the main ROM 73 also stores a lottery table for CB, which is referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the roles in the first CB state and the second CB state. Only one index value IV is set in the lottery table for CB, and normal replay winning data is set in the one index value IV. The probability of winning with the index value IV is 3/10, and if the index value IV is won, a normal replay win is established regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R if the left stop button 42 is operated at a specified timing. If the left stop button 42 is not operated at a specified timing, a normal replay win is not established even if normal replay winning data is stored. On the other hand, if the index value IV is won but the left stop button 42 is not operated at a specified timing, or if the index value IV is not won, a first bell win may be established.

Here, in any of the normal mode, 1st RT mode, and 2nd RT mode, index value IV other than index value IV = 7 and 10 has the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6". It becomes. This applies whether the number of bets on the game media is "3" or "2". On the other hand, the winning probabilities for index values IV=7 and 10 are different between the set values of "1" to "6". FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining that the winning probabilities for index values IV=7 and 10 are different between set values of "1" to "6" when betting on three coins.

As shown in FIG. 24, the probability of winning with index value IV = 7 when betting 3 coins is 1 when the setting value is 1, regardless of whether it is in the normal mode, 1st RT mode, or 2nd RT mode. The lower and larger the set value, the higher the winning probability, and the set value of "6" is the highest. Also, when betting 3 coins, the probability of winning with index value IV = 10 is the lowest when the setting value is "1", regardless of whether it is in the normal mode, 1st RT mode, or 2nd RT mode. The higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning, and the setting value of "6" is the highest. This makes it possible to provide a difference in advantageousness between the set values "1" to "6". Furthermore, even when betting 2 coins, the probability of winning with index value IV = 7 is set such that the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning, regardless of whether it is in normal mode, 1st RT mode, or 2nd RT mode. In addition, the probability of winning with the index value IV=10 is set such that the larger the setting value is, the higher the probability of winning is in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery process for winning or losing a role (FIG. 16), after the lottery table is selected in step S702, the index value IV is set to 1 (step S703), and then the judgment value DV used when judging the winning or losing role is set (step S704). In this judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the value of the first random number obtained in step S701 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV (index value IV=1) is added to the value of this first random number to set the new judgment value DV.

After that, a judgment is made as to whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is a winning combination (step S705). In judging whether the winning combination is a winning combination, it is judged whether the judgment value DV exceeds "65535". If it exceeds "65535" (step S705: YES), a winning data acquisition process is executed to set the winning combination data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 (step S706).

If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S705: NO), it means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been obtained. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (step S707), and then it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made (step S708). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made, the process returns to step S704, and the judgment of the hand continues. At this time, in step S704, the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous hand (i.e., the current judgment value DV) is added to the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S705, the hand is judged to be a win/loss based on the judgment value DV.

When the process of step S706 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S708, it means that the determination of the validity of the winning combination has ended. In this case, a first stop information setting process is performed to set stop information for reel stop control (step S709). Thereafter, in step S710, an advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed, in step S711, a first control process for the game section is executed, and in step S712, a stop order notification control process is executed. The processing contents of steps S710 to S712 will be explained in detail later.

After that, a process for transmitting a game start command is executed (step S713). In this transmission process, if the current role is a winning role in the lottery process (FIG. 16), information corresponding to the winning role, information corresponding to the current lottery mode and current game state, and information corresponding to the processing results of steps S710 and S711 are set in the game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. The game start command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that a new game has started, and is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize various information determined by the main side MPU 72.

When the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command, it grasps various information about the current game from the game start command. The production side MPU 92 then determines the content of the presentation in a manner that corresponds to the various information that it has grasped. It then reads a data table corresponding to the determined content of the presentation from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94, and executes light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63 according to the read data table.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S309 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S801). In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R was started in the previous game, and if not, the process waits until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the process resets the wait time for the next game and sets the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74. By performing this process, the stepping motor acceleration process is started in the stepping motor control process of step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate. After that, the process waits until each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and the rotation start process ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R reaches a constant speed, the main MPU 72 lights up the lamps (not shown) of each stop button 42-44 to notify the player that it is possible to issue a stop command.

Then, it is determined whether any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S802). If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the process of step S802 is repeated until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, it is determined whether or not the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are spinning have been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been issued (step S803). If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S802, and the process of step S802 is repeated until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. If a stop command has been issued, the stop command command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S804). The stop command command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated to issue the stop command. If a stop command command has been sent, the stop control process shown in steps S805 to S811 is performed to stop the reels that are spinning.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (specifically, the lower row) at the time the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S805). Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. After that, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that should be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 (step S806).

In this slot machine 10, five stop patterns are prepared for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop buttons 42-44 are operated: a stop pattern in which the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as is, a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for two symbols, a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for three symbols, and a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for four symbols. Therefore, in step S806, one of the values "0" to "4" is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

Then, the calculated slip count is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol that will actually stop at the base position (step S807). Then, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that should be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stopped symbol (step S808), and if so, a reel stop process is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S809). Then, it is determined whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped (step S810). If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed (step S811), and the process returns to step S802.

The stop information here refers to information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process for winning combinations (FIG. 16). By using this stop information, it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the reaching symbol that reaches the base position when each stop button 42 to 44 is stopped. As the stop information, slip number data showing the correspondence between each symbol and the number of slips is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stopping order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, this is not limited to this, and the slip number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stopping order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, etc.

The processes for setting the above stop information include a first stop information setting process executed in step S709 of the role selection process (FIG. 16) and a second stop information setting process executed in step S811 of the reel control process (FIG. 25). In the first stop information setting process, the stop information is set according to the result of the role selection process. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process is changed after the reels have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the stop results of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

If it is determined in step S810 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a winning determination process is executed in step S812. In the winning determination process, the type of symbol stopped on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is grasped. Based on the contents of the winning data stored in the main RAM 74, the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds to the winning hand in the winning hand lottery process. It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, and if the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, winning corresponding processing is executed as a winning of the winning combination has been established.

In the winning response process, if the winning is a small win, information on the number of gaming media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that gaming media can be awarded in the media awarding process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay win, a flag setting process is executed so that the replay setting process is executed in the next start waiting process (step S302).

After executing the winning determination process, a winning result command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S813). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not a winning has been achieved this time, and if a winning has been achieved, data indicating the type of winning.

Next, the response process at the end of play, which is executed in step S311 of the normal process (FIG. 12), will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 26. Note that since the process of step S311 in the normal process (FIG. 12) is executed after the reel control process (step S309), the response process at the end of play is executed after all of the rotations of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game.

First, CB processing is executed to perform transition control and progress control of the first CB state or the second CB state (step S901). The CB processing will be explained in detail later. Thereafter, on the condition that the state is neither the first CB state nor the second CB state (step S902: NO), control processing of the lottery mode is executed (step S903). In the lottery mode control process, if the first RT replay winning is achieved in the current game, the normal mode is shifted to the first RT mode, and if the second RT replay winning is achieved in the current game, the transition is made to the first RT mode. The mode is transferred from the 1st RT mode to the 2nd RT mode, and if the 1st fall replay winning is achieved in this game, the mode is transferred from the 1st RT mode to the normal mode, and the 2nd falling replay winning is achieved in this game. If so, the second RT mode is shifted to the first RT mode.

Then, jump to the process corresponding to the current game state (step S904). Specifically, if the game state is a normal game state that is not a preparation state, a pseudo bonus state, an ART state, or a preparation state for ending, a normal process is executed (step S905), if the game state is a preparation state, a preparation state process is executed (step S906), if the game state is a pseudo bonus state, a pseudo bonus process is executed (step S907), if the game state is an ART state, an ART state process is executed (step S908), and if the game state is a preparation state for ending, a second control process for the game section is executed (step S909). In addition, if any of the normal process in step S905, the preparation state process in step S906, the pseudo bonus process in step S907, and the ART state process in step S908 is executed, the second control process for the game section (step S909) is executed. The process contents of steps S905 to S909 will be explained in detail later.

Note that if the current gaming state is the first CB state or the second CB state, by making an affirmative determination in step S902, the normal processing in step S905, the preparation state processing in step S906, and the pseudo bonus processing in step S907 are performed. The process and the ART state process in step S908 are not executed. Therefore, in the case of the first CB state or the second CB state, processing for advancing the normal gaming state, processing for advancing the preparation state, processing for advancing the pseudo bonus state, and processing for advancing the ART state processing is not executed. On the other hand, even if the current gaming state is the first CB state or the second CB state, the second control process for the gaming section in step S909 is executed. Therefore, even if the vehicle is in the first CB state or the second CB state, the process for advancing the second section is executed.

<About game status and game area>
Next, the game states and game intervals will be described. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game states and game intervals existing in the slot machine 10.

The slot machine 10 has four game states: a normal game state ST1, a first CB state ST2, a second CB state ST3, a preparation state ST4, a pseudo bonus state ST5, an ART state ST6, and an end preparation state ST7. These game states ST1 to ST7 do not occur in an overlapping manner.

The normal gaming state ST1 is a gaming state that remains when the main side RAM 74 is partially cleared (step S104) or completely cleared (step S105). Also, if the first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3 that occurred in the normal gaming state ST1 ends, if the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur when the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends, or if the ART state ST6 ends. , and when the end preparation state ST7 ends, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST1. In the normal game state ST1, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of bets on game media is "3" or "2".

The normal gaming state ST1 is calculated from the expected net increase value of game media in one game ("expected number of game media to be provided in one game") to "games betted in one game" regardless of whether 3 coins are bet or 2 coins are bet. The value obtained by subtracting the number of media) is less than 1. Further, as already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery modes, and it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes in the normal game state ST1. In addition, the normal gaming state ST1 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and a non-internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. An internal state stored in RAM 74 exists.

The first CB state ST2 is a gaming state to which the game enters when the first CB winning is achieved in a situation where the first CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. In the first CB state ST2, it is possible to execute one game when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", while it is possible to execute one game when the number of bets on the game medium is "2". I can't. Further, the second CB state ST3 is a gaming state to which the second CB winning data is entered when the second CB winning is achieved in a situation where the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. In the second CB state ST3, it is possible to execute one game when the number of bets on game media is "2", but since the upper limit number of bets is set to "2", it is possible to bet "3" game media. Can not do it.

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are gaming states in which the amount of gaming media owned by the player is not increased. Furthermore, in both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the number of gaming media owned by the player at the end of the gaming state is greater than the number of gaming media owned by the player at the start of the gaming state. This is a gaming state in which the number of . Details of these first CB state ST2 and second CB state ST3 will be explained later.

The preparation state ST4 is a game state in which the player remains as a preliminary step before transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, and can be transitioned to from the normal game state ST1. In the preparation state ST4, it is possible to play one game regardless of whether the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3" or "2". In the preparation state ST4, there exist a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and an internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.

In the preparation state ST4, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is won, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is announced. When the first bell is won, "11" gaming media is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of gaming media awarded in one game in the preparation state ST4.

As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as lottery modes, and it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes in the preparation state ST4. In the preparation state ST4 and in either the first RT mode or the second RT mode, when 3 coins are bet, the expected net increase value of game media in one game is 1 or more. On the other hand, in the preparation state ST4 and in either the first RT mode or the second RT mode, when two coins are bet, the expected net increase value of game media in one game is less than 1. Further, in the preparation state ST4 and the normal mode, the expected net increase value of game media in one game is less than 1 regardless of whether 3 coins are bet or 2 coins are bet.

In the preparation state ST4 and in the normal mode, if any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first RT replay prize is announced. . In addition, in the preparation state ST4 and in the first RT mode, if the index value IV = 11 to 16 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the second RT replay prize is If the player is notified and wins one of the index values IV=17 to 22, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid the establishment of the first falling replay prize is notified. When the second RT replay winning is established in the preparation state ST4 and the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode, the gaming state shifts to the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6.

Note that a transition to the preparation state ST4 may occur when the lottery mode is the second RT mode, but in this case, even if any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that would prevent the second fall replay from being won is not announced. Then, when the lottery mode transitions to the first RT mode in the preparation state ST4 and then transitions to the second RT mode, a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 or ART state ST6 occurs. Also, when the preparation state ST4 ends due to the establishment of the ending condition of the second section SC2 described below, a transition to the normal game state ST1 occurs.

Pseudo-bonus state ST5 is a gaming state that is transferred when the second RT replay winning is established in preparation state ST4 and the lottery mode becomes the second RT mode in a situation where the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 has been won. The pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends when the remaining number of consecutive games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 becomes "0". If the transition to the ART state ST6 is won in the pseudo bonus state ST5, the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs when the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends. This is a case where the transition to the ART state ST6 is not won in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and a case where the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without fulfilling the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, and the state returns to the normal gaming state ST1. When the second section SC2 ends during the transition, the state transitions to the end preparation state ST7. This is a case where the transition to the ART state ST6 is not won in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and a case where the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without fulfilling the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, and the state returns to the normal gaming state ST1. If the second section SC2 does not end during the transition, the game transitions to the normal gaming state ST1 without transitioning to the end preparation state ST7. Further, when the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, is satisfied, the state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST5, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of bets on the game media is "3" or "2". The pseudo bonus state ST5 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and a non-internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. A stored internal state exists.

In pseudo bonus state ST5, if any of index values IV = 1 to 3 is won, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is announced. When the first bell is won, "11" gaming media is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of gaming media awarded in one game in pseudo bonus state ST5.

As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as lottery modes, and it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. In the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and in either the first RT mode or the second RT mode, when 3 coins are bet, the expected net increase value of game media in one game is 1 or more. On the other hand, in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and in either the first RT mode or the second RT mode, when two coins are bet, the expected net increase value of gaming media in one game is less than 1. Further, in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the normal mode, the expected net increase value of game media in one game is less than 1 regardless of whether 3 coins are bet or 2 coins are bet.

The pseudo bonus state ST5 starts by transitioning to the second RT mode in the preparation state ST4 when the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 has been selected, and when the pseudo bonus state ST5 is in the second RT mode and an index value IV of 11 to 16 is selected, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can prevent the second fall replay from being won is announced. Therefore, when in the pseudo bonus state ST5, the player basically stays in the second RT mode, and when in the pseudo bonus state ST5 in the second RT mode, the expected net increase in game media in one game is 1 or more if three coins are bet as described above.

However, due to an operational error in the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a transition from the second RT mode to the first RT mode may occur in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and furthermore, a transition from the first RT mode to the normal mode may occur in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. A transition may occur. On the other hand, in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and in the normal mode, if the index value IV = 11 to 16 is won, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the establishment of the first RT replay prize are The stopping order will be announced. Furthermore, in the case of the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the first RT mode, if the index value IV = 11 to 16 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the second RT replay prize. is notified, and if any of the index values IV=17 to 22 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid the establishment of the first falling replay prize is notified.

In addition, even if the lottery mode transitions from the second RT mode to the first RT mode or from the first RT mode to the normal mode in the pseudo bonus state ST5, the number of remaining continuing games in the pseudo bonus state ST5 will be subtracted even if the pseudo bonus state ST5 is maintained and the situation is not the second RT mode.

The ART state ST6 is a gaming state that transitions when the second RT replay prize is established in the preparation state ST4 and the lottery mode becomes the second RT mode in a situation where the transition to the ART state ST6 has been won. Transition to ART state ST6 This is a gaming state that is entered when the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends in a winning situation. The ART state ST6 ends when the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6 becomes "0". When the ART state ST6 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later being satisfied, and when the second section SC2 ends at the time of transition to the normal gaming state ST1, the state shifts to the end preparation state ST7. If the ART state ST6 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later being satisfied, and the second section SC2 does not end when transitioning to the normal gaming state ST1, the ART state ST6 does not transition to the end preparation state ST7. A transition is made to the normal gaming state ST1. Further, when the ART state ST6 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, is satisfied, the state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1.

In the ART state ST6, it is possible to play one game regardless of whether the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3" or "2." In the ART state ST6, there are a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and an internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.

In ART state ST6, if any of index values IV = 1 to 3 is won, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is announced. When the first bell is won, "11" gaming media is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of gaming media awarded in one game in ART state ST6.

As already explained, there are normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode as lottery modes, and in ART state ST6, any of these lottery modes can be in effect. In ART state ST6, either in first RT mode or second RT mode, when three coins are bet, the expected net increase in gaming media in one game is 1 or more. On the other hand, in ART state ST6, either in first RT mode or second RT mode, when two coins are bet, the expected net increase in gaming media in one game is less than 1. Also, in ART state ST6, when in normal mode, when three coins are bet or two coins are bet, the expected net increase in gaming media in one game is less than 1.

Transition to ART state ST6 ART state ST6 is started by moving to the second RT mode in the preparation state ST4 of the winning situation, and a pseudo bonus state ST5 in which the player basically stays in the second RT mode. ART state ST6 is started when the state ends in a situation where the transition to ART state ST6 is successful. Then, in the ART state ST6 and in the second RT mode, if any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so that it is possible to avoid the establishment of the second falling replay prize. The order will be announced. Therefore, if the ART state is ST6, the player basically stays in the second RT mode, and if the player is in the ART state ST6 and is in the second RT mode, as described above, the game media in one game when 3 coins are bet. The expected net increase value of is 1 or more.

However, due to an error in the operation of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a transition from the second RT mode to the first RT mode may occur in the ART state ST6, and further, a transition from the first RT mode to the normal mode may occur in the ART state ST6. In contrast, when the ART state ST6 is in the normal mode, if any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first RT replay to be won is announced. Also, when the ART state ST6 is in the first RT mode, if any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second RT replay to be won is announced, and if any of the index values IV = 17 to 22 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first fall replay to be avoided is announced.

Note that even if the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode or from the first RT mode to the normal mode in the ART state ST6, the ART state ST6 is maintained and the ART state is maintained even if the situation is not the second RT mode. The remaining number of consecutive games in ST6 is subtracted.

The end preparation state ST7 is a case where the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, being satisfied, and when the subsequent transition to the normal gaming state ST1 occurs, the second section SC2 is This is the gaming state to which the game transitions when the game ends. The end preparation state ST7 ends when one game has been executed. When the end preparation state ST7 ends, a transition is made to the normal gaming state ST1. In the end preparation state ST7, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of bets on the game media is "3" or "2". The end preparation state ST7 is a gaming state in which the expected net increase in gaming media in one game is less than 1, regardless of whether 3 coins are bet or 2 coins are bet. Further, as already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery modes, and it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes in the end preparation state ST7. In addition, the termination preparation state ST7 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and a non-internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. There is an internal state stored in RAM 74.

In the configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST7 exist as described above, a game zone is set in addition to these game states ST1 to ST7. A first zone SC1 and a second zone SC2 are set as game zones. In other words, in this slot machine 10, the factors that determine the game situation are the number of game media bets of "2" and "3", the setting values of "1" to "6", the lottery modes of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode, the various game states ST1 to ST7, and the game zones of the first zone SC1 and the second zone SC2.

The first section SC1 refers to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the player to achieve winnings that are advantageous to the player when winning different winning combinations depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The expected net increase in gaming media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of gaming media bet on in one game" from the "expected number of gaming media awarded in one game") is 1 or more by being notified of the stop order. This is a section in which potentially advantageous gaming states (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6) are not started, and in which the above-mentioned advantageous gaming states do not continue. When the main side RAM 74 is partially cleared (step S104) or completely cleared (step S105), the normal gaming state ST1 and the normal mode become the first section SC1. Furthermore, when the initialization process for the second section SC2 is executed in the second section SC2, the first section SC1 also becomes the first section SC1. The second section SC2 is a section in which the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state can be started, and is a section in which the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state can continue.

28(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first section SC1 and the second section SC2. As described above, when the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the section becomes the first section SC1, and when the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed, the section becomes the first section SC1. On the other hand, the second section SC2 is shifted from the first section SC1 when a transition trigger to the second section SC2 occurs based on the lottery process of the hand (FIG. 16) in the first section SC1. In this case, when a game with the number of bets "3" is executed in the first section SC1, a transition trigger to the second section SC2 may occur, while even if a game with the number of bets "2" is executed in the first section SC1, a transition trigger to the second section SC2 does not occur. Therefore, a player who expects a transition to the second section SC2 in the first section SC1 needs to execute a game with the number of bets "3" instead of executing a game with the number of bets "2".

In the first section SC1, the expected value of net increase in gaming media in one game is definitely less than 1, whereas in the second section SC2, only when the expected value of net increase in gaming media in one game is less than 1 In some cases, the value is 1 or more. Therefore, the second section SC2 is more advantageous than the first section SC1. Therefore, the player expects the first section SC1 to transition to the second section SC2.

The first section SC1 ends when a transition opportunity to the second section SC2 occurs, and the first section SC1 transitions to the second section SC2. On the other hand, the second section SC2 ends when the pseudo bonus state ST5, the ART state ST6, or the termination preparation state ST7 ends and shifts to the normal gaming state ST1, and the second section SC2 shifts to the first section SC1. In addition, as a condition for ending the second section SC2, the total number of games played by continuing the second section SC2 without transitioning to the first section SC1 is the maximum number of games (specifically, 1500 games). ), and by continuing the second section SC2 without transitioning to the first section SC1, the limited total number of net additions of gaming media reaches the upper limit net addition number (specifically, 2400 pieces). An ending condition is set that one of the conditions for reaching the goal is met. The limited total net increase in the number of game media is defined as "the total number of game media awarded by games executed while the second section SC2 continues (in a situation where no game media are awarded, it is "0"). ”)” minus “the total number of game media used to execute the game in a situation where the second section SC2 is continued (“0” in a situation where the game is not being executed)” is specified. In the case of a difference in the number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference in the number of sheets is taken as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets is an increase in the predetermined difference in the number of sheets from the predetermined reference value.

In other words, if the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media since the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase as the second section SC2 continues, the second section SC2 ends and transitions to the first section SC1. Also, if the number of games played since the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games as the second section SC2 continues, the second section SC2 ends and transitions to the first section SC1. If either of these ending conditions is met, even if the game is in the middle of the preparation state ST4, the preparation state ST4 ends and the second section SC2 ends in the game where the ending condition is met, transitioning to the first section SC1 and normal game state ST1. Even if the game is in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST5, the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends and the second section SC2 ends in the game where the ending condition is met, transitioning to the first section SC1 and normal game state ST1. Even if the game is in the middle of the ART state ST6, the ART state ST6 ends and the second section SC2 ends in the game where the ending condition is met, transitioning to the first section SC1 and normal game state ST1. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing excessively.

As shown in FIG. 27, the player can stay in the normal gaming state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state ST3 in either the first section SC1 or the second section SC2. On the other hand, in the preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, ART state ST6, and end preparation state ST7, the player does not stay in the first section SC1, but only in the second section SC2.

Figure 28 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each game state ST1 to ST7 in the second section SC2. As already explained, in the normal game state ST1, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, the ART state ST6 and the end preparation state ST7, it is possible to execute a game in either a situation where the number of bets on game media is "3" or a situation where the number is "2", and further, in the first CB state ST2, it is possible to execute a game only when the number of bets on game media is "3", and in the second CB state ST3, it is possible to execute a game only when the number of bets on game media is "2". This is also true when the game section is the second section SC2.

In the case of the normal gaming state ST1 in the second section SC2, regardless of whether a game where the number of bets is "3" is executed or a game where the number of bets is "2" is executed. The expected net increase value of game media is less than 1. In this case, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, as will be described later, the lottery process for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 is performed based on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the winning combination in each game. However, while the transition lottery process is executed in a game where the number of bets is "3", it is not executed in a game where the number of bets is "2". In addition, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, as will be described later, the value of the canceled game number counter 74e provided in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 every time one game is executed, and the value after the 1 subtraction is When the value of the number of canceled games counter 74e is "0", the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is confirmed, but the subtraction of the number of canceled games counter 74e is performed in a game where the number of bets is "3". is executed, while it is not executed in a game where the number of bets is "2". Therefore, in the normal gaming state ST1 in the second section SC2, it is better to run a game with a bet number of "3" than to run a game with a bet number of "2". This is advantageous for the player.

When the second section SC2 is in any of the preparation state ST4, pseudo bonus state ST5 and ART state ST6, if a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, the expected net increase in the gaming medium can be 1 or more, whereas when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, the expected net increase in the gaming medium is less than 1. Therefore, when the second section SC2 is in any of the preparation state ST4, pseudo bonus state ST5 and ART state ST6, it is more advantageous for the player to have a game with a bet number of "3" executed than to have a game with a bet number of "2" executed.

As described above, in the normal gaming state ST1, preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6 in the second section SC2, it is advantageous to execute a game in which the number of bets is "3". However, the number of gaming media awarded in a game where the number of bets is "2" in any of the normal gaming state ST1, preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6 in the second section SC2 is It is added as the limited total net increase of gaming media in the second section SC2, and the number of bets is "2" in any of the normal gaming state ST1, preparation state ST4, pseudo bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6 in the second section SC2. ” is added to the total number of games played by continuing the second section SC2. In other words, a game in which the number of bets is "2" in any of the normal gaming state ST1, preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6 in the second section SC2 is disadvantageous for the player. The game ends up contributing to the satisfaction of the ending condition of the second section SC2. From this point of view, a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in any of the normal game state ST1, preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6 in the second section SC2. This is more advantageous for the player than allowing a game in which the number of bets is "2" to be executed.

Even in the second section SC2, the first CB winning can be achieved as well as the second CB winning as in the first section SC1. When the 1st CB winning is achieved in the 2nd section SC2, the 1st CB state ST2 is established in the 2nd section SC2, and the 2nd section SC2 is maintained even in the 1st CB state ST2 and after the 1st CB state ST2 ends. Ru. In addition, if the 2nd CB winning is achieved in the 2nd section SC2, the 2nd CB state ST3 will be established in the 2nd section SC2, and the 2nd section SC2 will remain in the 2nd CB state ST3 even after the 2nd CB state ST3 ends. maintained. As already explained, in both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the number of gaming media owned by the player at the end of the gaming state is greater than the number of gaming media owned by the player at the start of the gaming state. This is a game state in which the number of media is reduced. In other words, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are gaming states that are disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, the games executed in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 in the second section SC2 are added to the total number of games executed as the second section SC2 continues. In other words, even though the games executed in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are disadvantageous for the player, the games contribute to satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2. . Therefore, if the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, it will be more disadvantageous for the player.

Note that the end preparation state ST7 is the state of the game media regardless of whether a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the second section SC2 or a game with a bet number of "2" is executed. Although the expected net increase value is less than 1, this is a gaming state in which only one game is executed while the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6. Therefore, the games executed in the end preparation state ST7 do not contribute to the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media in the second section SC2, and further do not contribute to the total number of games in the second section SC2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even a game executed in the end preparation state ST7 contributes to the limited total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2, and also contributes to the limited net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2. It may also be configured to contribute to the total number of games.

<CB states ST2 and ST3>
Next, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 will be described in detail. Figure 29 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB role (i.e., the index value IV by which the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74) and the second CB role (i.e., the index value IV by which the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), and Figure 29 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), the first CB combination can be won in a game where the number of bets is "3", but cannot be won in a game where the number of bets is "2". In a game where the number of bets is "3", the probability of winning the first CB combination is approximately 1/6.6. However, the winning state of the first CB combination (that is, the state in which the first CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74), the winning state of the second CB combination (that is, the state that the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74), If the winning combination is in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the first CB combination is excluded from lottery targets in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

The second CB combination can be won in a game where the number of bets is "2", but cannot be won in a game where the number of bets is "3". In a game where the number of bets is "2", the probability of winning the second CB combination is approximately 1/2.2. However, the winning state of the first CB combination (that is, the state in which the first CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74), the winning state of the second CB combination (that is, the state that the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74), If it is in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the second CB combination is excluded from lottery targets in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

In the winning state of the first CB combination, the first CB prize can be achieved in a game where the number of bets is "3", but the first CB prize cannot be achieved in a game where the number of bets is "2". Therefore, in the case where the number of bets is "2" and a game is executed in the winning state of the 1st CB combination, even if the winning result is not won for any index value IV in the lottery process of the combination (Figure 16). , the first CB prize will not be won regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. In addition, when a game is executed in which the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the 1st CB combination, even if the winning combination is won at the index value IV that can cause a so-called missed win in the lottery process (FIG. 16), the reel The 1st CB prize cannot be won regardless of the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R and the stop operation timing of stop buttons 42 to 44. When a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the first CB combination and the first CB winning is established, the first CB state ST2 is entered.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), in the first CB state ST2, it is possible to execute a game where the number of bets is "3", and it is not possible to execute the game in a situation where the number of bets is 2 or less. Not possible. In the first CB state ST2, normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 with a probability of 3/10 in the winning combination processing (FIG. 16) in each game, and when the normal replay winning data is stored, the left stop If the button 42 is operated at a predetermined timing, a normal replay win is established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. If the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not at a predetermined timing, a normal replay winning will not be achieved even if normal replay winning data is stored.

In the first CB state ST2, if the winning data for the normal replay is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 16), or if the winning data for the normal replay is stored in the main RAM 74 but the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the specified timing and the normal replay cannot be won, the first bell may be won. In this case, the first bell is won regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but the first bell may not be won depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left stop button 42.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the winning combination processing (FIG. 16) in the first CB state ST2, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a normal replay winning is reliably achieved regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, if the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 in the lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first CB state ST2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the stop of each stop button 42 to 44 will be changed. A configuration may be adopted in which the first bell prize is reliably achieved regardless of the operation timing.

When the first bell wins in the first CB state ST2, "1" gaming medium is awarded. As already explained, in the first CB state ST2, a game can be played only when "3" gaming media are bet. In contrast, the number of gaming media awarded in the game in the first CB state ST2 is "1". The first CB state ST2 ends when "30" gaming media are awarded. Therefore, in the first CB state ST2, it is necessary to generate an event in which "1" gaming medium is awarded in a game played by betting "3" gaming media 30 times. In this case, the number of gaming media owned by the player will decrease by at least 60 from the start to the end of the first CB state ST2. Therefore, the first CB state ST2 is a disadvantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, in the first CB state ST2, as described above, a normal replay win may occur, but it is also possible that neither a normal replay win nor a first bell win occurs. In this case, if the first CB state ST2 occurs in the second section SC2, the first CB state ST2, which is disadvantageous to the player, will continue for 30 games or more, and the number of games will be added to the total number of games played in the second section SC2.

In the winning state of the second CB combination, while a second CB prize can be achieved in a game where the number of bets is "2", a second CB prize cannot be achieved in a game where the number of bets is "3". Therefore, when a game is executed in which the number of bets is "3" in the winning state of the 2nd CB combination, even if the winning result is not won for any index value IV in the lottery process for the combination (Figure 16). , the 2nd CB winning is not achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stopping operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the state where the second CB winning combination is won, even if the win is won at the index value IV, which may cause a so-called missed win in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the reel The 2nd CB prize cannot be won regardless of the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R and the stop operation timing of stop buttons 42 to 44. When a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination and the second CB winning is established, the second CB state ST3 is entered.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), in the second CB state ST3, it is possible to execute the game in a situation where the number of bets is "2", and the upper limit number of bets for game media is "2". In the second CB state ST3, normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 with a probability of 3/10 in the winning combination processing (FIG. 16) in each game, and when the normal replay winning data is stored, the left stop If the button 42 is operated at a predetermined timing, a normal replay win is established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. If the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not at the predetermined timing, the normal replay winning will not be achieved even if the normal replay winning data is stored.

In the second CB state ST3, if the winning data for the normal replay is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 16), or if the winning data for the normal replay is stored in the main RAM 74 but the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the specified timing and the normal replay cannot be won, the first bell may be won. In this case, the first bell is won regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but the first bell may not be won depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left stop button 42.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the winning combination processing (FIG. 16) in the second CB state ST3, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a normal replay winning is reliably achieved regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, if the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 in the lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first CB state ST2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the stop of each stop button 42 to 44 will be changed. A configuration may be adopted in which the first bell prize is reliably achieved regardless of the operation timing.

If the first bell is won in the second CB state ST3, "1" game media is awarded. As already explained, in the second CB state ST3, the game can be executed only when "2" game media are bet. On the other hand, the number of game media awarded in the game in the second CB state ST3 is "1". Then, the second CB state ST3 ends when "30" game media are awarded. Therefore, in the second CB state ST3, it is necessary to cause an event in which a game medium of "1" is awarded in the executed game by betting a game medium of "2" 30 times, and in this case, From the start to the end of the second CB state ST3, the number of game media owned by the player will decrease by at least 30. Therefore, the second CB state ST3 is a disadvantageous gaming state for the player. However, this disadvantage degree of the second CB state ST3 is lower than that of the first CB state ST2.

Furthermore, in the second CB state ST3, as described above, a normal replay winning may be achieved, and both a normal replay winning and a first bell winning may not be achieved. Then, if the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, the second CB state ST3, which is disadvantageous for the player, will continue for more than 30 games, and the number of games executed in the second section SC2 will continue for more than 30 games. This will be added to the total number of games played.

In the configuration in which the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are set as gaming states disadvantageous to the player as described above, by executing a game in which the number of bets is "2", the winning state of the second CB combination can be achieved. At the same time, by preventing the 2nd CB winning from being established and then executing a game where the number of bets is "3", as a result of the lottery process of the winning combination in each game (Figure 16), the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. Regardless of the order and the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, it is possible to play the game while preventing transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. In other words, if a game in which the number of bets is ``2'' is executed and the 2nd CB combination is won, then a game in which the number of bets is ``3'' is executed and the 2nd CB combination is won. Even in the winning state, the 2nd CB prize is not established. In addition, in the winning state of the 2nd CB combination, even if a game in which the number of bets is “3” is executed, the 1st CB combination is excluded from the selection target in the winning combination processing (Figure 16), so the 1st CB combination is will not be eligible for election. Since the winning state of the first CB combination is not achieved, the first CB prize is not established, and the gaming state does not shift to the first CB state ST2. This makes it possible to execute a game in which the number of bets is "3" while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 from occurring. Then, by executing a game in which the number of bets is "3", a transition to the second section SC2 may occur as described above, and a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 may occur.

Here, it is assumed that the slot machine 10 executes the process of clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105) for the purpose of obtaining an illegal profit. For example, it is assumed that a fraudulent act occurs in which a fraudulent tool is used to make the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53 unable to detect medals in a situation where medals are paid out, thereby dispensing more medals than should be paid out. In response to this, as already explained, the slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting the intrusion of the fraudulent tool, and when the intrusion of the fraudulent tool is detected by the object detection sensor, an intrusion abnormality notification is executed. Therefore, even if the fraudulent tool is inserted in a way that is not detected by the object detection sensor, the intrusion of the fraudulent tool may be detected by the object detection sensor in the process of repeating the act of fraudulently dispensing many medals using the fraudulent tool, and an intrusion abnormality notification may be executed. In this case, it is assumed that the fraudulent will perform an act of forcibly terminating the intrusion abnormality notification by fraudulently executing the process of clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105). It is expected that the illegally obtained medals will then be used to play games on the slot machine 10 in a situation where the intrusion abnormality notification is not executed.

However, when such a fraudulent act is performed, the main RAM 74 is cleared completely (step S105), and the main RAM 74 is put into a state where the second CB winning data is not stored. In other words, the second CB role is not in a winning state. If a game with the number of bets "3" is played in a state where the second CB role is not in a winning state, the first CB role may be in a winning state, and if the first CB win is established, the first CB state ST2, which is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, is entered. This makes it possible to give a disadvantage to those who have performed the above-mentioned fraudulent act. On the other hand, in the game hall, a game with the number of bets "2" is played before business hours are opened, and the second CB role is in a winning state, so that normal players who do not perform the above-mentioned fraudulent act can play a game with the number of bets "3" while preventing the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 from occurring.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), the probability of winning the second CB role in a game with a bet number of "2" is about 1/2.2, whereas the probability of winning the first CB role in a game with a bet number of "3" is about 1/6.6. In other words, the probability of winning the second CB role is set higher than the probability of winning the first CB role. This makes it possible to reduce the number of games required to win the second CB role when the winning state of the second CB role is reached by playing a game with a bet number of "2" in an amusement hall or the like. On the other hand, even if a game with a bet number of "3" is played before the winning state of the second CB role is reached by mistake, the probability of winning the first CB role is lower than the probability of winning the second CB role, making it difficult to win the first CB role.

Note that the configuration is not limited to one in which the probability of winning the second CB role is higher than the probability of winning the first CB role, and may be one in which the probability of winning the first CB role is higher than the probability of winning the second CB role, or one in which the probability of winning the first CB role and the probability of winning the second CB role are the same or approximately the same.

Figure 30 is a flow chart showing the CB processing executed by the main MPU 72. The CB processing is executed in step S901 of the response processing at the end of a game (Figure 26). As already explained, the response processing at the end of a game (Figure 26) is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game, so the CB processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game.

Whether the current game state is either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is determined by determining whether "1" is set in either the first CB state flag or the second CB state flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1001). The first CB state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify whether the game state is the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify whether the game state is the second CB state ST3.

If a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the first CB winning has been achieved in the current game (step S1002). That is, in a situation where the first CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, it is determined whether the combination of symbols corresponding to the first CB winning has stopped on the main line ML. If the first CB winning is established (step S1002: YES), the first CB status flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1003), and the first CB winning data in the main side RAM 74 is cleared (step S1004). ). Then, a first CB winning command indicating that the state has shifted to the first CB state ST2 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1005). As a result, the gaming state becomes the first CB state ST2. In the first CB state ST2, as already explained, steps S513 to S515 in the bet handling process (FIG. 14) are executed, so that the game is executed only in a situation where "3" game media is bet. The Rukoto.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1002, it is judged whether or not a second CB winning has been achieved in this game (step S1006). In other words, it is judged whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a second CB winning has stopped on the main line ML in a situation where the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. If a second CB winning has been achieved (step S1006: YES), the second CB state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1007), and the second CB winning data in the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S1008). Then, a second CB winning command indicating a transition to the second CB state ST3 is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S1009). As a result, the game state becomes the second CB state ST3. In the second CB state ST3, as already explained, the processes of steps S503, S508, S515, and S516 in the bet processing (FIG. 14) are executed, and the game is executed only when "2" gaming media has been bet.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1001, it is judged whether or not the first bell has been won in this game (step S1010). If the first bell has been won (step S1010: YES), the value of the total award counter provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S1011). The total award counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to determine the total number of game media awarded in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, and is cleared to "0" when the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is started.

If the value of the total addition counter after adding 1 becomes "30", which is the end reference number for the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 (step S1012: YES), the CB corresponding to the current CB state ST2, ST3 The status flag is cleared to "0" (step S1013). Then, a CB end command indicating that the current CB states ST2 and ST3 have ended is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1014).

Next, how the gaming state shifts to the CB states ST2 and ST3 and how the shift to the CB states ST2 and ST3 is restricted will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 31. FIG. 31(a) shows a period in which the game is played in a situation where "3" game media is bet, and FIG. 31(b) shows a period in which the game is played in a situation where "2" game media is bet. FIG. 31(c) shows the period in which the first CB combination is in the winning state, FIG. 31(d) shows the period in which the second CB combination is in the winning state, and FIG. 31(e) shows the period in which the second CB combination is in the winning state. 31(f) shows the period in which the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is possible, and FIG. 31(g) shows the period during which the first CB winning or the second CB winning can be achieved. In SC1, a period in which transition to the second section SC2 is possible is shown, and FIG. 31(h) shows a period in which the game is played in the second section SC2.

First, a case where transition to the CB states ST2 and ST3 is restricted will be described.

At timing t1, which is the timing after the main side RAM 74 has been completely cleared (step S105), a game in which the number of bets is "2" is started as shown in FIG. 31(b). In this case, in a situation where neither the 1st CB combination nor the 2nd CB combination has been won, the game section is the 1st section SC1, the lottery mode is the normal mode, and the normal gaming state ST1. be. Then, by repeatedly executing the game in which the number of bets is "2", the second CB combination is won at timing t2 as shown in FIG. 31(d). In this case, by preventing the second CB winning from occurring, the transition to the second CB state ST3 does not occur. In addition, in a situation where the second CB combination has been won, a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed as shown in FIG. 31(b), so that the second CB combination is won as shown in FIG. This is the period during which prizes can be won.

Thereafter, at timing t3, as shown in FIG. 31(a), a game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeatedly executed. Even if the 2nd CB combination is won, if a game with a bet number of “3” is executed, the 2nd CB won will not be won, and furthermore, when the 2nd CB combination is won, the 1st CB combination will be won. There's nothing to do. Therefore, at the timing t3, as shown in FIG. 31(e), there is a period in which no CB winning is possible. Furthermore, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, there is no opportunity to shift to the second section SC2, but when a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the transition to the second section SC2 does not occur. Since an opportunity for transition to SC2 may occur, the transition to the second section SC2 becomes possible at timing t3, as shown in FIG. 31(g).

After that, at timing t4, an opportunity to transition to the second section SC2 occurs, and the second section SC2 is entered as shown in FIG. 31(h), and then a game with a bet of "3" is played, and the game is played in the second section SC2.

After that, at the timing of t5, a game with the bet number of "2" is executed as shown in FIG. 31(b). In this case, since a game with the bet number of "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB role, a situation occurs in which the second CB winning can be established as shown in FIG. 31(e). Even if a game with the bet number of "2" is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game that has been completed in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 31(h). After that, the second CB winning is established at the timing of t6, and the second CB state ST3 is entered as shown in FIG. 31(f). Even if a game in the second CB state ST3 is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game that has been completed in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 31(h).

Next, a case will be described in which a game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeated from the timing after the main-side RAM 74 clearing process (step S105) is executed.

At timing t7, which is the timing after the main side RAM 74 has been completely cleared (step S105), a game in which the number of bets is "3" is started as shown in FIG. 31(a). In this case, in a situation where neither the 1st CB combination nor the 2nd CB combination has been won, the game section is the 1st section SC1, the lottery mode is the normal mode, and the normal gaming state ST1. be. When a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, an opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 may occur, so at the timing of t7, the shift to the second section SC2 is performed as shown in FIG. 31(g). This is the transition period. Thereafter, an opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 occurs at timing t8, resulting in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. Then, the game ends in the second section SC2.

After that, the game in which the bet number is "3" is repeatedly executed, and the first CB combination is won at timing t9 as shown in FIG. 31(c). In addition, in a situation where the 1st CB combination has been won, a game in which the number of bets is "3" as shown in FIG. 31(a) is executed, so that the 1st CB combination is won as shown in FIG. This is the period during which prizes can be won. Thereafter, the first CB winning is established at timing t10, and the state becomes the first CB state ST2 as shown in FIG. 31(f). Even if the game in the first CB state ST2 is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game played in the second section SC2, as shown in FIG. 31(h).

Thereafter, the first CB state ST2 ends at timing t11 as shown in FIG. 31(f). Even after the first CB state ST2 ends, the second section SC2 continues as shown in FIG. 31(h), and a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed as shown in FIG. 31(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 31(h), the game is treated as being played in the second section SC2.

Next, a case will be described in which a game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeated from the timing after the main-side RAM 74 clearing process (step S105) is executed.

At the timing of t12 after the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S105), a game with the number of bets "2" is started as shown in FIG. 31(b). In this case, neither the first CB nor the second CB role is won, the game section is the first section SC1, the lottery mode is the normal mode, and the normal game state ST1 is in effect. Then, the game with the number of bets "2" is repeatedly executed, and the second CB role is in the winning state as shown in FIG. 31(d) at the timing of t13. In this case, the transition to the second CB state ST3 does not occur by preventing the second CB winning from being established. In addition, in the situation where the second CB role is in the winning state, a game with the number of bets "2" is executed as shown in FIG. 31(b), and the period in which the second CB winning can be established is entered as shown in FIG. 31(e). Note that when a game with the number of bets "2" is executed, no opportunity to transition to the second section SC2 occurs, and therefore the period in which the second section SC2 can be transitioned to is not entered as shown in FIG. 31(g). After that, the second CB win occurs at time t14, and the second CB state ST3 occurs from time t14 to time t15, as shown in FIG. 31(f).

Next, we will explain the content of the various notifications that are executed in relation to the winning status of the CB role and the number of bets on the gaming medium.

As described above, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are unfavorable game states for the player, but by first playing a game with a bet number of "2" to enter a winning state for the second CB role, and then playing a game with a bet number of "3", it is possible to aim for the occurrence of the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 while preventing transitions to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. In this case, the slot machine 10 is configured to notify the player that the second CB role is not in a winning state and to notify the player that the third CB role is in a winning state.

FIGS. 32(a) to 32(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the notification related to the winning states of the first CB combination and the second CB combination executed by the image display device 63.

In a situation where the game can be executed and a situation where the game is being executed, a moving image of the predetermined character image G11 is displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIGS. 32(a) to 32(c). . In this case, in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed in a part of the area of the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 32(a). . The non-internal notification image G12 is displayed at a corner of the image display device 63 so as not to overlap the predetermined character image G11 in the front-back direction. The display of the non-internal notification image G12 is maintained when the situation in which neither the first CB winning combination nor the second CB winning combination continues.

As the non-internal notification image G12, there is a non-internal clear image G21 indicating that the player has not won either the 1st CB role or the 2nd CB role, and the non-internal clear image G21 that shows that the player has not won either the 1st CB role or the 2nd CB role. A non-internally played number of games image G22 indicating the number of games played in the situation is displayed. Specifically, a character image "returning" is displayed as the non-internal explicit image G21. This makes it clear that the player has not won either the first CB role or the second CB role.

Specifically, as the non-internal consumed game number image G22, a text image such as "010 games" is displayed indicating the number of games played in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won. In this case, "000 games" is displayed as the non-internal consumed game number image G22 until the first game in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won is completed after the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed. Also, "000 games" is displayed as the non-internal consumed game number image G22 until the first game in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won is completed after the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 ends. After that, whether it is a game with a bet number of "3" or a game with a bet number of "2", the number of games displayed as the non-internal consumed game number image G22 is incremented by one each time one game is played.

When neither the first CB nor the second CB role has been won, the second CB role is won in a game with a bet number of "2", and the second CB role is entered into a winning state, and the display of the non-internal notification image G12 ends, as shown in FIG. 32(b). In this case, the display of the specified character image G11 continues, but an image clearly indicating that the second CB role has been won is not displayed on the image display device 63.

When neither the first CB nor the second CB role has been won, the first CB role is won in a game with a bet number of "3", and the first CB role is won, and the display of the non-internal notification image G12 ends as shown in FIG. 32(c). In this case, the first internal indication image G13 indicating that the first CB role has been won is displayed in a partial area of the image display device 63. The first internal indication image G13 is displayed in a corner of the image display device 63 so as not to overlap with the predetermined character image G11 in the front-to-back direction. The first internal indication image G13 remains displayed as long as the first CB role remains in the winning state. Then, the first CB win is established and the game state transitions to the first CB state ST2, and the display of the first internal indication image G13 ends.

In addition, in the first CB state ST2, a CB state display is performed on the image display device 63. Also, in the second CB state ST3, a CB state display is performed on the image display device 63. The specific content of the CB state display is arbitrary, but for example, the entire display surface of the image display device 63 may be dimmed when a specific character image G11 is displayed on the image display device 63. Also, an image may be displayed indicating the remaining number of game media required to be paid out until the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 ends.

In addition to the above notifications, various types of bet number related notifications are performed as notifications related to the winning states of the first CB combination and the second CB combination. Specifically, as a bet number related notification, in a situation where neither the 1st CB role nor the 2nd CB role has been won, if the 2nd CB role is won in a game where the bet number is "2", the reel The notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is executed by the time when the stop operations of 32L, 32M, and 32R become effective. The manner of execution of notification corresponding to winning of the second CB combination is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "Win the second CB combination" is output from the speaker 62. The notification corresponding to winning of the second CB combination occurs even after the game in which the second CB combination is won, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination.

In the winning state of the second CB combination, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, a 2-bet correspondence notification is executed. The manner in which the 2-bet support notification is executed is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "2 bets are accepted" is output from the speaker 62. The 2-bet correspondence notification is that when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeated without intervening a game in which the number of bets is "3" in the winning state of the second CB combination, the number of bets is "2". It does not occur in the second game or later of a game.

In a situation where neither the first CB nor the second CB role has been won, a 3 bet notification is issued when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed. The manner in which the 3 bet notification is executed is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "3 bets" is output from the speaker 62. If a game with a bet number of "3" is repeated without a game with a bet number of "2" in between in a situation where neither the first CB nor the second CB role has been won, the 3 bet notification will not be issued in the second or subsequent games with a bet number of "3".

In a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won, if the first CB role is won in a game with a bet number of "3", a winning notification for the first CB role will be executed by the time the stopping operation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. The manner in which the winning notification for the first CB role is executed is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "You have won the first CB role" is output from speaker 62. However, the winning notification for the first CB role will only be generated in a game in which the first CB role is won, and will not be executed in either a game with a bet number of "2" or a game with a bet number of "3" in the winning state of the first CB role thereafter.

In the winning state of the first CB combination, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, a 2-bet correspondence notification is executed. The manner in which the 2-bet support notification is executed is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "2 bets are accepted" is output from the speaker 62. The 2-bet correspondence notification is that when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeated without intervening a game in which the number of bets is "3" in the winning state of the first CB combination, the number of bets is "2". It does not occur in the second game or later of a game.

Next, the manner in which various notifications are executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of bets on gaming media will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 33. FIG. 33(a) shows the execution period of the game where the number of bets is "2", FIG. 33(b) shows the execution period of the game where the number of bets is "3", and FIG. 33(c) shows the execution period of the game where the number of bets is "3". FIG. 33(d) shows the period during which the notification sound is output when a bet is "2", which occurs when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, and FIG. 33(e) shows a period during which the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63, and FIG. 33(f) shows a period in which the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63, FIG. 33(g) shows a period in which the first CB combination is won, and FIG. 33(i) shows a period in which the 2CB winning combination is in the winning state, FIG. 33(i) shows a period in which the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is being executed, and FIG. Indicates the period during which the display is being performed.

When the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 begins, the presentation execution control begins at timing t1 in the presentation side MPU 92. In this case, the full clear process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 has been executed, so neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won. Therefore, at timing t1, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 begins on the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 33(e).

After that, at the timing of t2, a game with the bet number of "3" is executed as shown in FIG. 33(b). In this case, since a game with the bet number of "3" is executed in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won, an alarm sound corresponding to the 3 bets corresponding alarm is output as shown in FIG. 33(d). This allows the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that a game with the bet number of "3" is executed in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won. Also, at the timing of t2, the display content of the non-internal number of games played image G22 of the non-internal alarm image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "000 games" to "001 games".

At timing t3, as shown in FIG. 33(b), the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed again in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. However, since this game is a game in which the number of bets from the second time onward is "3", which is played without intervening games in which the number of bets is "2", the 3-bet support notification is not executed. As a result, the 3-bet support notification is repeatedly executed when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is intentionally repeated in a situation where neither the 1st CB combination nor the 2nd CB combination has been won. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening. Further, at timing t3, the display content of the non-internally played game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "001 game" to "002 game".

Thereafter, at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 33(b), the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed again in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. In this game, the first CB combination is won as shown in FIG. 33(g). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 33(d) at the timing t4, a notification sound corresponding to the notification corresponding to winning of the first CB combination is output. This makes it possible for the player and the game hall manager to recognize that they have won the first CB combination. Further, the notification corresponding to winning of the first CB combination is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in the game in which the first CB combination is won. As a result, before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a game in which the first CB combination has been won, it becomes possible for the player and the game hall manager to recognize that the first CB combination has been won. . Further, at timing t4, the display content of the non-internally played number of games image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "002 game" to "003 game".

Thereafter, the game in which the first CB winning combination is won at timing t5 ends without the first CB winning occurring. In this case, at the timing t5, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is finished as shown in FIG. 33(e), and the first Display of the internal explicit image G13 is started. This makes it possible for the player and the game hall manager to recognize that the first CB combination has been won.

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 33(b), a game is executed with the number of bets being "3" in the winning state of the first CB role. Then, at the timing of t7, when the game ends, as shown in FIG. 33(g) and FIG. 33(i), the first CB win is established, and the game transitions to the first CB state ST2. In this case, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 33(f), the display of the first internally explicit image G13 on the image display device 63 ends, and as shown in FIG. 33(j), the display of the CB state on the image display device 63 begins.

After that, at the timing of t8, a game with the bet number of "3" is executed in the first CB state ST2. In this game, the CB state display continues on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 33(j). After that, the game with the bet number of "3" is repeated, and the first CB state ST2 ends at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 33(i). In this case, the CB state display on the image display device 63 ends at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 33(j). In addition, since neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 starts at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 33(e). In this case, the display content of the non-internal number of games played image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 becomes "000 games".

Thereafter, at timing t10, as shown in FIG. 33(a), a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. At the timing of t10, the display content of the non-internally played game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "000 games" to "001 games".

After that, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 33(a), a game with the bet number of "2" is executed again in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won. In this game, the second CB role is won as shown in FIG. 33(h). Therefore, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 33(c), a notification sound corresponding to the winning corresponding notification of the second CB role is output. This makes it possible to make the player and the manager of the game hall aware that the second CB role has been won. In addition, the winning corresponding notification of the second CB role is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in the game in which the second CB role is won. This makes it possible to make the player and the manager of the game hall aware that the second CB role has been won before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in the game in which the second CB role is won. Also, at timing t11, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "001 games" to "002 games."

Thereafter, the game in which the second CB winning combination is won at timing t12 ends without the second CB winning occurring. In this case, at the timing t12, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is ended as shown in FIG. 33(e). This makes it possible for the player and the game hall manager to recognize that the second CB combination has been won.

After that, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 33(a), a game with the number of bets being "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB role. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33(c), an alarm sound corresponding to the 2 bets notification is output, and an alarm sound corresponding to the winning response notification of the second CB role is output again. This allows the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that a game with the number of bets being "2" has been executed in the winning state of the second CB role, and allows the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB role has been won. In addition, the winning response notification of the second CB role is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This allows the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB role has been won before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed.

After that, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 33(a), a game with the bet number of "2" is executed again in the winning state of the second CB role. However, since the game is a game with the bet number of "2" from the second time onwards executed without an intervening game with the bet number of "3", the 2-bet corresponding notification is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the 2-bet corresponding notification from being repeatedly executed in response to the intentional repetition of the game with the bet number of "2" in the winning state of the second CB role. On the other hand, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 33(c), a notification sound corresponding to the winning corresponding notification of the second CB role is output again. This makes it possible to make the player or the manager of the game hall recognize that the second CB role has been won. In addition, the winning corresponding notification of the second CB role is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This allows the player and the arcade manager to recognize that the second CB role has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

After that, at timing t15 and timing t16, as shown in FIG. 33(b), a game with the number of bets being "3" is executed in the winning state of the second CB role. Since the execution of a game with the number of bets being "3" in the winning state of the second CB role is the originally expected game content, a 3 bet corresponding notification or a winning corresponding notification of the second CB role is not executed for that game.

After that, at the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 33(a), a game with the number of bets being "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB role. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33(c), an alarm sound corresponding to the 2 bets notification is output, and an alarm sound corresponding to the winning response notification of the second CB role is output again. This allows the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that a game with the number of bets being "2" has been executed in the winning state of the second CB role, and allows the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB role has been won. In addition, the winning response notification of the second CB role is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This allows the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB role has been won before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed.

Thereafter, at timing t18, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed again in the winning state of the second CB combination. However, since this game is a game in which the number of bets from the second time onward is "2", which is played without intervening a game in which the number of bets is "3", the two-bet support notification is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the 2 bet support notification from being repeatedly executed when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is intentionally repeated in the winning state of the 2nd CB combination. Become. On the other hand, at the timing t18, as shown in FIG. 33(c), the notification sound corresponding to the notification corresponding to winning of the second CB combination is outputted again. This makes it possible for the player and the game hall manager to recognize that they have won the second CB combination. Further, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the game hall manager to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

Next, a processing configuration for performing various notifications executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of bets on game media as described above will be explained.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing internal notification control processing executed by the production side MPU 92. The internal notification control process is repeatedly executed by the production side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, a 4 millisecond cycle).

First, it is determined whether a command for starting supply has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1101). When the main MPU 72 starts supplying operating power, if no abnormality has occurred in the memory state of the main RAM 74, the main processing (FIG. 10) includes a return command and all Send either an initialization command or a partial initialization command. As already explained, if no abnormality has occurred in the memory state of the main RAM 74, the return command returns to the address before the power was cut off without executing the partial clearing process (step S104) and the full clearing process (step S105). This is the command sent when returning. The all initialization command is a command sent when the all clearing process (step S105) is executed, as will be described later. The partial initialization command is a command sent when a partial clearing process (step S104) is executed, as will be described later.

If the determination in step S1101 is positive, control processing at the start of supply is executed (step S1102). Figure 35 is a flowchart showing the control processing at the start of supply.

If the all clear process (step S105) is executed in the main process (FIG. 10) of the main side MPU 72 and the all initialize command is received (step S1201: YES), the non-internal notification image on the image display device 63 The display of G12 is started (step S1202). When the all clear process (step S105) is executed, all areas of the main side RAM 74 are initialized as will be described in detail later, so neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. situation. Therefore, if the all initialization command has been received, display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 will be started. In this case, the display content of the non-internal number of games played image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 becomes "000 games".

When the main processing (FIG. 10) of the master MPU 72 is executing the partial clear process (step S104) and receiving a partial initialization command (step S1203: YES), it is determined whether the second CB role is in a winning state based on the information set in the partial initialization command (step S1204). When the partial clear process (step S104) is executed, as described in detail below, the area in the master RAM 74 where the second CB winning data will be stored is not initialized, but areas other than that area (including the area where the first CB winning data is stored) are initialized.

If the 2nd CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, even after the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed after the supply of operating power is resumed, the data is stored on the main side. The state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the RAM 74 is maintained. On the other hand, if the second CB winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed after the supply of operating power is resumed. Also, the state in which the second CB winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 is maintained. As described later, information indicating whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 is set in the partial initialization command. Therefore, in step S1204, it is determined whether the partial initialization command includes information indicating that the second CB winning data is stored.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1205). In this case, the display content of the non-internal number of games played image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 becomes "000 games". When an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, the second CB internal flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1206). The second CB internal medium flag is a flag for specifying by the performance side MPU 92 that the second CB state is a winning state.

If a return command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1207: YES), it is determined whether or not the second CB combination has been won based on the information set in the return command (step S1208). As already explained, information indicating whether either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 is set in the return command. If the second CB role has been won (step S1208: YES), the second CB internal medium flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1209).

If the second CB combination is not in the winning state (step S1208: NO), it is determined whether the first CB combination is in the winning state based on the information set in the return command (step S1210). If the first CB combination is not in a winning state (step S1210: NO), display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1211). In this case, the display content of the non-internally digested game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 becomes "000 games". If the first CB combination has been won (step S1210: YES), display of the first internal explicit image G13 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1212). Thereafter, the first CB internal flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1213). The first CB internal medium flag is a flag used by the performance side MPU 92 to specify that the first CB state is a winning state.

Returning to the explanation of the internal notification control process (FIG. 34), if the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), the information set in the winning result command is It is determined whether or not the 1CB winning combination has been won and the 1st CB winning has not been achieved (step S1104). In the reel control process (FIG. 25), the main side MPU 72 transmits a winning result command to the production side MPU 92 in step S813, which is a process executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped. The winning result command includes information corresponding to the type of winning data that was to be stored in the main RAM 74 in the lottery process for the winning combination in this game (FIG. 16), and information on whether or not a winning was established in the current game. information, and if a winning has been achieved in the current game, information on the type of winning that has been achieved is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, the first CB internal flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1105), and the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is ended (step S1106). , starts displaying the first internal explicit image G13 on the image display device 63 (step S1107).

In the internal notification control process, if a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it is determined that the second CB combination is won in the current game and the second CB combination is won in the current game based on the information set in the winning result command. It is determined whether the 2CB winning has not been achieved (step S1108). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1108, the second CB internal flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1109), and the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is ended (step S1110). .

In the internal notification control process, if the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it is further determined whether the first CB winning command or the second CB winning command is being received from the main MPU 72. Thus, it is determined whether the first CB winning or the second CB winning has been achieved in the current game (step S1111). As already explained, the main side MPU 72 transmits the first CB winning command in step S1005 of the CB processing (FIG. 30) when the first CB winning is achieved, and when the second CB winning is achieved, the CB processing In step S1009 (FIG. 30), a second CB winning command is transmitted.

If any CB winning is established (step S1111: YES), clearing processing of the CB internal flag is executed (step S1112). In the CB internal medium flag clearing process, if the first CB internal medium flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1", the first CB internal medium flag is cleared to "0", and the second CB internal flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared. If the medium flag is set to "1", the second CB internal medium flag is cleared to "0". Thereafter, various display termination processing is executed (step S1113). In the termination process, if the non-internal notification image G12 is being displayed on the image display device 63, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is ended, and the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63. In this case, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 is ended. Thereafter, the image display device 63 starts displaying the CB state (step S1114).

In the internal notification control process, if a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it further determines whether a CB end command has been received from the main MPU 72, thereby determining whether the CB states ST2 and ST3 that were to be executed have ended (step S1115). As already explained, when the CB states ST2 and ST3 that were to be executed have ended, the main MPU 72 sends a CB end command in step S1014 of the CB process (Figure 30).

If the CB states ST2 and ST3 to be executed have ended (step S1115: YES), the display during the CB state on the image display device 63 is ended (step S1116). Thereafter, display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1117).

In the internal notification control process, when a game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), both the first CB internal medium flag and the second CB internal medium flag of the production side RAM 94 are set to "1". is not set (step S1119 and step S1120: NO), a process for non-internal notification is executed (step S1121). Further, when the game start command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S1118: YES) and the first CB internal medium flag of the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1119: YES) , executes the first CB internal medium notification process (step S1122). Further, when a game start command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), and when the second CB internal medium flag of the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1120: YES) , executes the second CB internal medium notification process (step S1123).

Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the non-internal notification process executed in step S1121 of the internal notification control process (Figure 34).

First, the value of the returning counter provided in the performance side RAM 94 is incremented by 1 (step S1301). The returning counter is a counter for specifying, on the production side MPU 92, the number of times the game has been executed since the display of the non-internal notification image G12 started on the image display device 63, and is set in the returning counter. The number corresponding to the value displayed is displayed as the non-internally played game number image G22 in the non-internal notification image G12. Note that when the image display device 63 starts displaying the non-internal notification image G12, the value of the returning counter is cleared to "0". Thereafter, the display contents of the non-internal notification image G12 are changed so that the number corresponding to the value set in the returning counter after 1 addition is displayed in the non-internal played game number image G22 in the non-internal notification image G12. Update (step S1302).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S1303). As already explained, the main MPU 72 transmits the first bet number command if the number of bets for the game is "3" in the start setting process (FIG. 15) that is executed when one game is started. (Step S603), and if the number of bets in the game is "2", a second number of bets command is transmitted (Step S604). In step S1303, it is determined whether the first bet number command has been received from the main MPU 72.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, the “3” bet notification process is executed on the condition that “1” is not set in the “3” bet notification flag in the production side RAM 94 (step S1304: NO). After that (step S1305), the "3" bet notification flag is set to "1" (step S1306). In the "3" bet notification process, a 3 bet notification is performed to notify that a game with a bet number of "3" has been executed in a situation where neither the first CB winning nor the second CB winning has been won. to be executed. As a result, the speaker 62 outputs a message such as "This is a set of 3 sheets." The "3" bet notification completed flag is a flag used by the production side MPU 92 to specify whether or not notification for 3 bets has already been executed when a game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeated. If the "3" bet notification flag is set to "1", by not executing the "3" bet notification process, neither the 1st CB combination nor the 2nd CB combination has been won. If a game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeated under certain circumstances, it is possible to prevent the 3-bet support notification from being repeated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1304, or if the processing of step S1306 is executed, it is judged from the information set in the currently received game start command whether or not the first CB role has been won in the current game (step S1307). If the first CB role has been won (step S1307: YES), a notification process for when the first CB role has been won is executed (step S1308). In the notification process for when the first CB role has been won, a notification corresponding to the winning of the first CB role is executed. As a result, a message such as "You have won the first CB role" is output from speaker 62.

If a negative determination is made in step S1303, that is, if the number of bets in the current game is "2" and the second bet number command has been received from the main MPU 72, the "3" bet notification flag in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1309). Note that the "3" bet notification flag is cleared to "0" even in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the second CB combination has been won in the current game based on the information set in the game start command currently received (step S1310). If the second CB combination has been won (step S1310: YES), a notification process when the second CB is won is executed (step S1311). In the process for notification when the second CB is won, notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, a message such as "Win the second CB combination" is output from the speaker 62.

Figure 37 is a flowchart showing the first CB internal notification process executed in step S1122 of the internal notification control process (Figure 34).

First, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1401). As already explained, in the start-time setting process (FIG. 15) executed when a game is started, the master MPU 72 sends a first bet number command if the number of bets for the game is "3" (step S603), and sends a second bet number command if the number of bets for the game is "2" (step S604). In step S1401, it is determined whether the second bet number command has been received from the master MPU 72.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the “2” bet notification process is executed on the condition that “1” is not set in the “2” bet notification flag in the production side RAM 94 (step S1402: NO). After that (step S1403), the "2" bet notification flag is set to "1" (step S1404). In the "2" bet notification process, a 2 bet corresponding notification is executed to notify that a game with a bet number of "2" has been executed in the winning state of the first CB combination. As a result, the speaker 62 outputs, for example, a message such as "Two sheets are included." The "2" bet notification completed flag is a flag used by the production side MPU 92 to specify whether or not a 2 bet compatible notification has already been executed when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeated. By not executing the "2" bet notification process when the "2" bet notification completed flag is set to "1", the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the 1st CB combination. When the game is repeated, it is possible to prevent the 2-bet correspondence notification from being repeated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1401, the "2" bet notified flag in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1405). The "2" bet notified flag is also cleared to "0" when the first CB role is won, and is also cleared to "0" when the second CB role is won.

Figure 38 is a flowchart showing the second CB internal notification process executed in step S1123 of the internal notification control process (Figure 34).

First, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1501). As already explained, in the start-time setting process (FIG. 15) executed when a game is started, the master MPU 72 sends a first bet number command if the number of bets for the game is "3" (step S603), and sends a second bet number command if the number of bets for the game is "2" (step S604). In step S1501, it is determined whether the second bet number command has been received from the master MPU 72.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the “2” bet notification process is executed on the condition that “1” is not set in the “2” bet notification flag in the production side RAM 94 (step S1502: NO). After that (step S1503), the "2" bet notification flag is set to "1" (step S1504). In the "2" bet notification process, a 2 bet corresponding notification is executed to notify that a game with a bet number of "2" has been executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. As a result, the speaker 62 outputs, for example, a message such as "Two sheets are included." The "2" bet notification completed flag is a flag used by the production side MPU 92 to specify whether or not a 2 bet compatible notification has already been executed when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeated. By not executing the "2" bet notification process when the "2" bet notification completed flag is set to "1", the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the 2nd CB combination. When the game is repeated, it is possible to prevent the 2-bet correspondence notification from being repeated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1502, or if the processing of step S1504 is executed, a notification process for when the second CB is won is executed (step S1505). In the notification process for when the second CB is won, a notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB role is executed. As a result, a message such as "You have won the second CB role" is output from the speaker 62. By executing the notification process for when the second CB is won as described above, a notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB role is executed every time a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB role.

If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the "2" bet notification completed flag in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1506). The "2" bet notification flag is also cleared to "0" when the first CB combination is won, and is also cleared to "0" when the second CB combination is won.

Next, the contents of the areas of the main RAM 74 that are initialized in the partial clear processing (step S104) and the complete clear processing (step S105) in the main MPU 72 will be described.

Figure 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the memory areas of the main RAM 74. As shown in Figure 39, an address is set for each memory area of the main RAM 74. The addresses are set as consecutive number information. Specifically, the address "00FF" is set as the starting address, the address "01FF" is set as the next sequential address, the address "02FF" is set as the next sequential address, and so on so that the addresses are consecutive.

A 2nd CB winning data area, which is an area for storing 2nd CB winning data, is set as a storage area corresponding to the start address "00FF". In the winning combination processing (Figure 16), if the 2nd CB winning data is set to the index value IV that is set, the 2nd CB winning data is set in the 2nd CB winning data area, and if the 2nd CB winning is established. The second CB winning data is cleared from the second CB winning data area.

The first CB winning data area, which is an area for storing the first CB winning data, is set as a memory area corresponding to the next sequential address "01FF" relative to the starting address "00FF". When the index value IV to which the first CB winning data is set in the role selection process (FIG. 16) is won, the first CB winning data is set in the first CB winning data area, and when a first CB win is achieved, the first CB winning data is cleared from the first CB winning data area.

A setting value storage area, which is an area for storing setting values to be set, is set as a storage area corresponding to "02FF" which is the next in order to "01FF". The setting values selected in the setting value update process (step S106) of the main process (FIG. 10) are stored in the setting value storage area.

Figure 40 (a) is a flowchart showing the clear all process executed in step S105 of the main process (Figure 10).

First, "00FF", which is the start address of the main side RAM 74, is set as the target address (step S1601). Thereafter, clear execution processing is executed to clear the storage area corresponding to the current target address in the main side RAM 74 to "0" (step S1602).

After that, an address update process is executed to set the target address to the next sequential address in the addresses of the main RAM 74 (step S1603). As a result, if the previous target address was the start address "00FF", the target address becomes "01FF", and if the previous target address was "01FF", the target address becomes "02FF".

Then, it is determined whether the target address after being updated by the address update process corresponds to the end address (step S1604). The end address is the address that corresponds next in order to the final address set in the main RAM 74. If a negative determination is made in step S1604, the process returns to step S1602. In this manner, the processes of steps S1602 to S1604 are repeated, and all storage areas in the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, the process advances to step S1605. In step S1605, initial settings are performed for the storage area that was the target of the clear execution process in step S1602 in the current all clear process. Thereafter, a complete initialization command indicating that the complete clearing process has been executed for the main side RAM 74 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1606).

FIG. 40(b) is a flowchart showing the partial clearing process executed in step S104 of the main process (FIG. 10).

First, "01FF", which is the next address in order, is set as a target address for the start address of the main side RAM 74 (step S1701). As a result, the 2nd CB winning data area, which is the storage area corresponding to the start address "00FF" of the main side RAM 74, is excluded from the execution target of "0" clearing and is also excluded from the execution target of the initial setting process (step S1705). are also excluded. Thereafter, clear execution processing is executed to clear the storage area corresponding to the current target address in the main side RAM 74 to "0" (step S1702).

Thereafter, an address update process is executed to set the target address to the next sequential address in the addresses of the main side RAM 74 (step S1703). As a result, if the target address up until then was "01FF", which is the next address with respect to the start address of the main side RAM 74, the target address becomes "02FF"; ”, the target address becomes “03FF”.

Then, it is determined whether the target address after being updated by the address update process corresponds to the end address (step S1704). The end address is the address that corresponds next in order to the final address set in the main RAM 74. If a negative determination is made in step S1704, the process returns to step S1702. By repeating the processes of steps S1702 to S1704 in this manner, all of the memory areas of the main RAM 74 other than the second CB winning data area, which is the memory area corresponding to the start address of the main RAM 74, are cleared to "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1704, the process advances to step S1705. In step S1705, initial settings are performed for the storage area that was the target of the clear execution process in step S1702 in the current partial clear process. Thereafter, a partial initialization command indicating that a partial clearing process has been executed for the main side RAM 74 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1706). In this case, it is specified whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and if the second CB winning data is stored, a partial initialization command is executed with the corresponding information set. Sent.

Next, how the main MPU 72 executes the partial clearing process (step S104) and the full clearing process (step S105) will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 41. 41(a) shows a period in which operating power is supplied to the main MPU 72, FIG. 41(b) shows a period in which the main processing (FIG. 10) is executed in the main MPU 72, and FIG. c) shows the execution timing of the setting update start operation in which the power switch 55 is turned on when the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is not pressed. , FIG. 41(d) shows execution of a RAM clear operation in which the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is pressed. 41(e) shows a period during which the main side MPU 72 executes the partial clearing process (step S104), and FIG. 41(f) shows the period during which the main side MPU 72 executes the full clearing process (step S105). FIG. 41(g) shows a period in which the first CB combination is in a winning state, and FIG. 41(h) shows a period in which the second CB combination is in a winning state.

First, we will explain the case where the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started while the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and the main MPU 72 executes a partial clear process (Figure 40 (b)).

At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 41(c), the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is not pressed. By performing the setting update start operation, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. The main processing (FIG. 10) is started in the MPU 72, and then, as shown in FIG. 41(e) from timing t2 to timing t3, the main MPU 72 performs a partial clearing process (FIG. 40(b)). is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 41(h), the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started with the second CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74; The state in which the winning data is stored is maintained. Note that the setting value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing t3.

By executing a partial clear process (Figure 40 (b)) when a setting update start operation is performed as described above, even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped while the second CB role is in a winning state and the setting value update process (step S106) is executed when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed, it is possible to maintain the winning state of the second CB role even after the setting value update process (step S106) is executed. This makes it possible to prevent an incident from occurring in which the manager of the game hall must repeatedly play a game with the number of bets at "2" before the game hall opens to bring the second CB role into a winning state every time the setting value is changed.

Next, we will explain the case where the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started while the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and the main MPU 72 executes the all clear process (Figure 40 (a)).

At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 41(d), the setting key is turned on in the setting key insertion hole 57, and the reset button 56 is pressed, and the power switch 55 is turned on to perform a RAM clear operation. As shown in FIG. 41(a), the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 41(a), and the main processing (FIG. 10) is started in the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 41(b), and then, from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6, the main MPU 72 executes the all clear processing (FIG. 40(a)) as shown in FIG. 41(f). In this case, as shown in FIG. 41(h), the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started with the second CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74, but the second CB winning data is erased at the timing of t6. Note that the setting value update processing (step S106) is executed after the timing of t6.

When the RAM clear operation is performed as described above, the all clear process (Fig. 40(a)) is executed and the second CB winning data is erased, so that if the all clear process (Fig. 40(a)) is executed fraudulently, it becomes possible to create a situation in which the first and second CB roles are not won. If a game with the bet number of "3" is executed in a situation in which the second CB role is not won, the first CB win will be established and the game may transition to the first CB state ST2, which is disadvantageous to the player. This makes it possible to limit the profits that can be obtained by fraudulently executing the all clear process (Fig. 40(a)).

Next, we will explain the case where the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started while the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and the main MPU 72 executes a partial clear process (Figure 40 (b)).

At timing t7, as shown in FIG. 41(c), the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is not pressed. By performing the setting update start operation, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started at the timing t7 as shown in FIG. The main processing (FIG. 10) is started in the MPU 72, and then, as shown in FIG. 41(e) from timing t8 to timing t9, the main MPU 72 performs a partial clearing process (FIG. 40(b)). is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 41(g), the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started with the first CB winning data stored in the main side RAM 74, but at the timing t9, the first CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. Data will be erased. Note that the setting value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing t9.

As described above, even if a partial clear process (Figure 40 (b)) is executed when a setting update start operation is performed, the first CB winning data is erased, so that the state in which the first CB winning data is stored, which is not normal in normal play, can be eliminated when changing the setting value.

<About the second section SC2>
Next, the second section SC2 will be described. First, the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 42. The first control process of the game section is executed in step S711, which is a process executed after the winning/losing judgment of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery process (Fig. 16).

First, it is determined whether the second section flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1801). The second section flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game section is the second section SC2, and when the second section flag is set to "1", it is the second section SC2. The case where the value of the second section flag is "0" is the first section SC1. If the second section flag is set to "1" (step S1801: YES), the processes after step S1802 are not executed. As a result, in the case of the second section SC2, the direct lottery process in step S1806 and the stay mode lottery process in step S1810 are not executed.

If the second section flag is not set to "1" (step S1801: NO), it is determined whether the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S1802). If the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S1802: YES), the processing from step S1803 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if it is in the first section SC1, if it is in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the process for setting it in the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct lottery process in step S1806, and the step S1810 The lottery process for stay mode will not be executed.

If the current game state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S1802: NO), the number of bets for the current game is determined to be "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S1803). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1803: NO), the processing from step S1804 onwards is not executed. As a result, in a game in which the number of bets is "2" even if it is the first section SC1, the processing for setting the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct hit lottery processing in step S1806, and the lottery processing for the stay mode in step S1810 are not executed.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S1803: YES), it is determined whether any index value IV has been won in the current role selection process (FIG. 16) (step S1804). If the current role selection process (FIG. 16) is a miss (step S1804: NO), the processes from step S1805 onwards are not executed. As a result, even if the first section is SC1, if the role selection process (FIG. 16) is a miss, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct hit selection process in step S1806 and the stay mode selection process in step S1810 are not executed.

If any index value IV is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the current winning combination (step S1804: YES), the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 is The continuous games counter 74c (see FIG. 9) and the total wins counter 74d (see FIG. 9) are each cleared to "0" (step S1805). The second section SC2 is set by setting the second section flag to "1".

The number of consecutive games counter 74c is used to specify, in the main MPU 72, the number of times the game has been executed since the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between. is the counter. If the value of the continuous game number counter 74c reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) in the second period SC2, even if it is in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, In the game reached, the second section SC2 ends, and the state shifts to the first section SC1, which is the normal gaming state ST1.

The total acquisition counter 74d is a counter for the master MPU 72 to determine the limited total net increase in game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between. As already explained, the limited total net increase in game media is the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value, where the minimum value of the predetermined difference is the predetermined reference value, and the difference is the amount obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute games when the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being executed) from the total number of game media awarded by games executed when the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being awarded). If the value of the total winnings counter 74d reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit of the net increase in number of coins (specifically, 2,400 coins) in the second section SC2, even if the game is in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, the second section SC2 ends in the game in which the value is reached, and the game transitions to the first section SC1, which is the normal game state ST1.

After that, a direct lottery process is executed (step S1806). In the direct lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to win the ART state ST6 directly. FIG. 43(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of a direct win in ART state ST6 in the direct lottery process. As shown in FIG. 43(a), in the hand lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game, if the index value IV = 5 is won, there is a 4% probability that it will be a direct win in ART state ST6, If the index value IV = 6 is won, there is a 1% probability of a direct win in ART state ST6, and if the index value IV = 8 is won, there is a 3% probability of a direct win in ART state ST6. Therefore, if the index value IV=9 is won, there is a 2% probability of a direct win in ART state ST6. In this case, the lower the index value IV has a lower probability of winning in the lottery process (FIG. 16), the higher the probability of a direct win in ART state ST6. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

Index values IV = 5, 6, 8, 9, which can be a direct hit win in ART state ST6, are roles whose winning probability does not change between the set values of "1" to "6". On the other hand, even if the index value IV = 7, 10, whose winning probability changes between the set values of "1" to "6", is won, it will not be a direct hit win in ART state ST6 in the direct hit lottery process. This makes it possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage due to the set values of "1" to "6" from occurring regarding the probability of a direct hit win in ART state ST6. Note that even if the index value IV = 7, 10 is won, the direct hit lottery process is executed, but it is not limited to a configuration that does not result in a direct hit win in ART state ST6, and it may be configured such that the direct hit lottery process is not executed when the index value IV = 7, 10 is won. Furthermore, even if a win occurs with index value IV = 1 to 3 and 11 or later, the configuration is not limited to one in which a direct hit lottery process does not result in a direct hit win in ART state ST6, but may be one in which a direct hit win in ART state ST6 can occur, or may be one in which the direct hit lottery process is not executed.

If the ART state ST6 is directly won in the direct lottery process (step S1807: YES), the transition confirmation flag for the ART state ST6 provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1808). The transition confirmation flag for the ART state ST6 is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition to the ART state ST6 has been determined. When the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 is set to "1", a process for transitioning the gaming state to the ART state ST6 is executed when the current game ends.

After that, the section display unit 67 is turned on (step S1809). In the section display unit 67 turning on process, the section display unit 67 is switched from an off state to an on state. This causes the section display unit 67 to start notifying that it is the second section SC2.

If the direct lottery process does not result in a direct win in ART state ST6 (step S1807: NO), a stay mode lottery process is executed (step S1810). The stay mode is a mode that determines the maximum number of games required until the conditions for transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2 are satisfied. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stay mode.

As shown in FIG. 44, A mode, B mode, and C mode are set as the stay modes. These A mode, B mode, and C mode have different degrees of advantage for the player in relation to the maximum number of games required until the transition condition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is met.

Specifically, in A mode, the ceiling number of games is set to 700. In other words, if A mode is set when transitioning to the second section SC2, the condition for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is met when the number of games with a bet of "3" placed in the normal gaming state ST1 in the second section SC2 reaches 700 games.

If the condition for transitioning to the ART state ST6 is not met in the pseudo bonus state ST5, when the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends, the state will enter a preparation-to-end state ST7, and then the normal game state ST1. When transitioning to the normal game state ST1, the game section will transition from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. This ends A mode. On the other hand, if the condition for transitioning to the ART state ST6 is met in the pseudo bonus state ST5, the state will transition to the ART state ST6 after the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends. In this case, the second section SC2 continues. When transitioning to the normal game state ST1 after the ART state ST6 ends, the game section will transition from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. This ends A mode.

Here, as already explained, if the second section SC2 is continued without intervening the first section SC1, the number of times the game will be executed from the start of the second section SC2 is the maximum number of games (specifically, 1500 games), even if it is in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, the second section SC2 ends in the reached game and the first section SC1 is reached. Then, the state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1. Further, the number of consecutive games in the pseudo bonus state ST5 is 39 games. Furthermore, in the preparation state ST4 that occurs before transitioning from the normal gaming state ST1 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, when the stop operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are performed according to the notified order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, The expected maximum number of consecutive games is based on the relationship between the probability of winning one of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the normal mode and the probability of winning one of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the first RT mode. There will be 70 games. Then, if it takes 700 games to move to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and furthermore, 70 games are played in the preparation state ST4 and 39 games are played in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. The remaining upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is 691 games.

In addition, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the preparation state ST4 and the first RT mode, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the second RT mode, and when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the ART state ST6 and the second RT mode, the expected acquisition value of gaming media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of gaming media bet in one game" from the "expected number of gaming media to be awarded in one game") is about 2.5 coins. The sum of the maximum number of continued games (35 games) expected in the preparation state ST4, which is the first RT mode, the number of continued games (39 games) in the pseudo bonus state ST5, which is the second RT mode, and the above-mentioned remaining upper limit number of games (691 games) in the ART state ST6 is multiplied by 2.5 coins, and the result is about 1912 coins. This value is less than the upper limit net increase number of 2400 coins in the second section SC2. Therefore, when A mode is selected and ART state ST6 occurs, the minimum value expected as the maximum number of continued games in that ART state ST6 is 691 games.

When in B mode, 500 games is set as the first ceiling game number. In other words, when B mode is set when transitioning to the second section SC2, the condition for transitioning to the first pseudo bonus state ST5 is met when the number of games played in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2 reaches 500 games. This first ceiling game number is a smaller number of games than the ceiling game number in A mode. Therefore, B mode is a more advantageous mode than A mode.

If the conditions for transition to the ART state ST6 are not satisfied in the pseudo bonus state ST5, the normal gaming state ST1 is entered without shifting to the end preparation state ST7 when the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends. However, even if the game shifts to the normal gaming state ST1, the second section SC2 is maintained and the B mode is maintained. On the other hand, if the conditions for transition to the ART state ST6 are satisfied in the pseudo bonus state ST5, the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs after the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends. If the ART state ST6 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being satisfied, the normal gaming state ST1 is entered without shifting to the end preparation state ST7. However, even if the game shifts to the normal gaming state ST1, the second section SC2 is maintained and the B mode is maintained.

In the B mode, when the second normal game state ST1 is reached, 80 games are set as the second ceiling game number. As a result, when the number of games played in the normal game state ST1 reaches 80 games, the condition for transitioning to the second pseudo bonus state ST5 in the B mode is met. In other words, when the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 occurs once in the A mode, the second section SC2 ends and transitions to the first section SC1 at the time of the transition to the normal game state ST1, and the A mode ends. On the other hand, even if the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 occurs once in the B mode, the second section SC2 is maintained at the time of the transition to the normal game state ST1 thereafter, and the B mode is maintained. And the second ceiling game number in the B mode is set to a number of games less than the ceiling game number in the A mode. Therefore, from this point of view, the mode is more advantageous than the A mode. Also, the second ceiling game number in the B mode is shorter than the first ceiling game number in the B mode. This makes it possible to reduce the maximum number of games required in B mode between the first transition to pseudo bonus state ST5 or ART state ST6, the subsequent transition to normal game state ST1, and the second transition to pseudo bonus state ST5 again.

If the conditions for transition to the ART state ST6 are not satisfied in the second pseudo-bonus state ST5 in B mode, if the ending conditions for the second section SC2 are not satisfied during the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the pseudo-bonus is When the state ST5 ends, the state becomes an end preparation state ST7, and then the normal gaming state ST1 occurs. Furthermore, when transitioning to the normal gaming state ST1, the gaming section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. This ends the B mode. On the other hand, if the conditions for transition to the ART state ST6 are satisfied in the pseudo bonus state ST5, the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs after the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends. In this case, the second section SC2 continues. When the normal gaming state ST1 is entered after the ART state ST6 ends, the gaming section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. This ends the B mode.

Here, as already explained, when the number of games executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games), even if it is in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, the second section SC2 ends with the game that has been reached, and the state transitions to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. The number of games continued in the pseudo bonus state ST5 is 39 games. In addition, in the preparation state ST4 that occurs before the transition from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo bonus state ST5, the maximum number of games expected when the stop operation of each stop button 42 to 44 is performed according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that is notified is 70 games in relation to the probability of winning any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the normal mode and the probability of winning any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the first RT mode. In this case, if 500 games are required to transition to the first pseudo bonus state ST5, and then 70 games are consumed in the preparation state ST4 and 39 games are consumed in the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the pseudo bonus state ST5 transitions to the normal game state ST1 without the transition condition to the ART state ST6 being met, and then 80 games are required to transition to the second pseudo bonus state ST5, and then 70 games are consumed in the preparation state ST4 and 39 games are consumed in the pseudo bonus state ST5, then the remaining upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 after the end of the second pseudo bonus state ST5 will be 702 games.

Furthermore, if a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the preparation state ST4 and the first RT mode, the number of bets is "3" in the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the second RT mode. When a game is executed, and when a game where the number of bets is ``3'' is executed in the ART state ST6 and the second mode, the expected value of acquisition of game media in one game (``1 The value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet on in one game" from the "expected number of game media awarded in a game" is approximately 2.5 coins. Furthermore, even if the first RT mode continues for 35 games in the preparation state ST4 before the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 starts, and the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 continues for 39 games, the limited total net increase in gaming media The number of sheets is 185. This total net increase in number of coins is calculated when the conditions for transition to ART state ST6 are not satisfied in the first pseudo-bonus state ST5, and 80 games, which is the second ceiling number of games, are executed in the subsequent normal gaming state ST1. This is the number that will be completely consumed. In other words, if the conditions for transition to the ART state ST6 are not satisfied in the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the second ceiling game number of 80 games is executed in the subsequent normal gaming state ST1, the first Regardless of the gaming results until the end of the second pseudo-bonus state ST5, the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media is 0 at the time the preparation state ST4 that occurs before the second pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started. There is a high possibility that it has. The maximum number of consecutive games expected in the first RT mode, the preparation state ST4 (35 games), the maximum number of consecutive games (39 games) in the second RT mode, the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the maximum number of consecutive games expected in the ART state ST6, ie, the pseudo bonus state ST5, which is the second RT mode. When 2.5 coins are added to the sum of the remaining upper limit number of games (702 games), the result is approximately 1940 coins. This value is smaller than 2400 sheets, which is the upper limit of the net increase in the number of sheets in the second section SC2. Therefore, when the ART state ST6 occurs only once in the B mode, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6 is 702 games. This minimum value is greater than 691 games, which is the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of consecutive games in ART state ST6 in A mode.

In C mode, the ceiling game number is set to 100 games. In other words, if C mode is set when transitioning to the second section SC2, the condition for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is met when the number of games played in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2 reaches 100 games. This first ceiling game number is less than the ceiling game number in A mode and the ceiling game number in B mode. Therefore, C mode is a more advantageous mode than A mode, and is also more advantageous than B mode in terms of the first ceiling game number.

If the conditions for transition to the ART state ST6 are not satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, the state becomes an end preparation state ST7, and then the normal gaming state ST1 is entered. Furthermore, when transitioning to the normal gaming state ST1, the gaming section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. This ends the C mode. On the other hand, if the conditions for transition to the ART state ST6 are satisfied in the pseudo bonus state ST5, the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs after the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends. In this case, the second section SC2 continues. When the normal gaming state ST1 is entered after the ART state ST6 ends, the gaming section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. This ends the C mode.

Here, as already explained, when the number of games executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games), even if it is in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, the second section SC2 ends with the game that has been reached, and the state transitions to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. The number of games continued in the pseudo bonus state ST5 is 39 games. In addition, in the preparation state ST4 that occurs before the transition from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo bonus state ST5, the maximum number of games expected when the stop operation of each stop button 42 to 44 is performed according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that is notified is 70 games in relation to the probability of winning any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the normal mode and the probability of winning any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the first RT mode. In this case, if it takes 100 games to transition to pseudo bonus state ST5, and then 70 games are played in preparation state ST4 and 39 games are played in pseudo bonus state ST5, the remaining upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 after the end of pseudo bonus state ST5 will be 1291 games.

Furthermore, if a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the preparation state ST4 and the first RT mode, the number of bets is "3" in the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the second RT mode. When a game is executed, and when a game where the number of bets is ``3'' is executed in the ART state ST6 and the second mode, the expected value of acquisition of game media in one game (``1 The value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet on in one game" from the "expected number of game media awarded in a game" is approximately 2.5 coins. The maximum number of consecutive games expected in the first RT mode, the preparation state ST4 (35 games), the number of consecutive games in the second RT mode, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 (39 games), and the remaining upper limit for the ART state ST6. When 2.5 cards are added to the sum of the number of games (1291 games), the result is approximately 3413 cards. This value is greater than 2400 sheets, which is the upper limit of the net increase in the number of sheets in the second section SC2. Therefore, when the ART state ST6 occurs in the C mode, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is 886 games based on the upper limit net increase number of the second section SC2. This number of games is greater than 691 games, which is the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of consecutive games in ART state ST6 when the mode is A, and when the ART state ST6 is in the B mode. The number of games is greater than 702 games, which is the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6 in the case where this occurs only once.

In the lottery process (step S1810) for the stay mode in the first control process (FIG. 42) for the game section, the stay mode for the second section SC2 that is to be started this time is determined by lottery from among mode A, mode B, and mode C. FIG. 43(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the selection probability for each of modes A to C in the lottery process for the stay mode.

As shown in FIG. 43(b), in the lottery process for the role in this game (FIG. 16), if index value IV=1 to 3 is selected, A mode is selected with a 95% probability, B mode is selected with a 3% probability, and C mode is selected with a 2% probability; if index value IV=4 is selected, A mode is selected with a 90% probability, B mode is selected with a 7% probability, and C mode is selected with a 3% probability; if index value IV=5 is selected, A mode is selected with a 50% probability, B mode is selected with a 40% probability, and C mode is selected with a 10% probability; if index value IV=6 is selected, A mode is selected with an 85% probability, B mode is selected with a 10% probability, and C mode is selected with a 5% probability; if index value IV=7 is selected, If the index value IV is 8, A mode is selected with a probability of 88%, B mode is selected with a probability of 9%, and C mode is selected with a probability of 3%; if the index value IV is 8, A mode is selected with a probability of 60%, B mode is selected with a probability of 30%, and C mode is selected with a probability of 10%; if the index value IV is 9, A mode is selected with a probability of 70%, B mode is selected with a probability of 20%, and C mode is selected with a probability of 10%; if the index value IV is 10, A mode is selected with a probability of 80%, B mode is selected with a probability of 15%, and C mode is selected with a probability of 5%; if the index value IV is 11 or more, A mode is selected with a probability of 98%, B mode is selected with a probability of 1%, and C mode is selected with a probability of 1%. In this case, the lower the index value IV is in the winning probability in the lottery process for the hand (FIG. 16), the higher the probability that C mode is selected and the higher the probability that B mode is selected. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the lottery process for the hand (FIG. 16).

Index value IV other than index value IV = 7, 10 is a winning probability that does not change at the setting value of "1" to "6", and index value IV = 7, 10 is a combination of setting value of "1" to "6". This is a hand whose winning probability varies depending on the value. On the other hand, as described above, B mode and C mode can be selected for any index value IV, and index value IV=7, 10 is compared to index value IV=1 to 3 and 11 onwards. Therefore, the probability of selecting mode B and mode C is high. This makes it possible to create advantages or disadvantages depending on the setting values of "1" to "6" regarding the selection aspect of the stay mode.

After executing the lottery process for the stay mode (step S1810) in the first control process for the play area (Figure 42), the setting process for the stay mode is executed (step S1811). Figure 45 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the stay mode.

If the stay mode selected when setting the second section SC2 this time is A mode (step S1901: YES), the A mode flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1902), and the release game number counter 74e (see Figure 9) provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "700" (step S1903). The A mode flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that it is A mode, and the release game number counter 74e is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to identify the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is confirmed.

If the stay mode selected when setting the second section SC2 this time is B mode (step S1904: YES), the B mode flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1905), The canceled game counter 74e (see FIG. 9) of the main RAM 74 is set to "500" (step S1906), and the heaven preparation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1907). The B mode flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the mode is B mode. The heaven preparation flag is the situation after the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 started before the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed in B mode, or the first pseudo-bonus state. If a transition to ART state ST6 occurs after ST5 ends, this flag is used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the situation is after the end of ART state ST6.

If the stay mode selected when setting the second section SC2 this time is C mode (step S1904: NO), the C mode flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1908), The canceled game number counter 74e (see FIG. 9) of the main side RAM 74 is set to "100" (step S1909). The C mode flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the mode is C mode.

Returning to the explanation of the first control process for the game area (FIG. 42), after the stay mode setting process (step S1811) is executed, a lighting lottery process for the area display unit 67 is executed (step S1812). In the lighting lottery process for the area display unit 67, a lottery is held to determine whether the area display unit 67 will be turned on from the beginning when the second area SC2 is set this time (i.e., immediate lighting), or whether the area display unit 67 will be turned on when the area transitions to the preparation state ST4 thereafter (i.e., standby lighting). FIG. 43(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of selecting immediate lighting and standby lighting in the lighting lottery process for the area display unit 67.

As shown in FIG. 43(c), in the lottery process for the winning combination in this game (FIG. 16), if one of the index values IV=1 to 3 is won, there is a 50% probability that the light will turn on immediately. If selected, there is a 50% probability that lighting standby will be selected, and if the index value IV = 4 is selected, immediate lighting will be selected with a 60% probability, lighting standby will be selected with a 40% probability, and the index value IV If you win index value IV = 5, there is a 90% probability that immediate lighting will be selected and a 10% probability that you will select waiting lighting, and if you win index value IV = 6, there is a 65% probability that you will select immediate lighting. Lighting is selected and lighting standby is selected with a 35% probability, and if the index value IV = 7 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a 62% probability, lighting standby is selected with a 38% probability, and the index If you win the value IV = 8, there is an 80% probability that immediate lighting will be selected, and a 20% probability that you will select waiting lighting, and if you win the index value IV = 9, there is a 75% probability. , immediate lighting is selected and lighting standby is selected with a 25% probability, and if the index value IV = 10 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a 70% probability and lighting standby is selected with a 30% probability. , if the winning is after the index value IV=11, immediate lighting will be selected with a 40% probability and waiting lighting will be selected with a 60% probability. In this case, the lower the index value IV has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the higher the probability that immediate lighting will be selected.

If immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process for the section display unit 67 (step S1812) (step S1813: YES), lighting process for the section display unit 67 is executed (step S1814). In the lighting process for the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from an off state to a on state. This causes the section display unit 67 to start announcing that it is the second section SC2.

On the other hand, if standby is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S1812) for the section display unit 67 (step S1813: NO), the standby flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1815). The standby flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that the section display unit 67 is waiting to be switched from an off state to a on state in the second section SC2.

Next, the timing at which the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state in the second section SC2 will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 46. 46(a) shows a period in which one game is executed, FIG. 46(b) shows a period in the second section SC2, FIG. 46(c) shows a period in the normal gaming state ST1, FIG. 46(d) shows a period in which the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and the termination preparation state ST7 that occurs when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, and FIG. 46(e) shows the period in the ART state ST6 and 46(f) shows a period in A mode, and FIG. 46(g) shows a period in B mode. 46(h) shows a period during which the section display section 67 is in a lit state. Note that the number of bets for each game in the time chart of FIG. 46 is "3".

As shown in FIG. 46(a), one game is executed at timing t1 in the first section SC1. In this case, the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 16) results in a losing result in which none of the index values IV are selected. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46(b), no transition to the second section SC2 occurs.

Thereafter, a new game is executed at timing t2 as shown in FIG. 46(a). In this game, one of the index values IV is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16). Therefore, at timing t2, which is the timing at which the current game is started, the second section SC2 occurs as shown in FIG. 46(b). Furthermore, since A mode is selected as the stay mode, the mode becomes A mode at timing t2 as shown in FIG. 46(f). However, lighting standby is selected in the lighting lottery process of the section display section 67 executed at timing t2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46(h), at timing t2 when the second section SC2 is started, the section display section 67 is maintained in the unlit state without being switched to the lit state.

Thereafter, a repeated game is played in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1. Then, in this situation, a new game is started at timing t3 as shown in FIG. 46(a). By confirming the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the game, the transition from the normal gaming state ST1 to the preparation state as shown in FIGS. 46(c) and 46(d) occurs at timing t4, which is the timing at which the game ends. Move to ST4. In addition, the expected net increase value of gaming media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of gaming media betted in one game" from the "expected number of gaming media awarded in one game") shifts to a preparation state ST4 in which it can be 1 or more. In line with this, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state at the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 46(h).

In other words, although the section display section 67 can be kept in the off state even if it moves to the second section SC2, it is definitely turned on when it moves to a gaming state in which the expected net increase value of gaming media can be 1 or more. . As a result, in a gaming state where the expected net increase value of gaming media can be 1 or more, it is possible to notify the game hall manager or the like that the gaming state is in question.

After that, at timing t5, as shown in FIG. 46(a), a new game is started in the second interval SC2 and in the preparation state ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the interval display unit 67 is maintained in a lit state. After that, as the game is repeatedly played, a transition from the preparation state ST4 to the pseudo bonus state ST5 occurs and the pseudo bonus state ST5 is consumed. Even in this case, the interval display unit 67 is maintained in a lit state.

After that, at the timing of t6, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 46(a). In the game immediately before the current game, the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST5 is 0, and the transition to the ART state ST6 has not been confirmed in the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the current stay mode is A mode. Therefore, the current game enters the end preparation state ST7, which occurs when the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends. Then, in the game in the end preparation state ST7, at the timing of t7, which is the timing when the game ends, the game transitions from the end preparation state ST7 to the normal game state ST1 as shown in FIG. 46(c) and FIG. 46(d). Also, at the timing of t7, the second section SC2 ends as shown in FIG. 46(b) and becomes the first section SC1, and the A mode ends as shown in FIG. 46(f). Also, since the second section SC2 ends, the section display unit 67 is turned off at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 46(h).

Thereafter, a new game is executed at timing t8 as shown in FIG. 46(a). In this game, one of the index values IV is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16). Therefore, at timing t8, which is the timing at which the current game is started, the second section SC2 occurs as shown in FIG. 46(b). Further, since A mode is selected as the stay mode, the mode becomes A mode at timing t8 as shown in FIG. 46(f). In addition, immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process of the section display section 67 executed at timing t8. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state at timing t8 when the second section SC2 is started.

Thereafter, a repeated game is played in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1. Then, in this situation, the game ends at timing t9, in which the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is determined as shown in FIG. 46(a). Therefore, at the timing of t9, the normal gaming state ST1 shifts to the preparation state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 46(c) and 46(d). In this case, the section display section 67 is maintained in a lit state as shown in FIG. 46(h).

After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 46(a), a new game is started in the second section SC2 and in the preparation state ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state. After that, the game is repeatedly played, and a transition from the preparation state ST4 to the pseudo bonus state ST5 occurs, and the pseudo bonus state ST5 is consumed. Even in this case, the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state. Then, in this situation, the game is ended at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 46(a), and the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST5 becomes 0 games. In this case, a transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state ST5. Therefore, at the timing of t11, a transition from the pseudo bonus state ST5 to the ART state ST6 occurs as shown in FIG. 46(d) and FIG. 46(e). In this case, the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state as shown in FIG. 46(h).

Thereafter, at timing t12, as shown in FIG. 46(a), a new game is started in the second section SC2 and in the ART state ST6. In this case, the section display section 67 is maintained in a lit state as shown in FIG. 46(h). Thereafter, the ART state ST6 is exhausted by playing the game repeatedly.

After that, at the timing of t13, a new game starts as shown in FIG. 46(a). In the game immediately before the current game, the number of remaining games in the ART state ST6 is 0, and the current stay mode is A mode. Therefore, the current game enters the end preparation state ST7, which occurs when the ART state ST6 ends. Then, in the game in the end preparation state ST7, at the timing of t14, which is the timing when the game ends, the game transitions from the end preparation state ST7 to the normal game state ST1 as shown in FIG. 46(c) and FIG. 46(e). Also, at the timing of t14, the second section SC2 ends as shown in FIG. 46(b), becoming the first section SC1, and the A mode ends as shown in FIG. 46(f). Also, since the second section SC2 ends, the section display unit 67 is turned off at the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 46(h).

After that, at the timing of t15, a new game is executed as shown in FIG. 46(a). In this game, one of the index values IV is won in the lottery process for winning roles (FIG. 16). Therefore, at the timing of t15 when the current game is started, the second section SC2 is entered as shown in FIG. 46(b). Furthermore, since B mode is selected as the stay mode, the B mode is entered as shown in FIG. 46(g) at the timing of t15. Furthermore, immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process for the section display unit 67 executed at the timing of t15. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46(h), at the timing of t15 when the second section SC2 is started, the section display unit 67 is switched from an off state to a lighted state.

Then, the game is repeatedly played in the second section SC2, in the normal game state ST1. Then, in this state, the game ends at the timing of t16, at which the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is confirmed, as shown in FIG. 46(a). Therefore, at the timing of t16, the normal game state ST1 transitions to the preparation state ST4, as shown in FIG. 46(c) and FIG. 46(d). In this case, the section display unit 67 remains lit, as shown in FIG. 46(h).

Thereafter, at timing t17, as shown in FIG. 46(a), a new game is started in the second section SC2 and in the preparation state ST4. In this case, the section display section 67 is maintained in a lit state as shown in FIG. 46(h). Thereafter, as the game is played repeatedly, a transition from the preparation state ST4 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is exhausted. Even in this case, the section display section 67 remains lit.

In this situation, by ending the game at timing t18 as shown in FIG. 46(a), the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST5 becomes 0 games. In this case, although the transition to the ART state ST6 has not been determined in the pseudo bonus state ST5, the pseudo bonus state ST5 that ends this time is the first pseudo bonus state ST5 in the B mode. Therefore, the transition to the end preparation state ST7 does not occur, and the pseudo bonus state ST5 shifts to the normal gaming state ST1 at timing t18, as shown in FIGS. 46(c) and 46(d). Furthermore, even if the transition to the normal gaming state ST1 occurs in this way, the second section SC2 is maintained as shown in FIG. 46(b), and the B mode is maintained as shown in FIG. 46(g). . Further, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is maintained in a lit state.

That is, when the section display section 67 is switched to the lighting state once in the second section SC2, it is maintained in the lighting state until the second section SC2 ends. This makes it possible to notify the game hall manager and the like that the second section SC2 continues.

After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 46(a), a new game is started in the second interval SC2 and in the normal game state ST1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the interval display unit 67 is maintained in a lit state. After that, the game is played repeatedly. Then, in this situation, at the timing of t20, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the game ends with a confirmed transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5. Therefore, at the timing of t20, the normal game state ST1 transitions to the preparation state ST4 as shown in FIG. 46(c) and FIG. 46(d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the interval display unit 67 is maintained in a lit state.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46(a) at timing t21, a new game is started in the second section SC2 and in the preparation state ST4. In this case, the section display section 67 is maintained in a lit state as shown in FIG. 46(h). Thereafter, as the game is played repeatedly, a transition from the preparation state ST4 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is exhausted. Even in this case, the section display section 67 remains lit.

In this situation, by ending the game at timing t22 as shown in FIG. 46(a), the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST5 becomes 0 games. In this case, the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state ST5. Therefore, at timing t22, the pseudo bonus state ST5 shifts to the ART state ST6 as shown in FIGS. 46(d) and 46(e). In this case, the section display section 67 is maintained in a lit state as shown in FIG. 46(h).

After that, at timing t23, as shown in FIG. 46(a), a new game is started in the second section SC2 and in ART state ST6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display unit 67 remains lit. After that, the game is played repeatedly until ART state ST6 is exhausted.

Next, the second control process of the play area executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 47. The second control process of the play area is executed in step S909 of the response process at the end of play (FIG. 26). As described above, the response process at the end of play is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, and therefore the second control process of the play area is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

If the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S2001: YES), the state of the flag in the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the current game state is the end preparation state ST7 (step S2002). As already explained, the end preparation state ST7 is the game state entered when the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 described below being met, and the game state entered when the second section SC2 ends when entering the normal game state ST1 thereafter.

If it is in the termination preparation state ST7 (step S2002: YES), it is determined whether the termination preparation completion flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2003). The termination preparation completion flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether one game has been executed in the termination preparation state ST7. In the pseudo-bonus processing (step S907) in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 26), it is determined that the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 0 and that the transition to the ART state ST6 has not been determined. Furthermore, when it is specified that the second section SC2 is in a state of ending when transitioning to the normal gaming state ST1, a flag is set to enter the end preparation state ST7, and the end preparation complete flag is set. Cleared to "0". In addition, in the ART state processing (step S908) in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 26), the number of remaining continuation games in the ART state ST6 is 0, and the number of consecutive games remaining in the ART state ST6 is 0, and the When it is specified that the situation is such that the second section SC2 ends, a flag is set to enter the end preparation state ST7, and the end preparation completion flag is cleared to "0".

If the completion preparation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S2003: NO), the processing from step S2005 onward is executed after setting the completion preparation completion flag to "1". If the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S2003: YES), it means that one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST7. In this case, processing for ending the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, initialization processing for the second section SC2 is executed (step S2014). In the initialization process for the second section SC2, the second section flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, no matter which of the preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6 you are staying in, a counter for storing the number of consecutive games in these gaming states ST4 to ST6 is used. By clearing various data indicating that these gaming states ST4 to ST6 are included, the gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state ST1. Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, the flag for specifying the stay mode is cleared to "0", and the canceled game number counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Therefore, even if the current gaming state is normal gaming state ST1, first CB state ST2, or second CB state ST3, the remaining number of unlocked games at that point (i.e., the number of ceiling games) is invalidated, and thereafter Upon a new transition to the second section SC2, the remaining number of unlocked games is reset. Note that even in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the second section SC2 is ended by executing the initialization process of the second section SC2. continues without being terminated.

After that, when the section display section 67 is in the lit state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the unlit state (step S2015). As a result, the notification on the section display section 67 that it is the second section SC2 is ended. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2016). Thereby, the performance side MPU 92 causes the performance corresponding to the end of the second section SC2 due to the satisfaction of the ending condition to be executed.

If the game is not in the end preparation state ST7 (step S2002: NO), or if the processing of step S2004 has been executed, the value of the continued game number counter 74c in the master RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S2005). As already explained, the continued game number counter 74c is a counter that allows the master MPU 72 to determine the number of games that have been played since the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the continued game number counter 74c after adding 1 is equal to or greater than 1500, which is the upper limit number of games (step S2006). If the value of the continued game number counter 74c is equal to or greater than 1500, this means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 has been met. In this case, a positive determination is made in step S2006, and processing is executed to end the second section SC2.

Specifically, first, initialization processing for the second section SC2 is executed (step S2014). In the initialization process for the second section SC2, the second section flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, no matter which of the preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6 you are staying in, a counter for storing the number of consecutive games in these gaming states ST4 to ST6 is used. By clearing various data indicating that these gaming states ST4 to ST6 are included, the gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state ST1. Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, the flag for specifying the stay mode is cleared to "0", and the canceled game number counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Therefore, even if the current gaming state is normal gaming state ST1, first CB state ST2, or second CB state ST3, the remaining number of unlocked games at that point (i.e., the number of ceiling games) is invalidated, and thereafter Upon a new transition to the second section SC2, the remaining number of unlocked games is reset. Note that even in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the second section SC2 is ended by executing the initialization process of the second section SC2. continues without being terminated.

After that, when the section display section 67 is in the lit state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the unlit state (step S2015). As a result, the notification on the section display section 67 that it is the second section SC2 is ended. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2016). Thereby, the performance side MPU 92 causes the performance corresponding to the end of the second section SC2 due to the satisfaction of the ending condition to be executed.

If the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is less than 1500 (step S2006: NO), in this game, there will be a first chance replay prize, a second chance replay prize, a normal replay prize, a first RT replay prize, and a second RT replay prize. , it is determined whether a replay winning of either the first falling replay winning or the second falling replay winning has been achieved (step S2007). In this case, whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3" is subject to the determination in step S2007, and the current game is in the normal gaming state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state. Any gaming state among state ST3, preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6 is subject to the determination in step S2007.

If no replay win has been achieved (step S2007: NO), the number of bets for the current game (i.e., the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total win number counter 74d in the main RAM 74 (step S2008). In this case, even if a replay win was achieved in the previous game and the current game is a game that corresponds to a replay due to the achievement of the replay win, the number of bets for the current game (i.e., the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total win number counter 74d.

As already explained, the total acquisition counter 74d is a counter for the master MPU 72 to determine the limited total net increase in game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without the first section SC1 in between. As already explained, the limited total net increase in game media is the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value, where the minimum value of the predetermined difference is the predetermined difference obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute games while the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being executed) from the total number of game media awarded by games executed while the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being awarded).

Then, it is determined whether any of the minor winnings (first bell winning, second bell winning, first watermelon winning, second watermelon winning, and cherry winning) that will result in the awarding of gaming media in the current game has been achieved (step S2009). In this case, whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3", it is subject to the determination in step S2009, and also whether the current game is in any of the gaming states of the normal gaming state ST1, the first CB state ST2, the second CB state ST3, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6. If a positive determination is made in step S2009, the number of gaming media awarded in the current game is added to the total winning number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S2010).

If a negative judgment is made in step S2009, or if the processing of step S2010 is executed, it is judged whether the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d in the main RAM 74 is equal to or greater than 0 (step S2011). If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than 0 (step S2011: NO), the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" (step S2012).

As described above, in step S2008, the bet number for the current game is subtracted from the total winnings counter 74d. For example, if no small wins are achieved in the game in the normal game state ST1 immediately after the transition to the second section SC2, the value of the total winnings counter 74d will be less than 0. In this case, by making a negative judgment in step S2011, the total winnings counter 74d is cleared to "0" in step S2012. As a result, when the value obtained by subtracting the "total number of game media consumed to execute games in the situation in which the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when games are not being executed)" from the "total number of game media awarded by games executed in the situation in which the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when no game media is awarded)" is set as the predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as the predetermined reference value, and the limited total net increase in game media, which is the increase in the above-mentioned predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, can be measured using the total winnings counter 74d.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2007, if a positive judgment is made in step S2011, or if the processing of step S2012 is executed, it is judged whether the value of the total winning number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number of "2400" (step S2013). If the value of the total winning number counter 74d exceeds "2400", it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 has been met. In this case, a positive judgment is made in step S2013, and processing is executed to end the second section SC2.

Specifically, the initialization process for the second section SC2 is first executed (step S2014). In the initialization process for the second section SC2, the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". This sets the game section to the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process for the second section SC2, regardless of whether the player is in the preparation state ST4, pseudo bonus state ST5, or ART state ST6, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data indicating that the player is in these game states ST4 to ST6, including counters for storing the number of games continued in these game states ST4 to ST6. In addition, in the initialization process for the second section SC2, the flag for identifying the mode in which the player is in is cleared to "0", and the release game number counter 74e in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Therefore, even if the current game state is the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, or the second CB state ST3, the remaining number of release games at that time (i.e., the ceiling number of games) is invalidated, and the remaining number of release games is reset when there is a new transition to the second section SC2. Note that even if the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is in the middle of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the second section SC2 is terminated by executing the initialization process of the second section SC2, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 continue as they are without being terminated.

Thereafter, when the section display section 67 is in the lit state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the unlit state (step S2015). As a result, the notification on the section display section 67 that it is the second section SC2 is ended. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2016). Thereby, the performance side MPU 92 causes the performance corresponding to the end of the second section SC2 due to the satisfaction of the ending condition to be executed.

If any replay win is achieved, a positive determination is made in step S2007, and the processing of steps S2008 to S2012 is not executed. In a game in which a replay win is achieved, the game media owned by the player at the start of the game are used to set a bet, but as a benefit from the replay win, the player can replay a new game with the same number of bets as the number of bets in the game in which the replay win was achieved. In other words, the number of game media owned by the player does not change in a game in which a replay win is achieved. In this case, by not executing the processing of steps S2008 to S2012 in a game in which a replay win is achieved, it is possible to omit the execution of the processing for changing the value of the total winnings counter 74d in a game in which the number of game media owned by the player does not change, and it is possible to avoid the execution of unnecessary processing.

On the other hand, even in a game in which a replay prize has been won, it is determined in step S2013 whether the value of the total number of winnings counter 74d exceeds "2400" which is the upper limit net increase number. As a result, even though the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d had already exceeded the upper limit net increase number of "2400" in the game before the game in which the replay winning was established, due to noise etc. Even if the initialization process of section SC2 has not been executed, it is specified that the value of the total number of winnings counter 74d exceeds "2400" which is the upper limit net increase number in a subsequent game in which a replay winning was achieved. This makes it possible to perform the initialization process of the second section SC2.

If a negative determination is made in step S2013, ending handling processing is executed (step S2017). FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the ending handling process.

First, it is determined whether the ending start flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2101). The ending start flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is the execution period of the ending effect of the second section SC2.

If the ending start flag is not set to "1" (step S2101: NO), the value of the continuous game number counter 74c, which is a counter for measuring the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 in the main side RAM 74, and the main side RAM 74 are It is determined whether the sum with the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter, which is a counter for measuring the remaining number of continuation games in the pseudo bonus state ST5 in the side RAM 74, is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games, 1500 (step S2102). ). Further, the value of a continuous game number counter 74c, which is a counter for measuring the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 in the main side RAM 74, and the value of a counter for measuring the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 in the main side RAM 74. It is determined whether the sum with the value of the ART continuation counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games of 1500 (step S2103). In addition, the value of the total acquisition counter 74d, which is a counter for measuring the limited total net addition of gaming media in the main side RAM 74, and the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d, which is a counter for measuring the limited total net addition of gaming media, and the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d, which is a counter for measuring the limited total number of net additions of gaming media, and the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d, which is a counter for measuring the limited total net addition number of gaming media, and the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d, which is a counter for measuring the total number of games remaining in the pseudo bonus state ST5, in the main side RAM 74, are also used. It is determined whether the sum of the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter, which is a counter, and the value of the result of multiplying the expected acquisition value "2.5" exceeds the upper limit net increase number "2400" (step S2014 ). In addition, the value of the total acquisition counter 74d, which is a counter for measuring the limited total pure addition of game media in the main side RAM 74, and the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d, which is a counter for measuring the limited total net addition of game media, and the counter for measuring the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 in the main side RAM 74. It is determined whether the sum of the value of the ART continuation counter and the value of the result of multiplying the expected acquisition value "2.5" exceeds the upper limit net increase number "2400" (step S2015). Note that the above expected acquisition value is when a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in a situation where the game is in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the second RT mode, and when the game is in the ART state ST6 and the second mode. This is the value obtained by subtracting the "number of gaming media bet in one game" from the "expected number of gaming media awarded in one game" when a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S2102 to S2105, it means that there is a high possibility that the ending condition for the second section SC2 will be satisfied. In this case, the ending start flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2106), and an ending start command is further transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2107). The production side MPU 92 starts the ending production by receiving the ending start command. As a result, if there is a high possibility that the ending condition for the second section SC2 will be met, the ending effect will be executed before the ending condition for the second section SC2 is met and the second section SC2 ends. It becomes possible to

However, in a configuration in which the ending condition of the second section SC2 can be satisfied not only in the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6, but also in the normal gaming state ST1, the first CB state ST2, the second CB state ST3, and the preparation state ST4, While an ending effect can be executed in the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6, the ending effect is not executed in the normal gaming state ST1, the first CB state ST2, the second CB state ST3, and the preparation state ST4. As a result, when the second section SC2 ends in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6, which are advantageous states for the player, it becomes possible to provide an ending effect as a benefit. , To make it less noticeable that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied by not executing the ending effect in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, the second CB state ST3, and the preparation state ST4. becomes possible.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the ending effect control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. The ending performance control process is repeatedly executed by the performance side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (eg, 4 millisecond cycle).

If an ending start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2201: YES), the process to start the ending performance is executed (step S2202). In the process to start the ending performance, an ending performance table that enables the execution of the ending performance of the second section SC2 is read from the production side ROM 93 and stored in the production side RAM 94. The production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the performance according to the ending performance table, and the ending performance of the second section SC2 is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

During the execution of the ending effect (step S2203: YES), if a game start command indicating that a new game has been started is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2204: YES), the ending effect update process is executed. (Step S2205). As a result, the data group to be referred to in the ending effect table that has already been read out to the effect-side RAM 94 in the previous step S2202 will be changed with the start of a new game, and the ending effect of the second section SC2 will be changed. The contents will be updated with the start of a new game.

If the second section initialization command is received from the main MPU 72 while the ending effect of the second section SC2 is being executed (step S2203: YES), the end process of the ending effect is executed (step S2207). ). In the end processing of the ending effect, an ending effect table that enables the execution of the ending effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. The ending effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect by the effect side MPU 92 according to the ending effect effect table.

<About normal gaming state ST1>
Next, the processing contents in the normal gaming state ST1 will be explained. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an advantageous lottery process executed by the main MPU 72 at the start of the game. The advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is a step that is executed after the winning combination determination process (FIG. 16) is completed and before the first control process (step S711) of the game section. This is executed in S710.

First, it is determined whether the second section flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2301). As already explained, the second section flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game section is the second section SC2, and the second section flag may be set to "1". This is the second section SC2, and the case where the value of the second section flag is "0" is the first section SC1. If the second section flag is not set to "1" (step S2301: NO), the process from step S2302 onwards is not executed. As a result, in the case of the first section SC1, the direct lottery process in step S2308 and the transition lottery process in step S2311 are not executed.

If the second interval flag is set to "1" (step S2301: YES), and if the current game state is the preparation state ST4 before transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the pseudo bonus state ST5 (step S2302: YES), then the pseudo bonus processing at the start of the game is executed (step S2303), and if the current game state is the preparation state ST4 before transitioning to the ART state ST6 or the ART state ST6 (step S2304: YES), then the ART processing at the start of the game is executed (step S2305). The pseudo bonus processing at the start of the game and the ART processing at the start of the game will be explained later.

If the second section flag is set to "1" (step S2301: YES) and the game state is not the preparation state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, or the ART state ST6 (step S2302 and step S2304: NO), it is determined whether the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2306). If the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2306: YES), the processing from step S2307 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if it is the second section SC2, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the direct hit lottery processing in step S2309 and the transition lottery processing in step S2312 are not executed.

If the current game state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S2306: NO), the number of bets for the current game is determined to be "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S2307). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S2307: NO), the processing from step S2308 onwards is not executed. As a result, in a game where the number of bets is "2" even if it is the second section SC2, the direct hit lottery processing in step S2309 and the transition processing in step S2312 are not executed.

If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S2307: YES), it is determined whether or not one of the index values IV = 5 to 10 has been won in the lottery process for the current role (Figure 16). (Step S2308). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2308, a direct hit lottery process is executed (step S2309). In the direct lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to win the ART state ST6 directly.

Figure 51 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of a direct hit winning of the ART state ST6 in the direct hit lottery process of step S2309. As shown in Figure 51 (a), in the lottery process (Figure 16) of the role in this game, if the index value IV = 5 is won, the probability of a direct hit winning of the ART state ST6 is 4%, if the index value IV = 6 is won, the probability of a direct hit winning of the ART state ST6 is 1%, if the index value IV = 7 is won, the probability of a direct hit winning of the ART state ST6 is 1%, if the index value IV = 8 is won, the probability of a direct hit winning of the ART state ST6 is 3%, if the index value IV = 9 is won, the probability of a direct hit winning of the ART state ST6 is 2%, and if the index value IV = 10 is won, the probability of a direct hit winning of the ART state ST6 is 1%. In this case, the lower the probability of winning in the role selection process (FIG. 16) for an index value IV, the higher the probability of a direct win in the ART state ST6. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low probability of winning in the role selection process (FIG. 16).

Here, in the direct lottery process (step S1806) that is executed when transitioning from the first area SC1 to the second area SC2 in the first control process of the game area (FIG. 42), the settings of "1" to "6" are set. Even if the winner wins at the index value IV=7 or 10, where the probability of winning varies depending on the value, it is configured so that the direct win in ART state ST6 does not occur in the direct lottery process. On the other hand, in the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game (FIG. 50), in the direct lottery process (step S2309) executed in the game started in the situation of the second section SC2, "1" to "6" Even if a winner is won at index value IV=7, 10, where the probability of winning varies with the set value of , it can be a direct win in ART state ST6 in the direct lottery process. As a result, with regard to the probability of a direct win in ART state ST6, in the situation of transition from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2, the set values of "1" to "6" will not give an advantage or disadvantage. This makes it possible to create an advantage or disadvantage depending on the setting values of "1" to "6" in the game executed after moving to the second section SC2.

If the direct hit lottery process results in a direct hit win in ART state ST6 (step S2310: YES), the transition confirmation flag for ART state ST6 stored in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2311). The transition confirmation flag for ART state ST6 is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether or not the transition to ART state ST6 has been confirmed. If the transition confirmation flag for ART state ST6 is set to "1", processing is executed to transition the game state to ART state ST6 when the current game ends.

If the direct hit lottery process does not result in a direct win in ART state ST6 (step S2310: NO), a transition lottery process is executed (step S2312). In the transition lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5.

FIG. 51(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 in the transition lottery process of step S2312. As shown in FIG. 51(b), in the hand lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game, if the index value IV = 5 is won, there is a 50% probability that the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 will be won. , if the index value IV=6 is won, there is a 20% probability that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 will be won, and if the index value IV=7 is won, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 will be won with a 10% probability. If you have won the index value IV = 8, you will have a 40% probability of winning the transition to pseudo bonus state ST5, and if you have won the index value IV = 9, you will have a 30% probability. The transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is won, and if the index value IV=10 is won, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is won with a probability of 20%. In this case, the lower the index value IV has a lower probability of winning in the lottery process (FIG. 16), the higher the probability of winning the pseudo bonus state ST5. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

If the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is won in the transition lottery process (step S2313: YES), the transition confirmation flag for the pseudo bonus state ST5 provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2314). The transition confirmation flag for the pseudo bonus state ST5 is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is confirmed. When the transition confirmation flag of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is set to "1", processing is executed to shift the gaming state to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 when the current game ends.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 52. The normal processing is executed in step S905 of the response processing at the end of play (FIG. 26). As described above, the response processing at the end of play is executed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, so the normal processing is also executed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

If the second section flag of the main side RAM74 is set to "1" and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S2401: YES), the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 in the main side RAM74 is set to "1". ” is set (step S2402). If the direct winning lottery process (step S1806 or step S2309) at the start of the current game results in a direct winning to ART state ST6, the transition confirmation flag for ART state ST6 is set to "1".

If the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 is set to "1" (step S2402: YES), the ART state flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2403). The ART state flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to identify either the state before transition to the ART state ST6 or the ART state ST6. Furthermore, the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2404). Furthermore, the preparation state flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2405). The preparation state flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the main MPU 72 is in the preparation state ST4. When both the preparation state flag and the ART state flag are set to "1", the main MPU 72 can specify that the state is in the preparation state ST4 before transitioning to the ART state ST6. In this situation, if the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode, clearing the preparation state flag to "0" will solve the situation where the preparation state flag is "0" and the ART state flag is "1". Therefore, the main MPU 72 can specify that the state has shifted to the ART state ST6. Further, an ART preparation start command indicating that the preparation state ST4 is reached before shifting to the ART state ST6 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2406). Thereby, the performance side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the performance corresponding to the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the ART state ST6.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the lighting standby flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2407). As already explained, the lighting standby flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that switching of the section display section 67 from the off state to the on state is on standby in the second section SC2. When the lighting standby flag is set to "1" (step S2407: YES), the lighting process of the section display section 67 is executed (step S2408). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from an unlit state to a lit state. As a result, the section display section 67 starts notifying that it is the second section SC2. Note that when the process of step S2408 is executed, the lighting standby flag is cleared to "0".

When a transition to the ready state ST4 occurs while the lighting standby flag is set to "1" as described above, the section display unit 67 is switched from an unlit state to a lit state. The ready state ST4 is a gaming state in which the expected net increase in gaming media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of gaming media bet in one game" from the "expected number of gaming media to be awarded in one game") can be 1 or more. In other words, the section display unit 67 can be maintained in an unlit state even when the second section SC2 is entered, but is reliably switched to a lit state when the gaming state transitions to a gaming state in which the expected net increase in gaming media can be 1 or more. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall that a gaming state in which the expected net increase in gaming media can be 1 or more is in question.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2402, it is judged whether or not the transition confirmation flag for the pseudo bonus state ST5 in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2409). If a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is selected in the transition lottery process (step S2312) at the start of the current game, the transition confirmation flag for the pseudo bonus state ST5 is set to "1".

If a negative judgment is made in step S2409, it is judged whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" by judging whether the value of the bet number setting counter in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S2410). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S2410: NO), the processing from step S2411 onwards is not executed. As a result, in a game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the second section SC2, the processing of decrementing the value of the release game number counter 74e by 1 in step S2411 is not executed. In other words, even if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the normal game state ST1 of the second section SC2, the remaining number of release games (i.e., the ceiling game number) is not reduced, and the remaining number of release games (i.e., the ceiling game number) is reduced by executing a game with a bet number of "3".

If the number of bets on the current game is "3" (step S2410: YES), the value of the release game number counter 74e in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S2411). This reduces the remaining number of release games (i.e., the ceiling number of games) by one, and the remaining maximum number of games required to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is reduced by one. After that, it is determined whether the value of the release game number counter 74e after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S2412).

When in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, a positive determination is made in step S902 in the response process at the end of play (FIG. 26), and normal processing (step S905) is not executed. Therefore, if the game transitions to the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 during normal game state ST1, normal game state ST1 is temporarily interrupted, and the number of games played in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is not treated as the remaining number of games to be released in normal game state ST1. When the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 ends, the normal game state ST1 is resumed with the lottery mode remaining in normal mode.

If the value of the release game number counter 74e is "0" (step S2412: YES), it means that the remaining number of release games required to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is 0. In this case, the pseudo bonus state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2413). The pseudo bonus state flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify whether the state is either the state before transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the pseudo bonus state ST5. In addition, the preparation state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2414). If both the preparation state flag and the pseudo bonus state flag are set to "1", the main MPU 72 can identify that the state is the preparation state ST4 before transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5. In this situation, when the lottery mode transitions from the first RT mode to the second RT mode, the preparation state flag is cleared to "0", so that the preparation state flag is "0" and the pseudo bonus state flag is "1", allowing the main MPU 72 to determine that the pseudo bonus state ST5 has been entered. In addition, a preparation start command for a pseudo bonus indicating that the preparation state ST4 before the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 has been entered is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S2415). As a result, the performance side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute a performance corresponding to the preparation state ST4 before the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5.

Then, it is determined whether the standby flag for lighting in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2416). As already explained, the standby flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify that the section display unit 67 is waiting to be switched from an off state to an on state in the second section SC2. If the standby flag for lighting is set to "1" (step S2416: YES), lighting processing of the section display unit 67 is executed (step S2417). In the lighting processing of the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from an off state to an on state. This causes the section display unit 67 to start announcing that it is the second section SC2. When the processing of step S2417 is executed, the standby flag for lighting is cleared to "0".

When a transition to the ready state ST4 occurs while the lighting standby flag is set to "1" as described above, the section display unit 67 is switched from an unlit state to a lit state. The ready state ST4 is a gaming state in which the expected net increase in gaming media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of gaming media bet in one game" from the "expected number of gaming media to be awarded in one game") can be 1 or more. In other words, the section display unit 67 can be maintained in an unlit state even when the second section SC2 is entered, but is reliably switched to a lit state when the gaming state transitions to a gaming state in which the expected net increase in gaming media can be 1 or more. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall that a gaming state in which the expected net increase in gaming media can be 1 or more is in question.

On the other hand, if the pseudo bonus state transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2409: YES), the pseudo bonus state transition confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S2418), and the processing of steps S2413 to S2417 already described is executed. This results in a preparation state ST4 before transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the corresponding performance is started. Also, if the interval display unit 67 is waiting to be switched from an off state to a on state, the interval display unit 67 is switched from an off state to a on state.

Next, the stop order notification control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 53. The stop order notification control process is executed in step S712, which is executed after the winning/losing role determination is completed in the role selection process (FIG. 16) and after the first control process (step S711) of the game area.

If the current game state is the preparation state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, or the ART state ST6 (step S2501: YES), the notification control process for the advantageous state is executed (step S2502). In the notification control process for the advantageous state, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 3, 5 is won in the current game, a display corresponding to the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and a command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to cause the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won to be announced on the image display device 63.

In the advantageous state notification control process, if the current game has won one of the index values IV=11 to 16 in the normal mode, the reels 32L, 32M, and A display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32R is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first RT replay prize is notified on the image display device 63. A command is sent to the production-side MPU 92 to make it appear. In the notification control process for the advantageous state, if any of the index values IV=11 to 16 in the first mode is won in the current game, the reels 32L and 32M enable the establishment of the second RT replay prize. , 32R is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and the image display device 63 notifies the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of a second RT replay winning. A command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to make it happen.

In the notification control process for an advantageous state, if any of the index values IV = 17 to 22 in the first RT mode has been won in the current game, a display corresponding to the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will prevent the first fall replay from being won is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and a command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to cause the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will prevent the first fall replay from being won to be announced on the image display device 63. In the notification control process for advantageous states, provided that the game state is either the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, if the current game has won any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the second RT mode, a display corresponding to the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can prevent the second fall replay from being won is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and a command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to cause the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can prevent the second fall replay from being won to be notified on the image display device 63.

If a negative determination is made in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the index value IV=5 has been won in the current game (step S2503). Note that in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, there is no chance of winning with the index value IV=5, so the case where a negative determination is made in step S2501 and the case where an affirmative determination is made in step S2503 is normal. The game state becomes ST1.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2503, it is judged whether the ART state transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2504). As already explained, the ART state transition confirmation flag is a flag that is set to "1" when a direct hit to the ART state ST6 is achieved in the first control process (FIG. 42) of the game section executed before the stop order notification control process is executed in the current game, or in the direct hit lottery process (step S1806 or step S2309) in the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game (FIG. 50). Then, in the direct hit lottery process (step S1806 or step S2309), if the index value IV=5 is achieved, there is a 4% probability of a direct hit to the ART state ST6.

If the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 is set to "1" (step S2504: YES), a process of setting display data for the first left stop is executed (step S2505). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are arbitrary starts on the dual-purpose display section 66. The display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. be terminated.

Then, a left first stop command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2506). When the production side MPU 92 receives the left first stop command, it causes the image display device 63 to start a display corresponding to a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are arbitrary. This display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and ends when a stop command is issued for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which this display is executed.

On the other hand, if the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 is not set to "1" (step S2504: NO), a process for setting display data for the right first stop is executed (step S2507). This causes a display corresponding to a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary to be started on the dual-purpose display unit 66. This display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and ends when a stop command is issued for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which this display is executed.

Thereafter, a right first stop command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2508). When the production side MPU 92 receives the right first stop command, it causes the image display device 63 to start displaying a display corresponding to a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary. The display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. be terminated.

The effects resulting from the execution of the processes from step S2503 to step S2508 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b). FIG. 54(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the situation when it is announced that the first stop is the left reel 32L in the case of winning with index value IV=5, and FIG. 54(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the situation when it is announced that the first stop is the right reel 32R in the case of winning with the index value IV=5.

As already explained, the first bell winning data and the second bell winning data are set in the index value IV=5. If the left reel 32L is stopped as the first stop when the index value IV=5 is won, the second bell win is established regardless of the remaining stopping order. In this case, the second bell prize is reliably achieved regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Furthermore, if the middle reel 32M or right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop when the index value IV=5 is won, the first bell win is established regardless of the remaining stop order. In this case, the first bell prize is reliably achieved regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

When steps S2505 and S2506 are executed in the stop order notification control process (Fig. 53), the image display device 63 displays a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are optional, as shown in Fig. 54(a1), and the combined display unit 66 displays a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are optional, as shown in Fig. 54(a2). Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the order according to the notification, a second bell win is established on the main line ML, as shown in Fig. 54(a3).

When steps S2507 and S2508 are executed in the stop order notification control process (Fig. 53), the image display device 63 displays a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are optional, as shown in Fig. 54 (b1), and the combined display unit 66 displays a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are optional, as shown in Fig. 54 (b2). Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the order according to the notification, the first bell win is established on the main line ML, as shown in Fig. 54 (b3).

The process in steps S2505 and S2506 is executed when the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed, and the process in steps S2507 and S2508 is executed when the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed. This is a case where the transition has not been finalized. In this case, if the transition to ART state ST6 is confirmed based on winning index value IV = 5, the second bell winning is established, and even though winning index value IV = 5, the ART state ST6 If the transition to the first bell is not confirmed, the first bell prize is established. The second bell winning is not achieved unless the winning is achieved with the index value IV=5. This makes it possible to notify the player that the transition to ART state ST6 has been confirmed based on winning the index value IV=5 by the establishment of the second bell prize on reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. .

On the other hand, the first bell prize can be achieved even when the index value IV=5 is not won. By making it possible to win the first bell if the index value IV = 5 is won but the transition to ART state 6 is not confirmed, even if the index value IV = 5 is won, the transition to ART state 6 is not confirmed. It is possible to make it less obvious to the player that the transition to ST6 has not been confirmed in the result of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In particular, if the index value IV=5 is won but the transition to ART state 6 is not confirmed, the image display device 63 corresponds to a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary. Not only that, but also the dual-purpose display section 66 displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary. Assuming that the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary on the dual-purpose display section 66, and the display corresponding to the stopping order is not performed, then from the display contents of the dual-purpose display section 66, even if the winning index value IV = 5, It may be inferred that the transition to ART state 6 has not been confirmed, but as described above, the dual-purpose display section 66 also corresponds to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary. By displaying the information, it is possible to prevent such analogy from occurring.

The number of game media awarded is "11" whether the first bell wins or the second bell wins. Therefore, even if the type of winning encouraged to be achieved is changed by changing the notification mode of the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R depending on whether the transition to ART state ST6 is confirmed when index value IV=5 is won, the benefit in terms of the award of game media does not change. In this case, since the notification of the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R does not directly link to the player's benefit, it is optional whether or not the section display unit 67 is lit when the above-mentioned stop order notification is made.

Returning to the explanation of the stop order notification control process (FIG. 53), if a negative determination is made in step S2503, if the process of step S2506 is executed, or if the process of step S2508 is executed, the index value is set in the current game. It is determined whether or not IV=4 has been won (step S2509). Note that in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, there is no chance of winning with the index value IV=4, so the case where a negative determination is made in step S2501 and the case where an affirmative determination is made in step S2509 is normal. The game state becomes ST1.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2509, a push order generation lottery process is executed (step S2511) on the condition that the second section flag is set to "1" (step S2510: YES). In the push order generation lottery process, there is a 25% probability that the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will not be announced, there is a 25% probability that the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is optional will be announced, there is a 25% probability that the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest is optional will be announced, and there is a 25% probability that the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is optional will be announced.

If it is selected to notify one of the stop orders in the push order generation lottery process (step S2512: YES), a display corresponding to the selected stop order is started on the dual-purpose display section 66 (step S2513). ). The display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. be terminated. Further, a stop command corresponding to the selected stop order is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2514). When the production side MPU 92 receives the stop command, it causes the image display device 63 to display a display corresponding to the selected stop order. The display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. be terminated.

As already explained, only the first bell winning data is set in the index value IV=4, and no matter in which order the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, the first bell winning is established and each stop No matter which stop operation timing the buttons 42 to 44 are operated, the first bell prize is established. In this case, if the winning is achieved with the index value IV=4 and notification of any stop order is selected in the push order generation lottery process (step S2511), the selected stop order is Notification is made on the image display device 63 and the dual-purpose display section 66. As a result, not only when the index value IV=5 is won in the normal gaming state ST1, but also when the index value IV=4 is won, the first bell is won after the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced. It becomes possible to create a situation in which the following holds true.

This stop order also includes the stop order that is notified when the index value IV=5 is won but the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from identifying whether or not this is due to the index value IV=5 being won but the transition to the ART state ST6 not being confirmed, even if a situation occurs in which the first bell win is achieved after the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced in the normal game state ST1.

In particular, when the winning index value IV=4 is announced on the image display device 63 to notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the dual-purpose display section 66 also displays a display corresponding to the stop order. be exposed. If the display corresponding to the above-mentioned stop order is not displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66, there is a risk that it may be inferred from the display contents of the dual-purpose display section 66 that the winning index value IV=4 has been won. As described above, by displaying a display corresponding to the stop order on the dual-purpose display section 66 as well, it is possible to prevent such an analogy from occurring.

When index value IV=4 is hit, the first bell win occurs regardless of whether the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced. Therefore, even if the manner of announcement of the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is changed when index value IV=4 is hit, the benefit related to the award of game media does not change. In this case, since the announcement of the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R does not directly link to the player's benefit, it is optional whether or not the section display unit 67 is lit when the stop order is announced as described above.

<Regarding preparation state ST4>
Next, the process contents in the preparation state ST4 will be described.

In the preparation state ST4, preparation state processing is executed in step S906 in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 26). Here, as already explained, the preparation state ST4 includes a preparation state ST4 before the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 and a preparation state ST4 before the transition to the ART state ST6.

In the preparation state processing in the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST5, the preparation state flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" when the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. Assume that the value of the preparation state flag in the main side RAM 74 is "0" and the pseudo bonus state flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". Further, the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 is set to "39", which is a value corresponding to the number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST5. Further, a pseudo bonus start command indicating that the state has shifted to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. As a result, an effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is started.

In addition, in the preparation state ST4 before transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST5, if the player wins one of the index values IV = 5 to 10 in the role selection process (Figure 16), a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST5, and if it is determined by lottery to increase the number of continued games, the determined number of games may be added to the initial number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST5.

In the preparation state processing in the case of the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the ART state ST6, when the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode, the preparation state flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". , the value of the preparation state flag of the main side RAM 74 is "0" and the ART state flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". Further, the ART continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 is set to "10", which is a value corresponding to the number of consecutive games in the start period described later in the ART state ST6, and the main side MPU 72 is informed that it is the start period of the ART state ST6. The start period flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" in order to specify the start period. Furthermore, an ART state start command indicating that the state has shifted to ART state ST6 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. Thereby, the performance side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the performance corresponding to the ART state ST6.

In addition, in the preparation state ST4 before moving to the ART state ST6, if one of the index values IV = 5 to 10 is won in the hand lottery process (FIG. 16), the number of consecutive games in the start period in the ART state ST6 It may be configured such that whether or not to increase the number of games is determined by a lottery, and when it is determined by a lottery to increase the number of games, the determined number of games is added to the initial number of continuous games in the start period in the ART state ST6.

<About the pseudo bonus state ST5>
Next, the processing contents in the pseudo bonus state ST5 will be described. Fig. 55 (a) is a flow chart showing the pseudo bonus processing at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72. The pseudo bonus processing at the start of the game is executed in step S2303 in the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game (Fig. 50), and the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game is executed in step S710, which is a process executed after the winning/losing judgment of the role is completed in the role lottery processing (Fig. 16) and before the first control processing of the game area (step S711).

In the lottery process for this winning combination (FIG. 16), if one of the index values IV=5 to 10 is won (step S2601: YES), "1" is set in the transfer confirmation flag provided in the main side RAM 74. It is determined whether it is set (step S2602). The transition confirmation flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the current pseudo-bonus state ST5. If the transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S2602: NO), a transition lottery process for the ART state ST6 is executed (step S2603). In the transition lottery process for the ART state ST6, it is determined by lottery whether or not to transition to the ART state ST6 after the current pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends.

Figure 55 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST6 in the transition lottery process of the ART state ST6 in step S2603. As shown in Figure 55 (b), in the lottery process of the role in this game (Figure 16), if the index value IV = 5 is won, the transition to the ART state ST6 is won with a 50% probability, if the index value IV = 6 is won, the transition to the ART state ST6 is won with a 20% probability, if the index value IV = 7 is won, the transition to the ART state ST6 is won with a 10% probability, if the index value IV = 8 is won, the transition to the ART state ST6 is won with a 40% probability, if the index value IV = 9 is won, the transition to the ART state ST6 is won with a 30% probability, and if the index value IV = 10 is won, the transition to the ART state ST6 is won with a 20% probability. In this case, the lower the probability of winning the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 16) for the index value IV, the higher the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST6. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low probability of winning in the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 16).

If the transition lottery process for ART state ST6 results in a successful transition to ART state ST6 (step S2604: YES), the transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2605). After that, a transition confirmation command indicating that the transition to ART state ST6 has been successful is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2606). As a result, the production side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute a performance corresponding to the confirmation of the transition to ART state ST6.

Next, the pseudo bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56. The pseudo bonus process is executed in step S907 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 26). As mentioned above, the corresponding process at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped, so the pseudo bonus process is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped. is executed after.

First, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2701). As already explained, the pseudo bonus continuation counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the pseudo bonus continuation counter is used when transitioning from the preparation state ST4 to the pseudo bonus state ST5. "39" is set to "39".

When in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, a positive determination is made in step S902 in the corresponding processing at the end of play (FIG. 26), and the pseudo bonus processing (step S907) is not executed. Therefore, if the pseudo bonus state ST5 transitions to the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 while in the pseudo bonus state ST5, the pseudo bonus state ST5 is temporarily interrupted, and the number of games played in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is not treated as the number of games played in the pseudo bonus state ST5. When the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 ends, the pseudo bonus state ST5 is resumed without transitioning to the preparation state ST4, with the lottery mode remaining in the normal mode.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2702). In other words, it is determined whether the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST5 is 0 games. If the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S2702: YES), it is determined whether the transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" to determine whether the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed in the current pseudo bonus state ST5 (step S2703).

If the transition confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S2703: YES), a start setting process for the ART state ST6 is executed (step S2704). In the start setting process, the ART continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 is set to "10", which is a value corresponding to the number of consecutive games in the start period (to be described later) in the ART state ST6, and it is also set that it is the start period of the ART state ST6. The start period flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" in order to be specified by the main side MPU 72. Thereafter, an ART state start command indicating that the state has shifted to ART state ST6 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2705). Thereby, the effect-side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the ART state ST6. Thereafter, the transfer confirmation flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2706).

On the other hand, if the transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S2703: NO), advantageous termination processing is executed (step S2707). FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing advantageous termination processing. First, an advantageous end command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2801). The advantageous end command is a command sent to the production side MPU 92 when the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being satisfied. When the production-side MPU 92 receives an advantageous end command in a situation where the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is present, the production-side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute a production indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST5 has ended. Make it.

Then, it is determined whether the heaven preparation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2802). The heaven preparation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether the state is the state after the first pseudo bonus state ST5 in B mode or the state after the ART state ST6 started before the first pseudo bonus state ST5 is executed, or the state after the ART state ST6 is finished if a transition to the ART state ST6 occurs after the first pseudo bonus state ST5 is finished. When the second section SC2 in B mode is started, the heaven preparation flag is set to "1", and the state in which the heaven preparation flag is set to "1" is maintained until the first pseudo bonus state ST5 ends after the second section SC2 in B mode is started, until the ART state ST6 started before the first pseudo bonus state ST5 is executed ends, or until the ART state ST6 ends if a transition to the ART state ST6 occurs after the first pseudo bonus state ST5 is finished. On the other hand, in the second section SC2 of B mode, when the first pseudo bonus state ST5 ends, when the ART state ST6 that started before the first pseudo bonus state ST5 was executed ends, or when a transition to the ART state ST6 occurs after the first pseudo bonus state ST5 ends and the ART state ST6 ends, the heaven preparation flag is cleared to "0" when a transition to the normal game state ST1 is made.

If the heaven preparation flag is not set to "1" (step S2802: NO), a process for setting the end preparation state ST7 is executed (step S2803). In this setting process, if the current gaming state is the pseudo bonus state ST5, the pseudo bonus state flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, in the setting process, the termination preparation state flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". The termination preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the game is in the termination preparation state ST7, and when the termination preparation state flag is set to "1", the gaming state becomes the termination preparation state ST7. Thereafter, the end preparation completion flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2804). As already explained, the termination preparation completion flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether one game has been executed in the termination preparation state ST7.

If the heaven preparation flag is set to "1" (step S2802: YES), the canceled game number counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is set to "80" (step S2805). As already explained, the canceled game number counter 74e is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed. In step S2805, the number of canceled games counter 74e is set to "80", so that in the B mode, the number of games required until the transition to the next pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed is 80 games. Thereafter, a gaming state setting process is executed (step S2806). In this setting process, if the current gaming state is the pseudo bonus state ST5, the pseudo bonus state flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST1. Further, the heaven preparation flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2807).

Figure 58 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus presentation control process executed by the presentation side MPU 92. The pseudo bonus presentation control process is repeatedly executed by the presentation side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (e.g., every 4 milliseconds).

First, it is determined whether the ending performance of the second section SC2 is being executed (step S2901). If the ending performance of the second section SC2 is being executed (step S2901: YES), the processing from step S2902 onwards is not executed. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the ending performance of the second section SC2.

If the ending performance of the second section SC2 is not being executed (step S2901: NO), the process from step S2902 onwards is executed. Specifically, it is first determined whether or not a pseudo bonus start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2902). If a pseudo bonus start command has been received (step S2902: YES), the start-time performance setting process is executed (step S2903). In the start-time performance setting process, a pseudo bonus performance table that enables the execution of a performance corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the pseudo bonus performance table, and a performance corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63.

In addition, in the pseudo-bonus effect table stored in the effect-side RAM 94 when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started, there is a table for executing the effect corresponding to the fact that the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. Data is set. If the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed in the pseudo bonus state ST5, the pseudo bonus effect table is referred to as is, so that the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5. A display effect showing this is executed. On the other hand, when the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state ST5, the data for finally executing the display performance indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 will occur is created. It is set for the pseudo bonus effect table stored in the side RAM 94.

If a game start command indicating that a new game has been started is received from the main MPU 72 in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 (step S2904: YES), an effect update process is executed (step S2905). As a result, the data group to be referred to in the pseudo-bonus effect table that has already been read out to the effect-side RAM 94 in the previous step S2903 is changed with the start of a new game, and corresponds to the pseudo-bonus state ST5. The contents of the presentation will be updated with the start of a new game.

When a transition confirmation command is received from the master MPU 72 in the pseudo bonus state ST5 indicating that a transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed in the current pseudo bonus state ST5 (step S2906: YES), a lottery process for executing a revival effect is executed (step S2907). The revival effect is an effect in which, after a display effect is executed indicating that a transition to the ART state ST6 will not occur when the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 is started, a display effect is executed indicating that a transition to the ART state ST6 will occur when an ART state start command is received from the master MPU 72 after all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped spinning in the final game. In the lottery process for executing a revival effect, there is a 20% chance of winning the execution of the revival effect.

If the execution of the revival effect is not successful (step S2908: NO), a setting process for the normal transition effect is executed (step S2909). In the setting process of the normal transition effect, a display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed in the current game that triggered the transmission of the transition confirmation command is executed, and a display effect is executed from the current game to the pseudo bonus state ST5. A display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed is executed over the final game of , and furthermore, when the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 is started, the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs. Data for executing a display effect indicating the above is set in a pseudo bonus effect table stored in the effect side RAM 94. As a result, the image display device 63 executes a display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed in the current game that triggered the transmission of the transition confirmation command, and also changes the transition from the current game to the pseudo-bonus state. A display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed is executed over the final game of ST5, and furthermore, when the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 is started, the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs. A display effect indicating this is executed. Further, in the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62, effects corresponding to these display effects are executed.

If the execution of the revival effect is won (step S2908: YES), a setting process for the revival effect is executed (step S2910). In the resurrection effect setting process, after the display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 will not occur when the final game in the pseudo bonus state ST5 is started, all reels 32L and 32M are set in the final game. , 32R has stopped rotating, and when an ART state start command is received from the main MPU 72, data for executing a display effect indicating that a transition to the ART state ST6 will occur is provided on the effect side. It is set for the pseudo bonus effect table stored in the RAM 94. As a result, the image display device 63 does not execute a display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed in the current game that triggered the transmission of the transition confirmation command, and the pseudo During the final game of the bonus state ST5, a display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed is not executed, and furthermore, when the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started, the transition to the ART state ST6 is not executed. A display effect indicating that the transition to ART state ST6 will occur after the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has stopped in the final game after the display effect indicating that the transition to ART state ST6 will not occur. is executed. Further, in the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62, effects corresponding to these display effects are executed.

When an ART state start command is received in the pseudo bonus state ST5 (step S2911: YES), and it has been determined that a revival effect will be executed in the current pseudo bonus state ST5 (step S2912: YES), a revival effect execution process is executed (step S2913). In the revival effect execution process, the data to be referenced in the pseudo bonus effect table stored in the effect side RAM 94 is changed to a data group corresponding to the execution of a revival effect. As a result, on the image display device 63, the display effect indicating that a transition to the ART state ST6 that was started in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 will not occur is ended, and a display effect indicating that a transition to the ART state ST6 will occur is started. Also, effects corresponding to these display effects are executed on the upper lamp 61 and speaker 62.

When the advantageous end command is received in the pseudo bonus state ST5 (step S2914: YES), the end effect setting process is executed (step S2915). In the end performance setting process, a table is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94 for executing a performance indicating that the current pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends and the transition to the normal gaming state ST1 occurs. let As a result, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the current pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends and the state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1. This performance continues until the end preparation state ST7 ends and the state shifts to the normal game state ST1.

Next, the progress of the pseudo bonus state ST5 will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 59. 59(a) shows a period in which one game is executed, FIG. 59(b) shows a period in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and FIG. 59(c) shows a period in the normal gaming state ST1. (d) shows a period in the ART state ST6, and FIG. 59(e) shows a period in which an end effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends without transition to the ART state ST6 is executed, FIG. 59(f) shows a period in which a revival effect indicating that a transition to the ART state ST6 occurs, FIG. 59(g) shows a period in the end preparation state ST7, and FIG. 59(h) It shows the period during which the section display section 67 is in a lit state.

First, we will explain the case where the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends, the game transitions to the ART state ST6, and a revival performance is executed.

At timing t1, the first game in the pseudo bonus state ST5 is executed as shown in FIG. 59(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 59(b), the pseudo bonus state ST5 has already been set when the previous game is ended. Moreover, since the section display section 67 is in the lighting state at least at the timing when the preparation state ST4 before transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is started, even at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 59(h). The section display section 67 is in a lit state.

After that, at timing t2, as shown in FIG. 59(a), a new game is started in the pseudo bonus state ST5. This game is the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5. In the current pseudo bonus state ST5, a transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed midway, and it has been decided that a revival performance will be executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59(e), at timing t2, which is the timing when the current game is started, an end performance is started indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST5 will end without a transition to the ART state ST6. FIG. 60(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution content of the end performance in the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 60(a), in the end performance, an end image G31 is displayed indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST5 will end without a transition to the ART state ST6.

After that, at the timing of t3, which is the end timing after all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 have stopped spinning, the end effect ends as shown in FIG. 59(e) and the revival effect starts as shown in FIG. 59(f). FIG. 60(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution contents of the revival effect in the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 60(b), in the revival effect, a revival image G32 is displayed indicating that a transition to the ART state ST6 will occur, rather than that a transition to the ART state ST6 will not occur. This makes it possible for a player who recognized that a transition to the ART state ST6 will not occur due to the end effect to recognize that a transition to the ART state ST6 will actually occur. The revival effect that started at the timing of t3 continues until the timing of t4, which is the start timing of the next game, as shown in FIG. 59(f).

Also, at timing t3, the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends and the ART state ST6 begins, as shown in Figures 59(b) and 59(d). During all of the above periods, the interval display unit 67 remains lit, as shown in Figure 59(h).

Next, a case will be described in which a transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur in the first pseudo bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2 of the B mode.

At timing t5, the first game in pseudo bonus state ST5 is executed as shown in FIG. 59(a). In this case, the pseudo bonus state ST5 is already set when the previous game ends as shown in FIG. 59(b). Also, since the interval display unit 67 is in a lit state at least at the timing when the preparation state ST4 before the transition to pseudo bonus state ST5 starts, the interval display unit 67 is in a lit state even at timing t5 as shown in FIG. 59(h).

Thereafter, at timing t6, a new game is started in the pseudo bonus state ST5 as shown in FIG. 59(a). This game is the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. In the current pseudo-bonus state ST5, transition to the ART state ST6 has not been determined. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59(e), at timing t6, which is the timing at which the current game started, an end effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without transitioning to the ART state ST6 occurs. Begins. Thereafter, the end performance is ended as shown in FIG. 59(e) at timing t7, which is the end timing after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 has stopped.

Also, this time, the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur in the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2 of B mode, so even if the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, the second section SC2 does not end. . Therefore, at timing t7, as shown in FIGS. 59(b) and 59(c), the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends and the normal gaming state ST1 is started without shifting to the end preparation state ST7. Further, during all the above periods, the section display section 67 is maintained in a lit state as shown in FIG. 59(h). Thereafter, at timing t8, the first game after transitioning to the normal gaming state ST1 is started as shown in FIG. 59(a).

Next, we will explain the case where no transition to ART state ST6 occurs in pseudo bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2 of A mode.

At timing t9, the first game in pseudo bonus state ST5 is executed as shown in FIG. 59(a). In this case, the pseudo bonus state ST5 is already set when the previous game ends as shown in FIG. 59(b). Also, since the interval display unit 67 is in a lit state at least at the timing when the preparation state ST4 before the transition to pseudo bonus state ST5 starts, the interval display unit 67 is in a lit state even at timing t9 as shown in FIG. 59(h).

After that, at timing t10, a new game is started in pseudo bonus state ST5 as shown in FIG. 59(a). This game is the final game of pseudo bonus state ST5. In the current pseudo bonus state ST5, a transition to ART state ST6 has not been confirmed. Therefore, at timing t10, which is the timing when the current game is started as shown in FIG. 59(e), an end effect is started to indicate that the pseudo bonus state ST5 will end without a transition to ART state ST6 occurring. Then, at timing t11, which is the end timing after all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped spinning in the final game of pseudo bonus state ST5, the end effect is ended as shown in FIG. 59(e).

In addition, since there is no transition to the ART state ST6 in the pseudo bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2 of A mode this time, the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends at the timing of t11 and transitions to the end preparation state ST7 as shown in FIG. 59(b) and FIG. 59(g). After that, in the end preparation state ST7, the game is executed from the timing of t12 to the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 59(a). Then, at the timing of t13 when the game ends, the end preparation state ST7 ends and transitions to the normal game state ST1 as shown in FIG. 59(c) and FIG. 59(g). Also, at the timing of t13, the section display unit 67 switches from the lit state to the unlit state as shown in FIG. 59(h). After that, at the timing of t14, the first game after transitioning to the normal game state ST1 starts as shown in FIG. 59(a).

Furthermore, at timing t11, an effect indicating that the current pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends and a transition to the normal gaming state ST1 is started. This performance continues until the timing t13, which is the timing at which the end preparation state ST7 ends.

As described above, even if the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without confirming the transition to the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2 of A mode, the end preparation state for one game occurs after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. At the same time as ST7, since the section display section 67 is maintained in a lit state in the end preparation state ST7, the timing is after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have been stopped in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5. However, the section display section 67 remains lit. As a result, the section is displayed at the timing when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have finished stopping in the final game of pseudo-bonus state ST5 in a situation where the effect indicating that the transition to ART state ST6 is confirmed is not executed. Even if the section 67 is confirmed, it cannot be determined that the transition to the ART state ST6 will not occur. Therefore, in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in a situation where the production indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed is not executed, the revival production is performed at the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have finished stopping. It becomes possible to make the player expect that the game will be executed, and it becomes possible to maintain the feeling of expectation that the transition to the ART state ST6 will be confirmed.

<About ART state ST6>
Next, the ART state ST6 will be described. Fig. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the ART state ST6. In the ART state ST6, there are a start period ST11, a first unit execution time ST12, and a second unit execution time ST13.

The start period ST11 is a gaming state that occurs when the ART state ST6 is newly started. The start period ST11 continues for 10 games. In the start period ST11, a point lottery process is executed based on the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game, and the points selected in the point lottery process are added. When the start period ST11 ends, based on the total points acquired in the current start period ST11, the stock number of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 that will occur after the end of the start period ST11 and the first unit execution In step ST12, the type of continuation rate mode that determines the continuation rate when the continuation lottery process is executed is determined. The types of continuation rate modes include a first continuation mode with a continuation rate of 50%, a second continuation mode with a continuation rate of 60%, a third continuation mode with a continuation rate of 70%, and a continuation rate of 70%. There is a fourth continuation mode, which is 80%.

The first unit execution ST12 is a game state that occurs after the start period ST11 ends in the ART state ST6. The initial number of games in the first unit execution ST12 is any one of 29 games to 32 games. In addition, if the add-on condition is met for the number of continued games in the first unit execution ST12, the number of added games determined when the add-on condition is met when the first unit execution ST12 is started is added to the initial number of games. In addition, when a new execution of the first unit execution ST12 is started, the initial number of games in the execution is first announced in the start game of the execution, and if the add-on condition is met, the number of added games determined when the add-on condition is met is then announced. Then, after each of these announcements, the total number of continued games in the current execution is displayed and the display of the number of continued games continues. In this case, the display of the number of continued games is decremented by one each time one game is played.

In the first unit execution time ST12, a continuation rate increase lottery process is executed based on the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game, and if an increase is won in the continuation rate increase lottery process, the continuation lottery process is performed. will be promoted to continuation rate mode, where the continuation rate will be higher than before. When the remaining number of consecutive games in the first unit execution time ST12 is 0 games, if the stock number in the first unit execution time ST12 is 1 or more, the stock number is subtracted by 1, and then the first unit execution time ST12 A new round of execution is started. On the other hand, when the stock number of the first unit execution time ST12 is "0", the continuation lottery process is executed with the continuation rate corresponding to the continuation rate mode at that time. If there is a continuous winning in the continuous lottery process, new unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are started, and if there is no continuous winning in the continuous lottery process, the ART state ST6 ends. do.

The second unit execution time ST13 is a game state that occurs when the first unit execution time ST12 has been executed 12 times and the conditions for continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are further satisfied. That is, the first to twelfth unit execution times ST12 and ST13 in the ART state ST6 become the first unit execution time ST12, and the 13th and subsequent unit execution times ST12 and ST13 become the second unit execution time ST13. The initial number of games in the second unit execution time ST13 is between 29 and 32 games. In the second unit execution time ST13, unlike the first unit execution time ST12, no increase in the number of consecutive games occurs. Further, since the stock number for unit execution times ST12 and ST13 determined in the start period ST11 is 6 or less, there is no stock number remaining for the second unit execution time ST13.

When the number of remaining continuation games in the second unit execution time ST13 becomes 0, a continuation lottery process is executed with a specific continuation rate. The specific continuation rate is equal to or higher than the continuation rate corresponding to the continuation rate mode with the highest continuation rate among the continuation rate modes in the first unit execution time ST12. Specifically, the highest continuation rate in the first unit execution time ST12 is 80%, while the specific continuation rate in the second unit execution time ST13 is set to 90%, which is a continuation rate higher than the highest continuation rate. This makes it easier for the second unit execution time ST13 to win the continuation lottery process than the first unit execution time ST12. If a continuation lottery process results in a win, a new execution of the second unit execution time ST13 is started, and if a continuation lottery process does not result in a win, the ART state ST6 ends.

Next, distribution of the number of games in the ART state ST6 will be explained. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution of the number of games in the ART state ST6.

As already explained, in the second section SC2, there is an upper limit on the number of games (specifically 1500 games) and an upper limit on the number of net additions (specifically 2400), and if any of these ending conditions are met. When this is established, even if the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 is in the middle, these gaming states are ended midway as the second section SC2 is forcibly ended. In addition, there are stay modes A mode to C mode in the second section SC2, and in any stay mode, the number of games played after the second section SC2 starts reaches the ceiling number of games. As a result, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is confirmed. In this case, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6 is when the mode becomes A mode in the second section SC2, and the minimum value is the minimum value required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed. "A" in FIG. 62 shows the relationship between the number of ceiling games, the maximum number of consecutive games expected in the preparation state ST4 to which the transition is made after reaching the ceiling number of games, and the number of consecutive games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. That's 691 games.

As already explained, the ART state ST6 includes a start period ST11, a first unit execution time ST12, and a second unit execution time ST13. The number of consecutive games in the start period ST11 is 10 games as shown in "B" in FIG. 62. The initial number of games in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 29 to 32 games as shown in "C" in FIG. 62, and the total number of initial games when the first unit execution time ST12 occurs 12 times is as shown in FIG. As shown in "D", there will be 348 games to 384 games. Furthermore, although an additional number of consecutive games may occur in the first unit execution time ST12, the maximum number of additional games that may occur in the first unit execution time ST12 is 170 games as shown in "E" in FIG. It becomes. In other words, the first unit execution time ST12 is executed a maximum of 12 times as described above, but the maximum number of games that can be added within the range of the maximum 12 times is 170 games. The maximum total number of games among the above "B", above "D", and above "E" is 564 games as shown in "F" in FIG. 62.

The 564 games of the above "F" are smaller than the 691 games of the above "A", which is the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6. The difference between the above "A" and the above "F" is 127 games, as shown by "G" in FIG. 62. As a result, the maximum number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6 becomes 691 games, which is the expected minimum value, and the first unit execution time ST12 is executed 12 times, and the first unit execution time ST12 is also executed. Even if the total number of add-on games that occur in the situation is 170 games, which is the maximum number of games, it is possible to leave room for the second unit execution time ST13 to occur a plurality of times. Specifically, it is possible to leave room for the second unit execution time ST13 to occur at least three times. Therefore, in the case of transitioning to the first ART state ST6 in the second section SC2, regardless of the game content in the second section SC2 until the start of the ART state ST6, the second unit It is possible to create a situation where the continuation lottery process for determining whether to continue the execution time ST13 is executed at a specific continuation rate that is the highest continuation rate.

Next, the processing contents in the ART state ST6 will be explained. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the ART process executed by the main MPU 72 at the start of the game. The ART process at the start of the game is executed in step S2305 in the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game (FIG. 50), and the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is completed in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). It is executed in step S710, which is a process that is executed after the game period and before the first control process (step S711) of the game section.

If the current state is the start period ST11 (step S3001: YES), a point lottery process is executed (step S3002). In the point lottery process, one of the points "1" to "3" is selected by lottery. In this case, the point lottery process is performed so that the person who wins the index value IV with a low probability of winning in the lottery process for the role in the current game (Figure 16) has a larger expected value of the selected points. executed. Then, the points selected by the point lottery process are added to a point counter provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S3003). The point counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the total points acquired in the start period ST11. Note that the point counter is cleared to "0" when the ART state ST6 is newly started.

Thereafter, by referring to the value of the ART continuation counter in the main side RAM 74, it is determined whether the current game is the last game of the start period ST11 (step S3004). If it is the last game of the start period (step S3004: YES), the stock number corresponding to the value of the point counter in the main side RAM 74 is specified, and the stock number is set in the stock number counter provided in the main side RAM 74. (Step S3005). The stock number counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to specify the stock number for the first unit execution time ST12. The maximum stock number that can be selected in step S3005 is "6", and if the value of the point counter is one of "13 to 15", "1" is selected as the stock number and the stock number counter is is set to "1" and the value of the point counter is one of "16 to 18", "2" is selected as the stock number, "2" is set to the stock number counter, and the point counter is set to "1". If the value of the counter is between "19 and 21", "3" is selected as the stock number and "3" is set in the stock number counter, and when the value of the point counter is between "22 and 24". If either of these is the case, "4" is selected as the stock number and "4" is set in the stock number counter, and if the value of the point counter is one of "25 to 27", the stock number is set to "4". If "5" is selected and the stock number counter is set to "5", and the value of the point counter is 28 or more, "6" is selected as the stock number and "6" is set to the stock number counter. be done.

Thereafter, the continuation mode corresponding to the value of the point counter in the main side RAM 74 is specified, and the value corresponding to the continuation mode is set in the continuation mode counter provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S3006). The continuation mode counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the continuation rate when the continuation lottery process is executed when the first unit execution time ST12 ends. Specifically, when the value of the point counter is between "10 and 15", "1" corresponding to the first continuation mode in which the continuation rate is 50% is set in the continuation mode counter, and the point When the value of the points counter is between 16 and 20, "2" corresponding to the second continuous mode with a continuation rate of 60% is set in the continuous mode counter, and the value of the point counter is set to 21 to 25'', “3” corresponding to the third continuation mode with a continuation rate of 70% is set to the continuation mode counter, and if the value of the point counter is 26 or more, "4" corresponding to the fourth continuation mode in which the continuation rate is 80% is set in the continuation mode counter.

If the current state is not the start period ST11 (step S3001: NO), it is determined whether it is the start game of the first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13 (step S3007). If it is the starting game of the first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13 (step S3007: YES), the process for starting the current set is executed (step S3008). In the process for starting the current set, the details of which will be described later, are executed to set the number of consecutive games for the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 to be started this time.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the completion counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is 10 or less (step S3009). The completion counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times unit execution times ST12 and ST13 have been executed in the current ART state ST6. When the first unit execution time ST12 is started, the value of the completion counter is "0", and the value of the completion counter is incremented by 1 each time the first unit execution time ST12 is continued. Furthermore, as already explained, the first unit execution time ST12 is executed a maximum of 12 times. Therefore, when the value of the completion counter is 10 or less, it means that the current start target is the first unit execution time ST12 from the 1st to the 11th time.

If the value of the completion counter is 10 or less (step S3009: YES), the next set of addition processing is executed (step S3010), and if the value of the completion counter is 11 or more (step S3009: NO). ), the next set of additional processing is not executed. That is, when the 1st to 11th first unit execution times ST12 are started, the next set of addition processing (step S3010) is executed, and the 12th first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time is When ST13 is started, the next set of addition processing (step S3010) is not executed. Details of the next set addition processing will be described later, but in the case where the current first unit execution time ST12 continues, the next set of first unit execution times ST12 will be added to the initial number of games of the next first unit execution time ST12. Executes processing for determining the number of additional games to be played.

If a negative determination is made in step S3007, if a negative determination is made in step S3009, or if the process in step S3010 is executed, the current status is determined by determining whether the value of the completion counter is 11 or less. It is determined whether it is the first unit execution time ST12 (step S3011). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3011, a continuation rate increase lottery process is executed (step S3012). In the continuation rate increase lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether the continuation mode that determines the continuation rate of the continuation lottery process to be executed when the first unit execution time ST12 ends is to be promoted over the current continuation mode. In this case, if you win an index value IV with a low probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game, you will have a higher probability of winning an increase in the continuation rate increase lottery process.

If the result of the continuation rate increase lottery process is an increase win (step S3013: YES), the continuation rate increase process is executed (step S3014). In the continuation rate increase process, if the current state is the fourth continuation mode, which has the maximum continuation rate in the first unit execution ST12 (specifically, 80%), the fourth continuation mode is maintained, and if the current state is any of the first to third continuation modes, the value of the continuation mode counter in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 to enter a continuation mode with a continuation rate one step higher.

If a negative determination is made in step S3011, if a negative determination is made in step S3013, or if the process in step S3014 is executed, by referring to the ART continuation counter in the main side RAM 74, the current game is It is determined whether this is the final game in execution times ST12 and ST13 (step S3015). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3015, it is determined whether the value of the stock number counter in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S3016). If the value of the stock number counter is 1 or more, it means that the stock number of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 1 or more, as explained above, and if the value of the stock number counter is "0", then This means that the stock number of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is "0". In this case, if this time is the first unit execution time ST12, the value of the stock number counter may be 1 or more, whereas if this time is the second unit execution time ST13, the value of the stock number counter is " 0".

If the value of the stock number counter is 1 or more, a continuation confirmation command indicating that the continuation of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 has been confirmed is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3020). By receiving the continuation confirmation command, the performance side MPU 92 causes a performance indicating that the continuation of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is confirmed to be executed. Note that the continuation confirmation command is sent with numerical information set in the additional counter 74h of the main side RAM 74 set therein. Although details will be described later, numerical information corresponding to the number of additional games to be added to the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 when the next unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are started is set in the addition counter 74h. be done.

If the value of the stock number counter is "0" (step S3016: NO), a continuous lottery process is executed (step S3017). In the continuation lottery process, if this time is the first unit execution time ST12, the continuation lottery table corresponding to the value of the continuation mode counter in the main side RAM 74 is read out. In this case, if the value of the continuation mode counter is "1", a continuation lottery table with a continuation rate of 50% is read out, and if the value of the continuation mode counter is "2", a continuation lottery table with a continuation rate of 60% is read out. If the value of the continuation mode counter is "3", the continuation lottery table with a continuation rate of 70% is read out, and if the value of the continuation mode counter is "4", the continuation lottery table with a continuation rate of 80% is read out. Read out. Furthermore, if this time is the second unit execution time ST13, a continuation lottery table with a continuation rate of 90% is read out regardless of the value of the continuation mode counter in the main side RAM 74. Then, numerical information is acquired from a random number counter that is regularly updated in the main side RAM 74, and the acquired numerical information is checked against the continuous lottery table read out above.

If the result of the continuous lottery process (step S3017) is a continuous win (step S3018: YES), the continuation confirmation flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3019). The continuation confirmation flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the continuation of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 has been confirmed. Thereafter, a continuation confirmation command indicating that the continuation of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 has been confirmed is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3020). By receiving the continuation confirmation command, the performance side MPU 92 causes a performance indicating that the continuation of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is confirmed to be executed.

Next, the ART state processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 64. The ART state processing is executed in step S908 in the response processing at the end of play (Figure 26). As described above, the response processing at the end of play is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, and therefore the ART state processing is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

First, the value of the ART continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S3101). The ART continuation counter is used by the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of continuous games in the start period ST11 if it is the start period ST11, and if it is the unit execution times ST12 or ST13, it is used for the unit execution times ST12 or ST13. This is used by the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of consecutive games.

When in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, a positive determination is made in step S902 in the response process at the end of play (FIG. 26), and the ART state process (step S908) is not executed. Therefore, if the ART state ST6 transitions to the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 during the ART state ST6, the ART state ST6 is temporarily interrupted, and the number of games played in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is not treated as the number of games played in the ART state ST6. When the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 ends, the ART state ST6 is resumed without transitioning to the preparation state ST4, with the lottery mode remaining in the normal mode.

Thereafter, by determining whether the start period flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", it is determined whether the current state is the start period ST11 (step S3102). If it is the start period ST11 (step S3102: YES), by determining whether the value of the ART continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 is "0", the remaining number of continuous games in the start period ST11 is determined to be 0 games. It is determined whether it has become (step S3103).

If the value of the ART continuation counter is "0" (step S3103: YES), the remaining add-on counter 74f (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "170", which is the maximum number of added games in the current ART state ST6 (step S3104). The remaining add-on counter 74f is a counter for the main MPU 72 to identify the remaining number of added games that can be generated in the first unit execution ST12 in the current ART state ST6. Then, the setting process of the first unit execution ST12 is executed (step S3105). In the setting process of the first unit execution ST12, the unit execution flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the start period flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". The unit execution flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify whether it is the first unit execution ST12 or the second unit execution ST13. After that, a transition command to the first unit execution time ST12, indicating that the start period ST11 has been transitioned to the first unit execution time ST12, is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S3106). As a result, the production side MPU 92 causes the performance corresponding to the first unit execution time ST12 to be executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

If the current state is not the start period ST11 (step S3102: NO), the ART continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the remaining number of continued games in the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 0 (step S3107). If the ART continuation counter value is "0" (step S3107: YES), the stock number counter in the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the value is 1 or more (step S3108). If the stock number counter value is 1 or more, it means that the stock number of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 1 or more, as already explained, and if the stock number counter value is "0", it means that the stock number of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is "0". In this case, if this is the first unit execution time ST12, the value of the stock number counter may be 1 or more, whereas if this is the second unit execution time ST13, the value of the stock number counter is "0". If the value of the stock number counter is 1 or more (step S3108: YES), the value of the stock number counter is decremented by 1 (step S3109), and then the processing for the continuation of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 in steps S3112 to S3115 is executed.

If the value of the stock number counter is "0" (step S3108: NO), it is determined whether the continuation confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" to determine whether or not a continuation lottery process (step S3017) executed at the start of the current game has been won (step S3110). If the continuation confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S3110: YES), the continuation confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S3111), and the continuation processing of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 in steps S3112 to S3115 is then executed.

In other words, when the stock number of unit execution times ST12, ST13 is 1 or more, if the remaining number of continuation games of the current unit execution times ST12, ST13 becomes 0, the stock number is consumed by 1, and the next unit execution times ST12, ST13 will occur without executing the continuation lottery process. On the other hand, when the stock number of unit execution times ST12, ST13 is "0", if the remaining number of continuation games of the current unit execution times ST12, ST13 becomes 0, the continuation lottery process will be executed, and the continuation lottery process will result in a continuation win, and the next unit execution times ST12, ST13 will occur.

As a process for continuation of unit execution times ST12 and ST13, first, the value of the completion counter in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S3112). As already explained, the completion counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times unit execution times ST12 and ST13 have been executed in the current ART state ST6. Then, by determining whether or not the value of the completion counter after the addition of 1 is "12", the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 to be executed by the continuation of the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are set to the first It is determined whether the unit execution time ST12 has become the second unit execution time ST13.

If the value of the completion counter is not "12" (step S3113: NO), the unit execution time ST12 indicates that the unit execution time ST12, ST13 of the same type as the unit execution time ST12, ST13 that is currently being executed is continued. , the continuation command of ST13 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3114). As a result, the production side MPU 92 displays a production on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 corresponding to the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 of the same type as the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 that are currently being executed. so that it is executed. On the other hand, if the value of the completion counter is "12" (step S3113: YES), this indicates that the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 to be executed have changed from the first unit execution time ST12 to the second unit execution time ST13. A transition command for the second unit execution time ST13 is transmitted to the production side MPU92 (step S3115). Thereby, the effect-side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the start of the second unit execution time ST13.

On the other hand, if the continuation confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S3110: NO), that is, the stock number of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is "0" and the result of the continuation lottery process (step S3017) is continued. If the winner is not a winner, advantageous termination processing is executed (step S3116). The processing content of the advantageous ending process is similar to the processing content of the advantageous ending process executed in step S2707 in the pseudo bonus process (FIG. 56).

That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 57, first, an advantageous end command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2801). The advantageous end command is a command that is sent to the production side MPU 92 when the pseudo bonus state ST5 or ART state ST6 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being met. When the production side MPU 92 receives an advantageous end command in a situation in which the ART state ST6 is in progress, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute a presentation indicating that the ART state ST6 is ending.

Then, it is determined whether the heaven preparation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2802). The heaven preparation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether the state is after the first pseudo bonus state ST5 in B mode or the ART state ST6 started before the first pseudo bonus state ST5 is executed, or after the ART state ST6 is finished if a transition to the ART state ST6 occurs after the first pseudo bonus state ST5 is finished. When the second section SC2 in B mode is started, the heaven preparation flag is set to "1", and the heaven preparation flag is set to "1" until the first pseudo bonus state ST5 ends after the second section SC2 in B mode is started, until the ART state ST6 started before the first pseudo bonus state ST5 is executed ends, or until the ART state ST6 ends if a transition to the ART state ST6 occurs after the first pseudo bonus state ST5 is finished. On the other hand, in the second section SC2 of B mode, when the first pseudo bonus state ST5 ends, when the ART state ST6 that started before the first pseudo bonus state ST5 was executed ends, or when a transition to the ART state ST6 occurs after the first pseudo bonus state ST5 ends and the ART state ST6 ends, the heaven preparation flag is cleared to "0" when a transition to the normal game state ST1 is made.

If the heaven preparation flag is not set to "1" (step S2802: NO), the setting process of the end preparation state ST7 is executed (step S2803). In this setting process, if the current game state is the ART state ST6, the ART state flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, in this setting process, the end preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify that the game state is the end preparation state ST7, and setting the end preparation state flag to "1" changes the game state to the end preparation state ST7. After that, the end preparation complete flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2804). As already explained, the end preparation complete flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify whether or not one game has been played in the end preparation state ST7.

If the heaven preparation flag is set to "1" (step S2802: YES), the canceled game number counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is set to "80" (step S2805). As already explained, the canceled game number counter 74e is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed. In step S2805, the number of canceled games counter 74e is set to "80", so that in the B mode, the number of games required until the transition to the next pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed is 80 games. Thereafter, a gaming state setting process is executed (step S2806). In this setting process, if the current gaming state is ART state ST6, the ART state flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST1. Further, the heaven preparation flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2807).

Next, the loop lottery process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 65. The loop lottery process is executed in step S307, which is a process that is executed after one game is started in the normal process (FIG. 12) and before the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is executed. .

First, it is determined whether or not this is the start game of a new execution in the first unit execution ST12 or the second unit execution ST13 (step S3201). The loop lottery process is a process for determining whether the initial number of games for each unit execution ST12, ST13 will be between 29 and 32 games, and is therefore only executed in the start game of a new execution in the first unit execution ST12 or the second unit execution ST13.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, numerical information corresponding to the first waiting period is set in an update waiting counter provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S3202). In the loop lottery process (FIG. 65), the second random number can be repeatedly obtained from the second random number circuit 76. The second random number is 1-byte numerical information consisting of 8 bits. The second random number circuit 76 sequentially updates the second random number in the numerical range of "0 to 255" based on the clock signal output from the clock circuit, and when the second random number has been updated once, it updates the second random number with a new initial value. The next round of updating of the second random number is started from the value. When the second random number is repeatedly acquired in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65), at least a first waiting period is ensured from when the second random number is acquired once until the second random number is acquired the next time. . This first waiting period is set as a period longer than the period required for the second random number to be updated once in the second random number circuit 76, and specifically, the second random number is updated in the second random number circuit 76. The period is set to 1.49 milliseconds, which is longer than the period required for one revolution. The update waiting counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to determine whether or not the first waiting period has elapsed.

After executing the process of step S3202, the update waiting counter is updated (step S3203). Specifically, the value of the update waiting counter is decremented by 1. Then, it is determined whether the value of the update waiting counter after decrementing by 1 has become "0" (step S3204). If the value of the update waiting counter is not "0" (step S3204: NO), the process returns to step S3203 and the update waiting counter is updated again. Then, the update waiting counter is updated repeatedly until the value of the update waiting counter becomes "0".

If the value of the update waiting counter is "0" (step S3204: YES), this means that the first waiting period has elapsed, so proceed to step S3205. In step S3205, the repetition counter 74g (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "15", which is the number of repetitions (step S3205). In the loop lottery process (FIG. 65), as already explained, the second random number can be repeatedly obtained from the second random number circuit 76. When the second random number is repeatedly obtained, not only is the first waiting period secured as a fixed period from when the second random number is obtained once to when the second random number is obtained next, but the second waiting period is secured as a variable period. Even if this second waiting period reaches its maximum value, it is still shorter than the first waiting period, more specifically, it is shorter than the first waiting period. However, this is not limited to the above, and the second waiting period may be the same as the first waiting period, the second waiting period may be longer than the first waiting period, or the second waiting period may always be longer than the first waiting period.

Then, the second random number acquired in the previous step S3212 is read from the second random number acquisition area provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3206). After the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the second random number acquisition area stores a second random number with a decimal value of "0". Then, the lowest 4 bits of the 8-bit second random number read in step S3206 are stored in a register of the main MPU 72 as a variation value (step S3207). In this case, the variation value is 4-bit numerical information, and therefore has a minimum value of "0" and a maximum value of "15".

Then, it is determined whether the variation value stored in the register of the main MPU 72 is smaller than the value of the repetition counter 74g of the main RAM 74 (step S3208). In other words, a process for determining the magnitude relationship is executed. If the variation value is smaller than the value of the repetition counter 74g (step S3208: YES), the process proceeds to step S3209 by a JUMP command, and if the variation value is equal to or greater than the value of the repetition counter 74g (step S3208: NO), the process proceeds to step S3209 by a NOP command. In step S3209, the value of the repetition counter 74g is decremented by 1. Then, if the value of the repetition counter 74g after decrementing by 1 is equal to or greater than 1 (step S3210: NO), the process returns to step S3208, and if the value of the repetition counter 74g after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S3210: YES), the process proceeds to step S3211.

As described above, the process proceeds to step S3209 regardless of whether a positive judgment is made in step S3208 or a negative judgment is made in step S3208, but the processing time required to proceed to step S3209 is about 10 microseconds longer when a JUMP command is executed than when a NOP command is executed. Then, depending on whether the variation value determined as the lower 4 bits of the second random number previously obtained is smaller than the value of the repetition counter 74g as described above, the JUMP command or the NOP command is executed. Furthermore, each time the process of step S3209 is executed, the value of the repetition counter 74g is decremented by 1, and the processes of steps S3208 and S3209 are repeated until the value of the repetition counter 74g after decrementing by 1 becomes "0". This makes it possible to vary the ratio of the number of times the JUMP instruction is executed in step S3208 to the number of times the NOP instruction is executed in step S3208 out of the 15 repetitions, using the value of the lowest 4 bits of the second random number previously obtained, and as a result makes it possible to vary the second waiting period.

In step S3211, the value of the lottery execution counter provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1. The lottery execution counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to determine the number of times the addition lottery process (step S3213) has been executed in the current start game in the new execution of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13.

Then, the second random number at that time is obtained from the second random number circuit 76 and stored in the second random number acquisition area of the main RAM 74 (step S3212). Then, the addition lottery process is executed (step S3213). In the addition lottery process, an addition lottery table previously stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and the second random number is compared with the read addition lottery table to determine whether the second random number matches the winning number information set in the addition lottery table. Only one addition lottery table is provided, and the winning number information is set so that the probability of an addition win in the addition lottery process is 60%.

Here, as already explained, the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is executed at a timing before the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is executed in the normal process (FIG. 12). The result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) does not affect the addition lottery process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) may be executed at a later timing than the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the normal process (FIG. 12). At the same time, by setting the additive lottery table in correspondence with the type of index value IV that can be won in the winning role lottery process (Figure 16), the result of the role lottery process (Figure 16) in the current game can be set in the additive lottery process. It is also possible to have a configuration that affects the

If the addition lottery process (step S3213) does not result in an additional win (step S3214: NO), this loop lottery process ends. In other words, if the addition lottery process (step S3213) does not result in an additional win, the loop lottery process (Figure 65) ends without executing the process to increase the initial number of games in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13.

If an addition win occurs in the addition lottery process (step S3213) (step S3214: YES), the value of the initial addition counter provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S3215). Then, it is determined whether the value of the lottery execution counter in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S3216). As already explained, since the initial number of games in the unit execution times ST12, ST13 is 29 to 32 games, the maximum number of games that can be added as the initial number of games in the loop lottery process (Figure 65) is 3 games, and the maximum number of times the addition lottery process (step S3213) can be executed is 3 times.

If the value of the lottery execution counter is less than 3, this means that the number of times the addition lottery process (step S3213) has been executed in the loop lottery process (Figure 65) has not reached 3, so a negative judgment is made in step S3216 and the process returns to step S3202. On the other hand, if the value of the lottery execution counter is "3", this means that the number of times the addition lottery process (step S3213) has been executed in the loop lottery process (Figure 65) has reached the maximum value of 3, so a positive judgment is made in step S3216 and this loop lottery process ends.

Next, the manner in which the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is executed will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 66. FIG. 66(a) shows the period during which one game is executed, FIG. 66(b) shows the period during which the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is executed, FIG. 66(c) shows the period which is the first waiting period, FIG. 66(d) shows the period which is the second waiting period, and FIG. 66(e) shows the timing when the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed.

One game is started at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 66(a). This game is the first game when a new execution of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is started. Therefore, at the timing of t1, the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is started as shown in FIG. 66(b). Furthermore, at the timing of t1, measurement of the first waiting period is started as shown in FIG. 66(c).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(c) at timing t2, the measurement of the first standby period that started at timing t1 is completed. That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3204 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). Therefore, measurement of the second waiting period is started at timing t2 as shown in FIG. 66(d). During the second waiting period, the combination of steps S3208 and S3209 is repeated 15 times. Then, at timing t3, the measurement of the second waiting period is completed as shown in FIG. 66(d). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3210 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66(e) at timing t3, a second random number is obtained from the second random number circuit 76, and the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed using the obtained second random number. . If the additional lottery process (step S3213) does not result in an additional win, the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) ends without adding 1 to the value of the initial addition counter. In this case, since the value of the initial addition counter remains "0", the initial number of games in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 started this time is 29 games.

In the case of FIG. 66, the additional lottery process (step S3213) executed at timing t3 results in an additional winning. Therefore, the value of the initial addition counter is incremented by one. Then, at the timing t3, measurement of the first waiting period is newly started as shown in FIG. 66(c).

After that, at the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 66(c), the measurement of the first waiting period that started at the timing t3 is completed. In other words, a positive judgment is made in step S3204 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). In this case, the first waiting period from the timing t1 to the timing t2 and the first waiting period from the timing t3 to the timing t4 are the same period.

At timing t4, measurement of the second waiting period is started as shown in FIG. 66(d). During the second waiting period, the combination of steps S3208 and S3209 is repeated 15 times. Then, at timing t5, the measurement of the second waiting period is completed as shown in FIG. 66(d). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3210 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). In this case, the second waiting period from timing t2 to timing t3 and the second waiting period from timing t4 to timing t5 are different periods.

As shown in FIG. 66(e) at timing t5, a second random number is obtained from the second random number circuit 76, and the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed using the obtained second random number. If the additional lottery process (step S3213) does not result in an additional win, the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is ended without adding 1 to the value of the initial addition counter. In this case, since the value of the initial addition counter remains "1", the initial number of games in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 started this time is 30 games.

In the case of FIG. 66, an addition win occurs in the addition lottery process (step S3213) executed at timing t5. Therefore, the value of the initial addition counter is incremented by 1. Then, at timing t5, measurement of the first waiting period is newly started as shown in FIG. 66(c).

Thereafter, at timing t6, as shown in FIG. 66(c), the measurement of the first standby period that started at timing t5 is completed. That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3204 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). In this case, the first waiting period from timing t1 to timing t2, the first waiting period from timing t3 to timing t4, and the first waiting period from timing t5 to timing t6 are the same period. ing.

At timing t6, measurement of the second waiting period is started as shown in FIG. 66(d). During the second waiting period, the combination of steps S3208 and S3209 is repeated 15 times. Then, at timing t7, the measurement of the second waiting period is completed as shown in FIG. 66(d). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3210 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). In this case, the second waiting period from timing t2 to timing t3, the second waiting period from timing t4 to timing t5, and the second waiting period from timing t6 to timing t7 are all different periods. It has become.

At timing t7, as shown in FIG. 66(e), a second random number is obtained from the second random number circuit 76, and the obtained second random number is used to execute the addition lottery process (step S3213). If the addition lottery process (step S3213) does not result in an addition win, the value of the initial addition counter is not incremented by 1 and the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is terminated. In this case, the value of the initial addition counter remains at "2", so the initial number of games in the unit execution times ST12, ST13 started this time is 31 games. On the other hand, if an addition win is obtained in the addition lottery process (step S3213), the value of the initial addition counter is incremented by 1 and the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is terminated. In this case, the value of the initial addition counter is "3", so the initial number of games in the unit execution times ST12, ST13 started this time is 32 games.

The loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is ended at the timing of t7, regardless of whether or not an additional lottery result is obtained in the additional lottery process (step S3213) executed at the timing of t7. After that, the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the winning combination in the current game will be executed.

As described above, in the first game when a new execution of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is started, the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is executed. Then, by repeatedly executing the additional lottery process on the condition that an additional win is achieved in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65), the initial number of games in the newly started unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 29 games or more. The decision will be made from among 32 games. In the addition lottery process, the second random number obtained from the second random number circuit 76 will be used, but if the addition lottery process is repeatedly executed, the range of one processing time of the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) will be used. A second random number is repeatedly obtained within the range.

In this case, not only is the first waiting period secured as a fixed period from when the second random number is acquired once until the second random number is acquired again, but the second waiting period is secured as a period of variation. The first waiting period is set to a period equal to or longer than the period required for the second random number to be updated once in the second random number circuit 76, and is specifically set to 1.49 milliseconds, which is longer than the period required for the second random number to be updated once in the second random number circuit 76. As a result, the random number in the second random number circuit 76 is updated at least once from when the second random number is acquired once until the second random number is acquired again, and it is possible to acquire any value of the second random number in the numerical range of "0 to 255" at each acquisition timing as the second random number, even if the acquisition of the second random number is repeated in a short period of time. In addition, by securing the second waiting period as a period of variation, it is possible to prevent the acquisition timing of the second random number from being biased within the range of one cycle of the second random number in the second random number circuit 76.

Next, the process for adding on the next set executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 67. The process for adding on the next set is executed in step S3010 in the ART process (FIG. 63) at the start of the game. As already explained, the process for adding on the next set is executed in a game in which the first to eleventh new executions in the first unit execution ST12 have started. Also, as already explained, the process for adding on the next set executes processing to determine the number of added games to be added to the initial number of games in the next first unit execution ST12 in the case where the current first unit execution ST12 is continued.

First, an add-on lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the continuation mode counter in the main RAM 74 and the value of the completion counter in the main RAM 74 is read from the main ROM 73 (step S3301). Then, an add-on lottery process is executed (step S3302). In the add-on lottery process, numerical information at that time is obtained from a random number counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74, and the obtained numerical information is compared against the add-on lottery table.

In the add-on lottery table, the number of add-on games is set to 0, 10, 30, and 80, and a numerical range of the numerical information of the random number counter is set for each of these 0, 10, 30, and 80 games. In addition, multiple types of add-on lottery tables are set, and these multiple types of add-on lottery tables correspond to combinations of continuation modes and the number of executions of the first unit execution time ST12. As described above, when the add-on lottery process (step S3302) is executed, an add-on lottery table corresponding to a combination of the continuation mode counter value and the completion counter value is read out, and the add-on lottery table corresponds to a combination of the current continuation mode and the current number of executions of the first unit execution time ST12.

In the first continuation mode (specifically, 50%) and the second continuation mode (specifically, 60%), in which the continuation rate is relatively low, if the current number of executions of the first unit execution ST12 is the first to fifth times, an add-on lottery table with a relatively low expected value of the number of added games (for example, an expected value of 10 games) is selected, and if it is the sixth time or later, an add-on lottery table with a relatively high expected value of the number of added games (for example, an expected value of 30 games) is selected. On the other hand, in the third continuation mode (specifically, 70%) and the fourth continuation mode (specifically, 80%), in which the continuation rate is relatively high, if the current number of executions of the first unit execution ST12 is the first to fifth times, an add-on lottery table with a relatively high expected value of the number of added games (for example, an expected value of 30 games) is selected, and if it is the sixth time or later, an add-on lottery table with a relatively low expected value of the number of added games (for example, an expected value of 10 games) is selected. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the above relationship may be reversed.

If the result of the add-on lottery process (step S3302) is an add-on win (step S3303: YES), that is, if the number of add-on games other than 0 games is selected in the add-on lottery process (step S3302), the add-on game in the main side RAM 74 It is determined whether the value of the remaining counter 74f is greater than the number of add-on games selected this time in the add-on lottery process (step S3302) (step S3304). As already explained, the remaining add-on counter 74f is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of remaining add-on games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6. As already explained, the remaining additional games counter 74f is set to "170", which is the maximum number of additional games, when the start period ST11 ends and the first unit execution time ST12 starts.

In other words, in step S3304, it is determined whether the remaining number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution ST12 in the current ART state ST6 is greater than the number of additional games currently selected in the additional lottery process (step S3302). Note that this is not limited to this, and in step S3304, it may be configured to determine whether the remaining number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution ST12 in the current ART state ST6 is greater than or equal to the number of additional games currently selected in the additional lottery process (step S3302).

If a positive judgment is made in step S3304, the number of games selected in the add-on lottery process (step S3302) is set to the add-on counter 74h provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3305). The add-on counter 74h is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to determine the number of add-on games to be added to the initial number of games in the next execution of the first unit execution ST12 if the current execution of the first unit execution ST12 continues. After that, the number of games selected in the add-on lottery process (step S3302) is subtracted from the value of the remaining add-on counter 74f in the main RAM 74 (step S3306).

Even if one or more additional games are selected in the additional lottery process (step S3302) as described above, if the remaining number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution ST12 in the current ART state ST6 is not greater than the number of additional games selected this time in the additional lottery process (step S3302), the selected number of additional games is nullified without being added. In other words, the remaining number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution ST12 in the current ART state ST6 is not set as an additional game, but the number of additional games is set to 0 games, just as in the case where an additional win is not made in the additional lottery process (step S3302). This not only makes it possible to set the number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution ST12 in the current ART state ST6 to less than the maximum number of games, but also makes it possible to increase the possibility that an additional game number will be awarded even in the first unit execution ST12 in a later execution.

Next, the process for starting the current set executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 68. The start process for the current set is executed in step S3008 in the ART process at the start of the game (FIG. 63). As already explained, the start process of this set is executed in the game in which the new execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13 is started, and also in the unit execution time ST12, This is executed to set the number of consecutive games for the current execution in ST13.

First, the ART continuation counter in the master RAM 74 is set to "29", which is the minimum value of the initial number of games (step S3401). As already explained, the ART continuation counter is used by the master MPU 72 to determine the remaining number of continued games in the start period ST11 if it is the start period ST11, and is used by the master MPU 72 to determine the remaining number of continued games in the unit execution times ST12, ST13 if it is the unit execution times ST12, ST13.

Then, the value of the initial addition counter of the master RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the master RAM 74 (step S3402). The initial addition counter is set with the number of games to be added to the initial number of games selected in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) executed when the current game is started. Note that after executing the process of step S3402, the value of the initial addition counter is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, by determining whether the value of the completion counter in the main side RAM 74 is 11 or less, it is determined whether the current status is the first unit execution time ST12 (step S3403). If the current state is the first unit execution time ST12 (step S3403: YES), the value of the addition counter 74h of the main side RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S3404). Thereafter, the value of the additional counter 74h is cleared to "0" (step S3405).

The add-on counter 74h is set with the number of add-on games selected in the next set of add-on processing (FIG. 67) executed in the game in which the previous execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 is started. Therefore, when the execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is continued and a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is started, the execution time one time before the newly started execution time is On the condition that one or more number of additional games is selected at the start of , the selected number of one or more additional games is added to the initial number of games of the newly started execution time.

In the start period ST11, the process for adding the next set (step S3010) is not executed, so in the first unit execution ST12, no additional game number is added to the initial number of games. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that an additional game number will be awarded even in the first unit execution ST12 of a later execution in a configuration in which the maximum number of games (specifically, 170 games) is set as the number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution ST12 in the current ART state ST6. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of games may be added to the initial number of games even in the first unit execution ST12 by executing an additional lottery process (step S3302) at the start of the start period ST11 or the first unit execution ST12.

When a negative determination is made in step S3403, or when the process in step S3404 is executed, a start command for unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3406). Thereby, the effect-side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the start of a new execution time of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13.

Figure 69 is a flowchart showing the ART performance control process executed by the performance side MPU 92. The ART performance control process is repeatedly executed by the performance side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, every 4 milliseconds).

It is determined whether the ending effect of the second section SC2 is being executed (step S3501). If the ending effect of the second section SC2 is being executed (step S3501: YES), the processes after step S3502 are not executed. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the ending effect of the second section SC2.

If the ending performance of the second section SC2 is not being executed (step S3501: NO), and it is the start period ST11 (step S3502: YES), the performance control process for the start period is executed (step S3503). In the performance control process for the start period, based on receiving a game start command from the main MPU 72, processing is executed to progress the performance of the start period ST11 in the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63. As already explained, the main MPU 72 determines the stock number of unit execution times ST12, ST13 in the final game of the start period ST11, and this stock number may or may not be announced by the image display device 63, etc.

In the performance control process for ART, it is determined whether a command indicating the start of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3504). The commands indicating the start of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 include a transition command to the first unit execution time ST12 transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the start period ST11 ends and the first unit execution time ST12 starts, a continuation command for unit execution times ST12 and ST13 transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the first unit execution time ST12 continues and a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 starts, a transition command to the second unit execution time ST13 transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the 12th first unit execution time ST12 ends and the first second unit execution time ST13 starts, and a continuation command for unit execution times ST12 and ST13 transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the second unit execution time ST13 continues and a new execution time of the second unit execution time ST13 starts.

When a transition command to the first unit execution time ST12 is received, other processing in step S3515 is performed to end the performance corresponding to the start period ST11 and start the performance corresponding to the first unit execution time ST12. When a transition command to the second unit execution time ST13 is received, other processing in step S3515 is performed to end the performance corresponding to the first unit execution time ST12 and start the performance corresponding to the second unit execution time ST13.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3504, a common performance lottery process is executed (step S3505). In unit execution times ST12 and ST13, a common effect is executed from the start game to the last game and the previous game. The common performance is executed regardless of whether the next unit execution times ST12, ST13 are continued or not, and based on the content of the common performance, it is determined whether the next unit execution times ST12, ST13 will be continued. It is not possible to determine whether or not. A plurality of types of performance stories are set for the common performance, and one performance story is selected from among the plurality of types of performance stories in the common performance lottery process.

Incidentally, the number of games continued in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 may vary depending on the initial number of games, and in the first unit execution time ST12, if an additional number of games is added to the initial number of games, it may vary depending on the additional number of games. However, at the stage of determining the lottery process for the common effect, the number of games continued in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 cannot be specified. Therefore, the common effect is set to have five games' worth of effect content regardless of the effect story, and during the period in which the common effect is executed in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the effect content for these five games will be repeated.

After executing the lottery process for the common effect (step S3505), a setting process for the common effect is executed (step S3506). In the setting process for the common effect, a common effect table corresponding to the effect story selected in the lottery process for the common effect is read from the production side ROM 93 and stored in the production side RAM 94. The production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect according to the common effect table, and the common effect corresponding to the currently selected effect story is executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

After that, a lottery process for the non-continuous performance is executed (step S3507). In the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, a final game performance is executed to indicate whether or not a new unit execution time ST12 and ST13 will occur in the final game. The final game performance is set to have a non-continuous performance that is executed when a new unit execution time ST12 and ST13 do not occur, and a continuation performance that is executed when a new unit execution time ST12 and ST13 occur. Multiple types of performance stories are set for the non-continuous performance, and the lottery process for the non-continuous performance selects one performance story from the multiple types of performance stories.

After the non-continuous performance lottery process (step S3507) is executed, the non-continuous performance setting process is executed (step S3508). In the non-continuous performance setting process, the non-continuous performance table corresponding to the performance story selected in the non-continuous performance lottery process is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. Whether or not a new execution of the unit execution times ST12, ST13 will occur after the unit execution times ST12, ST13 of the current execution time is completed is determined with certainty at the start of the final game of the unit execution times ST12, ST13 of the current execution time. Then, as already explained, when the master MPU 72 decides to generate a new execution of the unit execution times ST12, ST13, it transmits a continuation confirmation command at the start of the final game of the current unit execution times ST12, ST13, and when it decides not to generate a new execution of the unit execution times ST12, ST13, it does not transmit a continuation confirmation command at the start of the final game of the current unit execution times ST12, ST13. If the production side MPU 92 does not receive a continuation confirmation command from the master MPU 72 at the start of the final game in the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13, when starting the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the performance according to the non-continuation performance table stored in the production side RAM 94 in step S3508, thereby causing the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute a non-continuation performance corresponding to the performance story of the non-continuation performance table. The content of the non-continuation performance is arbitrary, but for example, when a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character is executed on the image display device 63 in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, a configuration is conceivable in which a performance in which the enemy character wins against the ally character by a normal attack or a special attack is executed as the non-continuation performance.

In the production control process for ART, it is determined whether a continuation confirmation command has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S3509). As already explained, the continuation confirmation command is transmitted at the start of the final game of the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13 when it is determined that a new execution time of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 will occur.

If a continuation confirmation command is received (step S3509: YES), it is determined whether the numerical information of the add-on counter 74h set in the continuation confirmation command is equal to or greater than the reference number of 20 (step S3510). As already explained, the numerical information set in the add-on counter 74h of the main RAM 74 is set in the continuation confirmation command. As already explained, the add-on counter 74h is set to numerical information corresponding to the number of add-on games to be added to the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12, ST13 when the next unit execution times ST12, ST13 are started. In other words, when the information on the number of add-on games set in the received continuation confirmation command is equal to or greater than 20, this means that the number of games in which the initial number of games is added with the number of add-on games of 20 or more is set as the number of continuation games in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12, ST13. As already explained, this additional number of games occurs in the first unit execution time ST12, but does not occur in the second unit execution time ST13, so a situation in which the additional number of games information set in the continuation confirmation command is 20 or more can occur in the first unit execution time ST12, but does not occur in the second unit execution time ST13.

When a negative determination is made in step S3510, a setting process for normal continuous performance is executed (step S3511). In the normal continuous performance setting process, the normal continuous performance table is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. As the execution of the performance is controlled by the performance side MPU 92 according to the normal continuous performance table, the normal continuous performance is performed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 in the final game of the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13. executed. The content of the normal continuation effect is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that a new execution of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 will occur, but for example, in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the image display device 63 When a battle performance between a character and an enemy character is executed, a configuration may be considered in which a performance in which an ally character wins against the enemy character by a normal attack is performed as a normal continuous performance.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3510, a setting process for the special continuation effect is executed (step S3512). In the setting process for the special continuation effect, the special continuation effect table is read from the production side ROM 93 and stored in the production side RAM 94. The production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect according to the special continuation effect table, and the special continuation effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 in the final game of the current unit execution times ST12, ST13. The content of the special continuation effect is arbitrary as long as it is different from the content of the normal continuation effect and the player can recognize that a new execution time of the unit execution times ST12, ST13 is occurring. For example, when a battle effect between an ally character and an enemy character is executed on the image display device 63 in the unit execution times ST12, ST13, a configuration is considered in which an effect in which the ally character wins against the enemy character by a special attack is executed as the special continuation effect.

In the effect control process for ART, if an advantageous end command is received from the main MPU 72 in the ART state ST6 (step S3513: YES), an end effect setting process is executed (step S3514). In the end performance setting process, a table is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94 for executing a performance indicating that the current ART state ST6 ends and the transition to the normal gaming state ST1 is performed. . As a result, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the current ART state ST6 is finished and the state is shifted to the normal gaming state ST1. This performance continues until the end preparation state ST7 ends and the state shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the ART presentation control process, other processing is executed (step S3515). In the other processing, processing is executed to execute presentations other than the various presentations described above. In the other processing, processing may be executed to display information on the remaining number of continued games in the start period ST11 and the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 on the image display device 63. As a result, in the start period ST11, the remaining number of continued games in the start period ST11 is displayed on the image display device 63, and in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the remaining number of continued games in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are displayed on the image display device 63.

Next, the progress of various effects in the first unit execution time ST12 will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 70. FIG. 70(a) shows the period during which one execution of the first unit execution time ST12 is executed, FIG. 70(b) shows the timing at which the add-on lottery process (step S3302) in the add-on process (FIG. 67) for the next set is executed, FIG. 70(c) shows the timing at which the continuation lottery process (step S3017) in the ART process (FIG. 63) at the start of the game is executed, FIG. 70(d) shows the period during which the common effect is executed, FIG. 70(e) shows the period during which the non-continuation effect is executed, FIG. 70(f) shows the period during which the normal continuation effect is executed, and FIG. 70(g) shows the period during which the special continuation effect is executed.

First, a case where a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 does not occur will be described.

At timing t1, the first unit execution time ST12 is started as shown in FIG. 70(a). In this case, at timing t1, as shown in FIG. 70(b), if a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 occurs after the current execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 ends, it is determined whether or not to award an additional number of games in the new execution time, and if an additional number of games is to be awarded, an additional lottery process (step S3302) is executed to determine the additional number of games. Also, at timing t1, a common presentation is started on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 70(d).

After that, at the timing of t2, the final game of the current execution in the current first unit execution ST12 is started. In this case, the stock number of the first unit execution ST12 is "0". Therefore, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 70(c), a continuation lottery process (step S3017) is executed to determine whether or not a new execution of the first unit execution ST12 is to be generated. In this case, the result of the continuation lottery process (step S3017) is not a continuation win. Therefore, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 70(d), the common effect is ended, and as shown in FIG. 70(e), the non-continuation effect is started. This allows the player to understand that a new execution of the first unit execution ST12 will not be generated. After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 70(a), the first unit execution ST12 is ended, and as shown in FIG. 70(e), the non-continuation effect is ended.

Next, a case where a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 occurs will be described.

At timing t4, the first unit execution time ST12 is started as shown in FIG. 70(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(b) at the timing t4, when a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 occurs after the current execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 ends, It is determined whether or not to award the number of additional games in the new execution time, and if the number of additional games is to be provided, an additional lottery process (step S3302) for determining the number of additional games is executed. Further, at timing t4, a common effect is started in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 70(d).

After that, at the timing of t5, the final game of the current execution in the first unit execution ST12 is started. In this case, the stock number of the first unit execution ST12 is "0". Therefore, at the timing of t5, a continuation lottery process (step S3017) is executed to determine whether or not a new execution of the first unit execution ST12 is to be generated as shown in FIG. 70(c). In this case, the result of the continuation lottery process (step S3017) is a continuation win. However, the addition lottery process (step S3302) executed at the timing of t4 did not select the addition of the number of added games, which is the reference number of 20 games or more. In other words, the situation is not such that the number of added games of 20 games or more is to be awarded in the new execution of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. Therefore, at the timing of t5, the common performance is ended as shown in FIG. 70(d), and the normal continuation performance is started as shown in FIG. 70(f). This makes it possible for the player to grasp that a new execution of the first unit execution ST12 will be generated. After that, at timing t6, the current execution of the first unit execution ST12 ends as shown in FIG. 70(a), and the normal continuation performance ends as shown in FIG. 70(f).

Thereafter, at timing t7, a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is started as shown in FIG. 70(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(b) at the timing t7, when a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 occurs after the current execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 ends, It is determined whether or not to award the number of additional games in the new execution time, and if the number of additional games is to be provided, an additional lottery process (step S3302) for determining the number of additional games is executed. Further, at the timing t7, a common effect is started in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 70(d).

After that, at the timing of t8, the final game of the current execution in the first unit execution ST12 is started. In this case, the stock number of the first unit execution ST12 is "0". Therefore, at the timing of t8, a continuation lottery process (step S3017) is executed to determine whether or not a new execution of the first unit execution ST12 is generated, as shown in FIG. 70(c). In this case, the result of the continuation lottery process (step S3017) is a continuation win. Also, the addition lottery process (step S3302) executed at the timing of t7 selects the addition of the number of added games, which is the reference number, of 20 games or more. In other words, the situation is such that the number of added games of 20 games or more is added in the new execution of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. Therefore, at the timing of t8, the common performance is ended as shown in FIG. 70(d), and the special continuation performance is started as shown in FIG. 70(g). This allows the player to understand that a new execution of the first unit execution time ST12 will occur, and that an additional number of games of 20 or more will be awarded in this new execution. After that, at timing t9, the current execution of the first unit execution time ST12 ends as shown in FIG. 70(a), and the continuation presentation ends as shown in FIG. 70(g). Then, at timing t10, a new execution of the first unit execution time ST12 begins as shown in FIG. 70(a).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In a configuration where the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are set as gaming states disadvantageous to the player, by executing a game in which the number of bets is "2", the second CB combination is won and the second CB state is set. By preventing a winning from occurring and then executing a game in which the number of bets is "3", the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and each stop can be determined as a result of the winning combination processing (Fig. 16) in each game. Regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the buttons 42 to 44, it is possible to play the game while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 from occurring. In other words, if a game in which the number of bets is ``2'' is executed and the 2nd CB combination is won, then a game in which the number of bets is ``3'' is executed and the 2nd CB combination is won. Even in the winning state, the 2nd CB prize is not established. In addition, in the winning state of the 2nd CB combination, even if a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the 1st CB combination is excluded from the selection target in the lottery process (Figure 16), so the 1st CB combination is will not be eligible for election. Since the winning state of the first CB combination is not achieved, the first CB prize is not established, and the gaming state does not shift to the first CB state ST2. This makes it possible to execute a game in which the number of bets is "3" while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 from occurring. Then, by executing a game in which the number of bets is "3", a transition to the second section SC2 may occur, and a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 may occur.

Here, it is assumed that the slot machine 10 executes the process of clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105) for the purpose of obtaining an illegal profit. For example, it is assumed that a fraudulent act occurs in which a fraudulent tool is used to make the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53 unable to detect medals in a situation where medals are paid out, thereby dispensing more medals than should be paid out. In response to this, as already explained, the slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting the intrusion of the fraudulent tool, and when the intrusion of the fraudulent tool is detected by the object detection sensor, an intrusion abnormality notification is executed. Therefore, even if the fraudulent tool is inserted in a way that is not detected by the object detection sensor, the intrusion of the fraudulent tool may be detected by the object detection sensor in the process of repeating the act of fraudulently dispensing many medals using the fraudulent tool, and an intrusion abnormality notification may be executed. In this case, it is assumed that the fraudulent will forcibly terminate the intrusion abnormality notification by fraudulently executing the process of clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105). Then, in the slot machine 10 where the intrusion abnormality notification is not executed, there is a risk that the illegally obtained medals will be used to play games.

However, if such a fraudulent act is performed, the main side RAM 74 is completely cleared (step S105), so that the second CB winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74. In other words, the state is not a winning state of the second CB combination. If a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in a state where the second CB prize is not won, it is possible that the first CB prize is won, and if the first CB prize is achieved, it will be disadvantageous for the player. A first CB state ST2, which is a gaming state, is entered. This makes it possible to penalize those who commit the above-mentioned fraudulent acts. On the other hand, in game halls, by playing a game where the number of bets is "2" before the start of business and winning the second CB combination, ordinary players who do not commit the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can On the other hand, it is possible to play a game in which the number of bets is "3" while preventing the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 from occurring.

Not only the first CB state ST2 but also the second CB state ST3 are disadvantageous gaming states for the player. Therefore, if the fraudster uses the fraudulently acquired medals to play a game in which the number of bets is "2" after performing the complete clearing process of the main RAM 74 (step S105), the second CB combination is When the player wins and the second CB prize is established, the player moves to the second CB state ST3 in which the amount of game media is reduced.

If a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the second section SC2 may be reached where transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 is possible, whereas the number of bets is "2". Even if the game is executed, the second section SC2 will not be reached. Therefore, the player basically plays the game in a situation where the number of bets is "3". In this case, the second section SC2 may be reached by executing a game in which the number of bets is "3" regardless of whether or not the second CB combination is won. As a result, even if the player starts a game in which the number of bets is "3" in a situation where the player has not won the second CB combination, it is possible to make the second section SC2 possible.

Even after the second section SC2 has been reached, unless a game with a bet number of "3" is played, the game state will not transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6. Therefore, even in the second section SC2, the player will basically be playing the game with the bet number of "3".

Since the second section SC2 ends when the number of games executed in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games), it is possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing for an excessively long time. In addition, in the second section SC2, whether the game has a bet number of "3" or a bet number of "2", the number of games executed in the second section SC2 is measured. As a result, when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, no transition to the second section SC2 occurs, and no transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 occurs in the second section SC2. However, when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, the upper limit number of games remaining in the second section SC2 is reduced accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game with a bet number of "2".

Since the second section SC2 ends based on the limited total number of net additions of gaming media in the second section SC2 reaching the upper limit net addition number (specifically 2400 pieces), the second section SC2 is excessively long. It is possible to prevent this from continuing. Furthermore, in the second section SC2, both games where the number of bets is "3" and games where the number of bets is "2" are subject to measurement of the limited total net increase in the number of game media. As a result, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, a transition to the second section SC2 does not occur, and a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 occurs in the second section SC2. However, if a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, there is a possibility that the limited total number of net additions of the game media approaches the upper limit net addition number. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game where the number of bets is "2".

In a situation where the second CB role is not won, the non-internal notification image G12 or the first internally explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63. This makes it possible to encourage the manager of the game hall or the like to win the second CB role in a situation where the second CB role is not won.

The non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63 when not only the second CB role but also the first CB role has not been won. This allows the manager of the gaming hall or the like to understand that neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won by confirming that the non-internal notification image G12 is being displayed.

The number of games played when the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed is displayed as a non-internal number of games played image G22, which is part of the non-internal notification image G12. This allows the manager of the game hall, etc., to recognize how long the situation in which the second CB role has not been won has continued in a situation in which the manager of the game hall, etc., is trying to make the second CB role a winning state.

If a game with a bet of "2" is started even though the second CB role has already been won, a two-bet notification will be issued. This will encourage players to avoid winning the second CB role.

If a game with a bet number of "3" is started when the second CB role has not been won, a 3 bet notification is executed. This makes it possible to encourage the player to win the second CB role by playing a game with a bet number of "2".

In a situation where the first CB winning combination is won, the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63. This makes it possible for the game hall manager etc. to recognize that the player has won the first CB combination.

In order to execute the setting value update process (step S106), insert the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turn it on, and also turn on the power of the slot machine 10 without pressing the reset button 56. If this is done, a part of the information in the main RAM 74 is erased by executing a partial clearing process (step S104). In this case, even if the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed, the second CB winning data indicating that the second CB combination has been won will not be erased from the main side RAM 74. Thereby, even after the partial clearing process (step S104) has been executed, it is possible to maintain the state in which the second CB combination has been won.

When the partial clear process (step S104) is executed, the first CB winning data indicating that the first CB role has been won is erased from the main RAM 74. As a result, when the first CB role has been won, the partial clear process (step S104) is executed, making it possible to resolve the situation in which the first CB role has been won.

When the slot machine 10 is powered on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on while the reset button 56 is pressed, the all clear process (step S105) is executed. By doing so, all information in the main side RAM 74 is erased. When the all-clear processing (step S105) is executed, the second CB winning data indicating that the second CB combination has been won is erased from the main side RAM 74. As a result, if an act of causing the all-clear process (step S105) to be executed illegally is performed, it is possible to create a situation in which the second CB combination has not been won.

Since the second section SC2 ends when the number of games executed in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, it is possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing for an excessively long period of time. Also, by transitioning to the preparation state ST4 before transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST5 when the number of games executed in the second section SC2 and in the normal gaming state ST1 reaches the ceiling number of games, it is possible to provide an opportunity to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5. Also, the ceiling number of games that is initially set when transitioning to the second section SC2 is a number of games that is less than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2. This makes it possible to reliably provide an opportunity to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 when the second section SC2 is reached.

A plurality of stay modes exist in the second section SC2 so that the number of ceiling games at least for the first time is different. This makes it possible to diversify the game content in the second section SC2. Further, in any type of stay mode, the number of ceiling games initially set when moving to the second section SC2 is smaller than the upper limit number of games of the second section SC2. Thereby, no matter which stay mode is selected, when the second section SC2 is reached, it is possible to reliably provide an opportunity to shift to the pseudo bonus state ST5.

The upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is the same regardless of whether the stay mode in the second section SC2 is mode A, mode B, or mode C. This makes it possible to set the advantage of one second section SC2 within a predetermined range of advantage, even if the game content in the second section SC2 is diversified.

If the stay mode of the second section SC2 is B mode, even if the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 occurs once in the second section SC2, after the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends or the pseudo bonus state If the ART state ST6 is entered after the end of ST5, even if the normal gaming state ST1 is entered after the end of the ART state ST6, the second section SC2 continues and the second ceiling is reached in the normal gaming state ST1. Once the number of games has been played, the process returns to the pseudo-bonus state ST5. The upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is the first ceiling game number, the second ceiling game number, the maximum number of consecutive games expected in the preparation state ST4, and the number of consecutive games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. The number of games is set to be greater than the total number of games. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs twice in one second section SC2.

The second ceiling game number in mode B is a smaller number of games than the first ceiling game number. This makes it possible to increase the player's anticipation of transitioning back to pseudo bonus state ST5 when the second section SC2 continues after pseudo bonus state ST5 ends.

The second section SC2 has an A mode in which the pseudo bonus state ST5 occurs only once in one second section SC2, and a B mode in which the pseudo bonus state ST5 can occur multiple times in one second section SC2. This makes it possible to create a relatively advantageous second section SC2 and a relatively disadvantageous second section SC2, making it possible to diversify the game content.

The total number of games of the first ceiling game and the second ceiling game in B mode is less than or equal to the first ceiling game in A mode. Thereby, it is possible to make the B mode a mode in which transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 can occur multiple times in one second section SC2, and a mode in which the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is easy.

By providing the interval display unit 67 that is turned on in a favorable gaming state, which is any of the preparation state ST4, pseudo bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6, it becomes easier to check whether or not the player is in the favorable gaming state. In this case, if the second interval SC2 ends as a result of the favorable gaming state ending, the interval display unit 67 is turned off when the second interval SC2 ends, whereas if the favorable gaming state ends but the second interval SC2 continues, the interval display unit 67 remains turned on even after the favorable gaming state ends. This makes it possible for a player playing the slot machine 10 to recognize that the second interval SC2 continues even after the favorable gaming state ends.

When transitioning to the second section SC2, the section display section 67 may be switched from an off state to a on state. As a result, even if a player other than the player who has continued playing the slot machine 10 confirms that the section display section 67 is in the lit state, even after the advantageous gaming state ends, the player other than the player who has continued playing the game in the slot machine 10 will not be able to play the second section even after the advantageous gaming state has ended. It is possible to make it impossible to know whether SC2 is continuing or the second section SC2 has newly occurred.

Even if the second section SC2 is reached, the section display unit 67 may be maintained in an off state, and if the game subsequently transitions to a favorable game state, the section display unit 67 may be switched from an off state to an on state. This allows the section display unit 67 to be maintained in an on state during a favorable game state, while making it possible to create a situation in which the section display unit 67 is maintained in an off state when the game is in the second section SC2 and not in a favorable game state. Therefore, even if the section display unit 67 is in an off state, there is a possibility that the game is in the second section SC2, and it is possible to make the player expect that the game is in the second section SC2 even when the section display unit 67 is in an off state.

In the B mode of the second section SC2, even if the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends without transitioning to the ART state ST6, or even if the ART state ST6 ends, the second section SC2 continues thereafter. When the second section SC2 is continued in this manner, the section display section 67 is maintained in a lit state. This makes it possible for the player playing the slot machine 10 to recognize that the second section SC2 continues even after the end of the advantageous gaming state.

In the first unit execution time ST12 of the ART state ST6, not only the initial number of games but also the number of additional games can be provided. This makes it possible for the player to expect that a large number of games will be awarded as the number of consecutive games in the first unit execution time ST12. In this case, in the ART state ST6, the number of additional games can be given in multiple first unit execution times ST12, and the total number of additional games in one ART state ST6 is the maximum number of games (specifically (170 games) or less. As a result, it is possible to generate a large number of first unit execution times ST12 in which the number of additional games is provided, and to prevent the number of additional games from being provided excessively.

When the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the ART state ST6 is ended even if the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is not 0 games. This makes it possible to prevent the ART state ST6 from continuing excessively. In this case, the total number of additional games in one ART state ST6 is limited to the maximum number of games or less. As a result, in a situation where there is a limit to the number of consecutive games in the second section SC2, it is possible to prevent the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6 from being biased towards the granting of the number of additional games.

The number of additional games awarded in one execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 is smaller than the maximum number of games of the number of additional games. This makes it possible to prevent the total number of additional games to be provided from reaching the maximum number of games due to one grant of the number of additional games. Therefore, it is possible to allow the execution of the first unit execution time ST12 for which the number of additional games is given to occur a plurality of times.

By winning in the continuous lottery process (step S3017) executed when the remaining number of continuous games of the first unit execution time ST12 becomes 0 games, a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is selected. is started. In this case, in a configuration in which a maximum number of games is set for the total number of additional games as described above, and a maximum number of games is set for the number of consecutive games in the second section SC2, It becomes possible to easily generate a situation in which the execution times of the first unit execution times ST12 are repeated.

When the first unit execution time ST12 has been executed 12 times, the next execution time will be the second unit execution time ST13. In the continuation lottery process (step S3017) executed when the remaining number of continued games in the second unit execution time ST13 becomes 0, the continuation rate will be 90%. This continuation rate has a higher probability than the highest continuation rate of 80% in the continuation lottery process (step S3017) executed when it is the first unit execution time ST12. This makes it possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the repeated execution of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. In this case, since a limit is set on the maximum number of games for the total number of added games as described above, it becomes possible to easily generate a situation in which the second unit execution time ST13 is repeated in a configuration in which an upper limit number of games is set for the number of continued games in the second section SC2.

The maximum number of games in the total number of additional games is determined from the minimum number of games that can be continued in the ART state ST6 until the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are executed 13 times. The number of games is set to be smaller than the number of games obtained by subtracting the maximum number of games assumed as the total number of games from the initial number of games in ST13. As a result, even in a configuration where the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is determined and an additional number of games can be given in the first unit execution time ST12, the number of executions in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 13 or more. This makes it possible to create a situation where the continuous lottery process (step S3017) is executed at a higher continuation rate than before.

In the second unit execution time ST13, no additional game number is given. Thereby, by repeating the second unit execution time ST13, it is possible to provide many opportunities to execute the continuous lottery process (step S3017) with a high continuation rate.

Even if the number of add-on games of 1 or more is selected in the add-on lottery process (step S3302), the remaining number of add-on games that can occur in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6 is selected in the add-on lottery process (step S3302). In S3302), if the number of games is not greater than the currently selected number of add-on games, the selected number of add-on games is not added and is invalidated. In other words, if the remaining number of additional games that can occur in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6 is not set as an addition target, but the additional winning is not achieved in the additional lottery process (step S3302). Similarly, the number of additional games becomes 0 games. This not only makes it possible to reduce the number of additional games that can occur in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6 to the maximum number of games or less, but also makes it possible to reduce the number of additional games that can occur in the first unit execution time ST12 in the subsequent execution time ST12. However, it is possible to increase the possibility that the number of additional games will be awarded.

Even if it has not been decided that a new execution of the first unit execution time ST12 will be started, the number of additional games to be awarded to the initial number of games of the new execution time is decided, and when the new execution time actually starts, the decided number of additional games is awarded to the initial number of games of the new execution time. This makes it possible to decide in advance the number of additional games to be awarded when a new execution time starts, and when a new execution time is to be started, it becomes possible to execute an effect corresponding to the number of additional games before the new execution time starts.

The number of additional games to be awarded if the next execution round were to start before the final game of the currently executed execution round in the first unit execution round ST12 is started is determined, so that it is possible to execute an effect that corresponds to the number of additional games to be awarded for the execution round that may be executed next to the currently executed execution round in the final game of the currently executed execution round.

In the execution time currently being executed in the first unit execution time ST12, the number of additional games to be awarded for the execution time that can be executed next to the execution time is determined. As a result, the number of add-on games is determined only for the next possible run, so there is no need to cumulatively store a plurality of numbers of add-on games.

When the final game of the currently executed run in the first unit run ST12 is started, it is determined whether or not to start a new run after the current run ends. This makes it possible to shorten the period from when it is decided to start a new execution until the new execution starts.

When a new execution round in the first unit execution round ST12 is started, in a configuration in which a continuation effect is executed in the final game of the currently executed execution round, the content of the continuation effect is set to the content corresponding to the number of added games that will be awarded for the new execution round. This allows a player who has confirmed the continuation effect to not only know that a new execution round is starting, but also to predict or understand the number of added games that will be awarded for the new execution round. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the continuation effect.

When the second section SC2 ends based on the end of the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, the end preparation state ST7 is entered after the end of the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, and in the end preparation state ST7. The second section SC2 ends after a predetermined number of games have been played. As a result, even if the second section SC2 ends due to the end of the pseudo bonus state ST5 or ART state ST6, the period maintained in the second section SC2 after the pseudo bonus state ST5 or ART state ST6 ends. It becomes possible to cause

The second section SC2 ends when one game has been played in the end preparation state ST7. This makes it possible to shorten as much as possible the period during which the second section SC2 is maintained after the pseudo bonus state ST5 or ART state ST6 ends.

When the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, the section display section 67 changes from a lit state to an unlit state. This makes it possible to maintain the lighting state of the section display section 67 for a predetermined number of games even after the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends.

Even if the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends without a transition to the ART state ST6 being confirmed in the second section SC2 of A mode, the end preparation state ST7 for one game is entered after the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends, and the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state in the end preparation state ST7, so that the section display unit 67 remains lit even after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5. As a result, even if the section display unit 67 is checked at the timing when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 in a situation where a performance indicating that a transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed has not been executed, it is not possible to determine that a transition to the ART state ST6 will not occur. Therefore, in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5, when the effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed has not been executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the revival effect will be executed at the timing when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and it is possible to maintain the sense of anticipation that the transition to the ART state ST6 will be confirmed.

When the ending condition is met, the second section SC2 ends even in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or ART state ST6, and if the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or ART state ST6 ends accordingly, the corresponding ending condition In the game where the above is established, the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends, and the second section SC2 ends. Thereby, when the ending condition is satisfied, it becomes possible to immediately end the second section SC2.

From "Total number of game media awarded by games executed in a situation where the second section SC2 continues ("0" in a situation where no game media is given)" to "The second section SC2 continues" If the predetermined difference number is the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media used to play the game in the situation where the game is being played ("0" in the situation where the game is not being played), If the total limited net increase in the number of game media, which is the increase in the predetermined difference in the number of sheets from the predetermined standard value, exceeds the upper limit net increase (specifically, 2400 sheets), with the minimum value of , the second section SC2 ends. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing for an excessively long time. In this case, even for a game in which a replay prize has been won, it is determined whether the limited total number of net additions of game media measured by the total number of acquisitions counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net addition number of "2400". be done. As a result, even though the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d had already exceeded the upper limit net increase number "2400" in the game before the game in which the replay winning was established, due to noise etc. Even if the initialization process of section SC2 has not been executed, it is specified that the value of the total number of winnings counter 74d exceeds "2400", which is the upper limit net increase number, in subsequent games in which replay winnings were achieved. This makes it possible to perform the initialization process of the second section SC2.

If any replay winning is achieved, the processing from step S2008 to step S2012, which is the processing for updating the value of the total number of wins counter 74d, is not executed. In a game where a replay win is achieved, the gaming media owned by the player at the start of the game is used to set bets, but as a profit from the replay win, the same number of bets as the number of bets in the game where the replay win was achieved is It becomes possible to replay a new game depending on the number of bets. In other words, in a game in which a replay prize is achieved, the number of game media owned by the player does not change. In this case, in a game in which a replay winning is achieved, the processes from step S2008 to step S2012 are not executed, so that in a game where the number of game media owned by the player does not change, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d It becomes possible to omit the execution of processing for changing the , and it becomes possible to omit the execution of wasteful processing.

The second section SC2 also ends when the number of consecutive games in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games). As a result, even if it is determined that the limited total number of net additions of gaming media has reached the upper limit net addition number in a game in which a replay prize has been won, and the second section SC2 ends, the second section SC2 It is possible to make the player recognize that the end of the second section SC2 is due to the number of consecutive games in the second section SC2 reaching the upper limit number of games, and the second section SC2 ends with the game in which the replay prize is achieved. Even if this happens, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

When the start game of a new execution round of the unit execution round ST12, ST13 is started, the second random number is obtained from the second random number circuit 76 and the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed each time the first waiting period and the second waiting period elapse. This makes it possible to repeatedly execute the addition lottery process (step S3213) while using the second random number circuit 76.

Not only is the first waiting period secured as a fixed period from when the second random number is acquired once until the second random number is acquired again, but the second waiting period is secured as a period of variation. The first waiting period is set to a period equal to or longer than the period required for the second random number to be updated once in the second random number circuit 76, and is specifically set to 1.49 milliseconds, which is longer than the period required for the second random number to be updated once in the second random number circuit 76. As a result, the random number in the second random number circuit 76 is updated at least once from when the second random number is acquired once until the second random number is acquired again, and it is possible to acquire any value of the second random number in the numerical range of "0 to 255" at each acquisition timing as the second random number, even if the acquisition of the second random number is repeated in a short period of time. In addition, by securing the second waiting period as a period of variation, it is possible to prevent the acquisition timing of the second random number from being biased within the range of one cycle of the second random number in the second random number circuit 76.

The second waiting period is varied using the second random number obtained last time. This makes it possible to vary the second standby period while suppressing the complexity of the configuration.

A variation value is set based on the second random number obtained last time, and "15" is set as the number of repetitions. Then, the magnitude relationship between the variation value and the number of repetitions is determined, and the processing time of the determination process varies depending on whether an affirmative determination is made or a negative determination is made in the determination. In addition, when the magnitude relationship is determined, the value of the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1, and if the number of repetitions is not "0", the magnitude relationship between the number of repetitions after the 1 subtraction and the above-mentioned variation value is determined again. Ru. On the other hand, when the number of repetitions becomes "0", a second random number is acquired from the second random number circuit 76 and the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed. This makes it possible to vary the second waiting period by using the variation value corresponding to the second random number obtained last time and the number of times the magnitude relationship has been determined.

The maximum value of the variability value and the initial value of the number of repetitions are the same. This makes it possible for the second waiting period to be different if the variability value is different.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the combination of symbols that constitute the first CB winning is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 71(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a symbol combination that results in a first CB win and a symbol combination that results in a second CB win in this embodiment.

The combination of symbols that will win the second CB is the same as in the first embodiment, where the left reel 32L has a "white 7" symbol, the center reel 32M has a "white 7" symbol, and the right reel 32R has a "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. Five or more symbols will pass the main line ML from when the "white 7" symbol passes over the main line ML on the left reel 32L until the "white 7" symbol passes over the main line ML again. Also, five or more symbols will pass over the main line ML from when the "white 7" symbol passes over the main line ML on the center reel 32M until the "white 7" symbol passes over the main line ML again. Also, five or more symbols will pass over the main line ML from when the "BAR" symbol passes over the main line ML on the right reel 32R until the "BAR" symbol passes over the main line ML again. Therefore, depending on the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the second CB winning may not be achieved even if the second CB role is won.

On the other hand, the combination of symbols that result in the first CB prize is different from the first embodiment above, in that on the main line ML, the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. This is a combination in which the stop symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol. On the left reel 32L, the number of symbols passing through the main line ML after the "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML until the next "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML is 4 symbols or less. . In addition, on the middle reel 32M, the number of symbols that pass through the main line ML from when the "Replay" symbol passes over the main line ML until the next "Replay" symbol passes over the main line ML is 4 symbols or less. It is. Also, on the right reel 32R, the number of symbols that pass through the main line ML after the "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML until the next "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML is 4 symbols or less. It is. Therefore, when the first CB winning combination is won, the first CB winning is achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the stopping operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

Figure 71 (b) is a time chart showing the flow of the game when the first CB role or the second CB role is won. Figure 71 (b1) shows the period in which a game with a bet number of "3" is played, Figure 71 (b2) shows the period in which a game with a bet number of "2" is played, Figure 71 (b3) shows the period in which the first CB role is in a winning state, Figure 71 (b4) shows the period in which the second CB role is in a winning state, and Figure 71 (b5) shows the period in which the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is played.

First, we will explain what happens when the first CB role is won.

After the main MPU 72 executes the all-clear process (step S105), a game with the bet number of "3" is started at the timing of t1 when neither the first CB nor the second CB has been won, as shown in FIG. 71 (b1). In this case, the first CB is won at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 71 (b3). Then, at the timing of t2, the current game ends as shown in FIG. 71 (b1). In this case, the combination of symbols that wins the first CB role in the current game and establishes the first CB winning is a combination of symbols that does not cause so-called misses. Therefore, when the first CB winning is established at the timing of t2, the winning state of the first CB role is released as shown in FIG. 71 (b3), and the first CB state ST2 is started as shown in FIG. 71 (b5).

Next, we will explain what happens when the second CB role is won.

As shown in FIG. 71 (b2) at timing t3, which is a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won after the all clear process (step S105) has been executed by the main MPU 72. A game in which the number of bets is "2" is started. In this case, the second CB combination is won at the timing t3 as shown in FIG. 71(b4). After that, the game ends, but the combination of symbols that makes the 2nd CB win is a symbol combination that may cause a so-called missed win, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at the stop operation timing that does not make the 2nd CB win. As a result, the 2nd CB won't be possible. Thereafter, at timing t4, a game in which the number of bets is "2" is started as shown in FIG. Due to manipulation, the 2nd CB prize cannot be won.

Thereafter, a game in which the number of bets is "3" is started as shown in FIG. 71 (b1) at timing t5 and timing t6, respectively, in which the second CB combination has been won. However, even if the 2nd CB combination has been won, in a game where the bet number is "3", the 2nd CB prize will be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped and the timing of the stop operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44. do not. After that, at timing t7, a game in which the number of bets is "2" is started as shown in FIG. Due to manipulation, the 2nd CB prize cannot be won.

According to the above configuration, the game is played using a normal gaming method in which a game with a bet number of "2" is executed first, and the second CB combination is won, and then a game with a bet number of "3" is started. Instead, if the game was played using an unusual gaming method in which the number of bets was "3" in a situation where the 2nd CB combination had not been won, the 1st CB combination was won. The first CB winning is definitely achieved in the game and the game shifts to the first CB state ST2 which is disadvantageous for the player. As a result, even if an attempt is made to illegally obtain an illegal profit by playing a game where the number of bets is "3" after executing the all-clear process (step S105), a transition to the first CB state ST2 occurs. Therefore, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the fraudster to obtain illegal profits.

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration for displaying the non-internal notification image G12 displayed on the image display device 63 when neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won, and the first internally explicit image G13 displayed on the image display device 63 when the first CB role is won, is different from that of the first embodiment. Below, the configurations different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing internal notification switching control processing executed by the production side MPU 92. The internal notification switching control process is repeatedly executed by the production side MPU 92 at relatively short cycles (for example, 4 millisecond cycles).

First, it is determined whether an internal notification permission operation has occurred (step S3601). In this embodiment, a notification permission switch is provided in the performance control device 90 mounted on the back of the front door 12, and the notification permission switch is provided to release the locked state of the front door 12 with respect to the housing 11 and move the front door 12 in front of the slot machine 10. By opening the switch, the notification permission switch can be operated. Then, if the notification permission switch is operated to the ON position, an affirmative determination is made in step S3601. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3601, the internal notification permission flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3602). When the permission flag for internal notification is set to "1," the non-internal notification image G12 and the first internal explicit image G13 can be displayed on the image display device 63.

In the internal notification switching control process, it is determined whether an internal notification prohibition operation has occurred (step S3603). Specifically, it is determined whether the notification permission switch provided in the production control device 90 is operated to the OFF position. Then, if the notification permission switch is operated to the OFF position, an affirmative determination is made in step S3603. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3603, the internal notification permission flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3604). When the value of the permission flag for internal notification is "0", the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63 even in a situation where neither the 1st CB combination nor the 2nd CB combination has been won. Therefore, even in a situation where the first CB combination is won, the first internal explicit image G13 is not displayed on the image display device 63.

According to the above configuration, the non-internal notification image G12 or the first internal clear image G13 can be displayed on the image display device 63 depending on the winning state of each CB combination, and the non-internal notification image G13 can be displayed on the image display device 63 depending on the winning state of each CB combination It becomes possible for the administrator of the gaming hall to switch between the situation in which the notification image G12 and the first internal explicit image G13 are not displayed on the image display device 63. As a result, the administrator of the gaming hall can grasp the winning status of each CB combination by displaying the non-internal notification image G12 or the first internal clear image G13, while preventing cheaters and players from receiving information about each CB combination. It becomes possible to prevent the non-internal notification image G12 and the first internal clear image G13 from being displayed regardless of the winning state.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when transitioning to the termination preparation state ST7, the transition to the normal gaming state ST1 occurs after the termination preparation state ST7 ends, regardless of the game content of the game executed in the termination preparation state ST7. However, in the present embodiment, in the end preparation state ST7 transferred from the ART state ST6, the ART state ST6 can be restored depending on the game content of the game executed in the end preparation state ST7. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 73 is a flowchart showing the end preparation state processing executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the end preparation state processing is executed in the response processing at the time of game end in the end preparation state ST7 (Figure 26).

If the lottery process for the role in the current game (FIG. 16) has selected any of the index values IV = 5 to 10 (step S3701: YES), an ART revival lottery process is executed (step S3702). In the ART revival lottery process, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to revive from the end preparation state ST7 to the ART state ST6. In this case, if the lottery process for the role in the current game (FIG. 16) has selected an index value IV with a low probability of winning, the probability of winning an ART revival in the ART revival lottery process is higher.

If the result of the ART restoration lottery process is an ART restoration win (step S3703: YES), a continuation setting process for the ART state ST6 is executed (step S3704). In the continuation setting process, if the gaming state before shifting to the end preparation state ST7 is the first unit execution time ST12 of the ART state ST6, a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is generated. If the gaming state before transitioning to the end preparation state ST7 is the second unit execution time ST13 of the ART state ST6, a new execution time of the second unit execution time ST13 is generated. Execute the process. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and may be configured to transition to the start period ST11 when returning to the ART state ST6, regardless of the gaming state before transitioning to the termination preparation state ST7.

Thereafter, an ART restoration command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S3705). As a result, the performance side MPU 92 turns on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that after the performance indicating that the ART state ST6 has been restored, the performance corresponding to the destination gaming state is executed. Control.

According to the above configuration, even if the ART state ST6 ends and shifts to the end preparation state ST7 without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being satisfied, the game content of the game executed in the end preparation state ST7 is It may return to ART state ST6. This makes it possible to maintain the player's sense of anticipation even in the end preparation state ST7.

Fifth embodiment
In this embodiment, the execution contents of the loop lottery process are different from those of the first embodiment. The following describes the configurations that are different from those of the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configurations as those of the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. In the timer interrupt process, a loop lottery process is executed in step S3806. That is, in this embodiment, the loop lottery process is executed by a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (specifically, every 1.49 milliseconds). Note that the processing contents of steps S3801 to S3805 and steps S3807 to S3815 are the same as the processing contents of steps S201 to S214 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment.

Figure 75 is a flowchart showing the loop lottery process executed in step S3806 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 74).

First, it is determined whether the completion flag of the loop lottery provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3901). The loop lottery process is a process for determining the initial number of games at the start of a game in which a new execution of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 in the ART state ST6 is started, as in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the initial number of games for the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is set to 29 to 32 games, and the number of times that the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed in the loop lottery process (Figure 65) is a maximum of 3 times. In contrast, in this embodiment, the initial number of games for the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is set to 29 to 1029 games, so the number of times that the addition lottery process (step S3911) is executed in response to the start of a new execution of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is a maximum of 1000 times. The loop lottery process (Figure 75) is executed once each time the timer interrupt process (Figure 74) is started, and the addition lottery process (step S3911) is executed once for each execution of the loop lottery process (Figure 75).

The completion flag of the loop lottery is used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the execution of the addition lottery process (step S3911) triggered by the start of a new execution of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 has been completed. This is a flag for At the timing when the new execution times of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are started, the value of the loop lottery completion flag is "0", indicating that the new execution times of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 have started. If the execution of the additional lottery process (step S3911) triggered by has been completed, that is, if the additional lottery process (step S3911) did not result in an additional win, or the number of executions of the additional lottery process (step S3911) has ended. When the standard number is reached, the loop lottery completion flag is set to "1". If the completion flag of the loop lottery is set to "1" (step S3901: YES), there is no need to execute the addition lottery process (step S3911), so the main loop lottery process is ended as is.

If the loop lottery completion flag is not set to "1" (step S3901: NO), it is determined whether this is the start game of a new execution of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 (step S3902). . If an affirmative determination is made in step S3902, a second waiting period is generated in steps S3903 to S3908 before the process (step S3909) of acquiring the second random number used when executing the addition lottery process (step S3910). Execute the process to make it happen.

In the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) in the first embodiment, when the second random number is repeatedly acquired, the first and second waiting periods are set as a period during which the second random number is forcibly waited from when the second random number is acquired once until the second random number is acquired next. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is executed once each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) is started once, and the addition lottery process (step S3911) is executed once for each execution of the loop lottery process (FIG. 75). Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) is started at a cycle of 1.49 milliseconds, a waiting period of at least the start cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) occurs from when the second random number is acquired once until the second random number is acquired next. This period corresponds to the first waiting period in the first embodiment. In other words, since the first waiting period is secured by the start cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74), there is no need to execute a process for securing the first waiting period in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75). The startup period of the timer interrupt process (Figure 74), 1.49 milliseconds, is longer than the period required for the second random number circuit 76 to complete one cycle of updating the second random number.

The process (steps S3903 to S3908) for generating the second waiting period in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is the process for generating the second waiting period in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) in the first embodiment. This is the same as the processing (steps S3205 to S3210). Specifically, the number of repetitions, ie, "15", is set in the repetition number counter 74g (see FIG. 9) of the main side RAM 74 (step S3903). In the loop lottery process (FIG. 75), as already explained, the second random number can be repeatedly obtained from the second random number circuit 76. When the second random number is repeatedly obtained, the first waiting period (timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 74 ) is not only ensured, but also a second standby period is ensured as a period of fluctuation. Even if this second waiting period reaches its maximum value, it is shorter than the first waiting period, more specifically, shorter than the first waiting period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second waiting period may be the same as the first waiting period, the second waiting period may be longer than the first waiting period, and the second waiting period may be longer than the first waiting period. The standby period may always be longer than the first standby period.

Then, the second random number acquired in the previous step S3910 is read from the second random number acquisition area of the main RAM 74 (step S3904). After the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the second random number acquisition area stores a second random number with a decimal value of "0". Then, the lowest 4 bits of the 8-bit second random number read in step S3904 are stored in a register of the main MPU 72 as a variation value (step S3905). In this case, the variation value is 4-bit numerical information, and therefore has a minimum value of "0" and a maximum value of "15".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the variation value stored in the register of the main side MPU 72 is smaller than the value of the repetition number counter 74g of the main side RAM 74 (step S3906). If the variation value is smaller than the value of the repetition counter 74g (step S3906: YES), the process proceeds to step S3907 with the JUMP command, and if the variation value is greater than or equal to the value of the repetition number counter 74g (step S3906 :NO), the process proceeds to step S3907 by the NOP command. In step S3907, the value of the repetition counter 74g is subtracted by 1. Then, if the value of the repetition number counter 74g after subtracting 1 is 1 or more (step S3908: NO), the process returns to step S3906, and if the value of the repetition number counter 74g after subtracting 1 is "0" ( Step S3908: YES), the process advances to step S3909.

As described above, regardless of whether an affirmative determination is made in step S3906 or a negative determination is made in step S3906, the process proceeds to step S3907. If this is executed, the processing time required to proceed to step S3907 is approximately 10 microseconds longer. As described above, depending on whether the variation value determined as the lower 4 bits of the second random number obtained last time is smaller than the value of the repetition counter 74g, the JUMP instruction is executed or the NOP instruction is executed. There are cases where it is executed. Furthermore, each time the process of step S3907 is executed, the value of the repetition count counter 74g is subtracted by 1, and the processes of step S3906 and step S3907 are repeated until the value of the repetition count counter 74g after subtraction by 1 becomes "0". . As a result, the ratio of the number of times the JUMP instruction is executed in step S3906 to the number of times the NOP instruction is executed in step S3906 out of the 15 repetition times is determined by the value of the lower 4 bits of the second random number obtained last time. As a result, it is possible to vary the second waiting period.

In step S3909, the value of the lottery execution counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by one. The lottery execution counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the addition lottery process (step S3911) has been executed in the current starting game in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13.

Thereafter, the second random number at that point is acquired from the second random number circuit 76 and stored in the second random number acquisition area of the main side RAM 74 (step S3910). After that, an additional lottery process is executed (step S3911). In the addition lottery process, the addition lottery table stored in the main side ROM 73 in advance is read out, and the second random number is checked against the read addition lottery table, so that the second random number is set in the addition lottery table. Determine whether it matches the numerical information. Only one additional lottery table is provided, and the winning numerical information is set so that the probability of winning an additional lottery in the additive lottery process is 60%. Here, although the configuration is such that the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game does not affect the additive lottery process, the present invention is not limited to this, and the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is ) may be set in correspondence with the type of index value IV that can result in a win, so that the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game may have an influence on the additional lottery process.

If the additional lottery process (step S3911) does not result in an additional win (step S3912: NO), the loop lottery completion flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3915), and then the main loop lottery process is executed. finish. As a result, the loop lottery process for this new execution of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is completed. Note that the completion flag of the loop lottery is cleared to "0" when the final game of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, which is the execution target to be started this time, ends.

If an addition win occurs in the addition lottery process (step S3911) (step S3912: YES), the value of the initial addition counter in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S3913). Then, it is determined whether the value of the lottery execution counter in the main RAM 74 is the termination reference number of "1000" (step S3914). As already explained, since the initial number of games in the unit execution times ST12, ST13 in this embodiment is 29 games to 1029 games, the maximum number of games that can be added as the initial number of games in the loop lottery process (Figure 75) is 1000 games, and the maximum number of times the addition lottery process (step S3911) can be executed is 1000 times. If the value of the lottery execution counter is "1000" (step S3914: YES), this means that the number of times the addition lottery process (step S3911) has been executed in the current start game in the new execution of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 has reached the maximum value of 1000, so the loop lottery completion flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3915), and then this loop lottery process is terminated.

If the value of the lottery execution counter has not reached "1000" (step S3914: NO), it is determined whether the value of the lottery execution counter has reached "500", which is the intermediate start reference number (step S3916). . If the value of the lottery execution counter has reached "500" which is the intermediate start reference number (step S3916: YES), the loop lottery continuation flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3917). .

In this embodiment, as already explained, the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is executed once every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) is started, and for each execution of the loop lottery process (FIG. 75). The addition lottery process (step S3911) is executed once. Since the timer interrupt processing (Fig. 74) is activated at a cycle of 1.49 milliseconds, at least the timer interrupt processing (Fig. 74) is activated after the second random number is obtained once and before the second random number is obtained the next time. A waiting period equal to the startup cycle occurs. In this case, at least 1.49 seconds are required for the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) to reach 1000 times, which is the end reference number. In this case, in the starting game in the new execution times of unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated until the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) reaches 1000 times, which is the end reference number. If the configuration is such that the player waits for the start of the starting game, the time required for the starting game to end becomes correspondingly longer.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) reaches 500 times, which is the intermediate start reference number, "1" is set to the loop lottery continuation flag in the main side RAM 74. By making it possible to proceed to the process of starting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, even if the addition lottery process (step S3911) in the new execution times of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is not completed, Even then, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started. This makes it possible to prevent the waiting time for the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from becoming excessively long.

Even after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has started as described above, the result of the addition lottery process (step S3911) is a negative result, or the value of the lottery execution counter is ``1000'' which is the end reference number. '', the addition lottery process (step S3911) is executed every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) is activated and the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is executed. Then, after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has started, new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are added, including the number of games awarded by becoming an additional winning in the addition lottery process (step S3911). The initial number of games is set. This makes it possible to provide a large number of games as the initial number of games while preventing the waiting time for the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from becoming excessively long.

The difference between the end reference number "1000" and the intermediate start reference number "500" is "500". The longest time expected for the addition lottery process (step S3911) to be executed 500 times is about 1.8 seconds based on the activation cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) and the second waiting period. becomes. On the other hand, the minimum time expected from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to the completion of stopping of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is 2 seconds. Therefore, even if the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be started in a situation where the addition lottery process (step S3911) in the new execution times of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is not completed, even if the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be started, , ST13, the addition lottery process (step S3911) in the new execution times of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 will be surely completed by the time the starting game of the new execution times of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 ends.

Figure 76 is a flow chart showing the start processing for the current set in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72. Note that in the first embodiment, the start processing for the current set (Figure 68) is configured to be executed in the start game of a new execution in the first unit execution ST12 or the second unit execution ST13, but in this embodiment, the start processing for the current set (Figure 76) is executed in the start game of a new execution in the first unit execution ST12 or the second unit execution ST13 and the next game.

If this is the start game of a new run in unit run times ST12 and ST13 (step S4001: YES), it is determined whether the loop lottery continuation flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" ( Step S4002). If the loop lottery continuation flag is not set to "1" (step S4002: NO), it is determined whether the loop lottery completion flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4003). If a negative determination is made in both step S4002 and step S4003, it means that the result of the addition lottery process (step S3911) for the current execution has not yet been a negative result, and the addition lottery process (step S3911) is executed. This means that the number of times has not yet reached the intermediate start reference number. In this case, the processing in steps S4002 and S4003 is repeated.

If the result of the addition lottery process (step S3911) for the current execution is a losing result, the completion flag of the loop lottery in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and a positive judgment is made in step S4003, and the process proceeds to step S4004. In step S4004, the ART continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is set to "29", which is the minimum value of the initial number of games.

Thereafter, the value of the initial addition counter of the main side RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S4005). The initial addition counter is set with the number of games added to the initial number of games selected in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) executed when the current game is started. Note that after executing the process in step S4005, the value of the initial addition counter is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, by determining whether the value of the completion counter in the main side RAM 74 is 11 or less, it is determined whether the current status is the first unit execution time ST12 (step S4006). If the current state is the first unit execution time ST12 (step S4006: YES), the value of the addition counter 74h of the main side RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S4007). Thereafter, the value of the addition counter 74h is cleared to "0" (step S4008).

The number of add-on games selected in the next set of add-on processing (FIG. 67) executed in the game in which the previous execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 is started is set in the add-on counter 74h. Therefore, when the first unit execution time ST12 is continued and a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is started, the first unit execution time ST12 is started at the beginning of the first unit execution time ST12 in the newly started execution time. On the condition that the number of additional games above is selected, the selected number of one or more additional games is added to the initial number of games of the newly started first unit execution time ST12.

When a negative determination is made in step S4006, or when the process in step S4008 is executed, a start command for unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S4008). Thereby, the effect-side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the start of a new execution time of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. In this case, the number of consecutive games (that is, the value set in the ART continuation counter) in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is displayed on the image display device 63. In this display, the initial number of games is first reported, and then, if the number of additional games exists, the number of additional games is notified.

On the other hand, if the number of times the addition lottery process (step S3911) has been executed reaches 500 times, which is the intermediate start reference number, the continuation flag for the loop lottery in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and a positive judgment is made in step S4002, and the process proceeds to step S4010. In step S4010, the ART continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is set to "29", which is the minimum value of the initial number of games.

Thereafter, by determining whether the value of the completion counter in the main side RAM 74 is 11 or less, it is determined whether the current status is the first unit execution time ST12 (step S4011). If the current state is the first unit execution time ST12 (step S4011: YES), the value of the addition counter 74h of the main side RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S4012). Thereafter, the value of the additional counter 74h is cleared to "0" (step S4013).

If a negative judgment is made in step S4011, or if the processing of step S4013 is executed, a start command for the unit execution times ST12, ST13 is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S4014). As a result, the presentation side MPU 92 causes the presentation corresponding to the start of a new execution of the unit execution times ST12, ST13 to be executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. In this case, the provisional number of continued games (i.e., the value set in the ART continuation counter) for the new execution of the unit execution times ST12, ST13 is displayed on the image display device 63.

As described above, the number of executions of the additional lottery process (step S3911) reaches 500 times, which is the intermediate start reference number, even if the additional lottery process (step S3911) in the current execution time is not completed. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating, the value of the initial addition counter is not added to the initial number of games. The addition of the value of the initial addition counter is performed in the next game with respect to the starting game in the current execution time.

Specifically, if it is the second game in the current execution (step S4015: YES), the loop lottery continuation flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4016: YES). ), the value of the initial addition counter of the main side RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S4017). The initial addition counter is set to the number of games added to the initial number of games selected in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) executed in the start game of the current execution. Note that after executing the process in step S4017, the value of the initial addition counter is cleared to "0".

Then, an addition command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92, which contains information about the number of games to be added to the initial number of games (step S4018). As a result, the presentation side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to display an indication that the number of games to be continued in this execution will increase by the above-mentioned added number of games. Then, the number of games to be continued after this increase is displayed on the image display device 63.

As described above, the number of executions of the additional lottery process (step S3911) reaches 500 times, which is the intermediate start reference number, even if the additional lottery process (step S3911) in the current execution time is not completed. When the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the start game of a new run of unit run times ST12 and ST13 is started, the above-mentioned addition lottery process (step S3911) is performed in the next game for the start game. ) will be notified that the additional number of games resulting from the execution has been given as the number of consecutive games for the current execution. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the situations in which the number of consecutive games is reported in a situation where the additional number of games is given, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In particular, when the number of times the addition lottery process (step S3911) has been executed reaches 500 times, which is the mid-start reference number, a notification is issued that the additional number of games will be awarded in the next game for the start game of the new execution round. This means that when the additional number of games is awarded in the next game for the start game of the new execution round, a large number of games, such as 500 games or more, will be awarded, making it possible to increase the player's attention to the notification that the additional number of games will be awarded in the next game for the start game of the new execution round.

In the above embodiment, when the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) in the loop lottery process (Figure 75) reaches the mid-start reference number when the periodic execution of the addition lottery process has not been completed, the initial number of games is notified in the start game of the unit execution cycle ST12, ST13 that the initial number of games is 29, and then the number of games added to the initial number of games is notified in the next game. However, this is not limited to this, and when the number of executions of the addition lottery process reaches the mid-start reference number, the initial number of games including the number of games added at that time may be notified in the start game, and the remaining number of games added may be notified in the next game.

The end reference number is not limited to "1000" and may be a value smaller than "1000" or a value larger than "1000". If it is a value larger than "1000", the start game of a new execution round of the unit execution round ST12, ST13 may end in a situation where the periodic execution of the addition lottery process (step S3911) in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is not completed. In this case, multiple games may be executed in a situation where the periodic execution of the addition lottery process in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is not completed. In this configuration, the notification of the increase in the initial number of games due to the addition lottery process may be performed in a game that is started after the periodic execution of the addition lottery process is completed, as in the above embodiment. Also, at the start of each game that is started in a situation where the periodic execution of the addition lottery process is not completed, the increase in the initial number of games determined in the game immediately before the game may be notified.

Further, in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75), a configuration may be adopted in which the processes of steps S3903 to S3908 are not executed. In this case, the second waiting period will not be measured. Therefore, the addition lottery process (step S3911) is executed at the interrupt cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74).

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the contents of the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention. For example, the following modifications may be made. The configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually to the configurations of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied in combination. The configurations of the above-described embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually or in combination with each other to a configuration in which the configurations of the above-described embodiments are combined with each other.

(1) Although the first predetermined number is "3" and the second predetermined number is "2", the specific values of the first and second predetermined numbers are arbitrary. In addition, the configuration is not limited to the first predetermined number being a number greater than the second predetermined number, and the first predetermined number may be a number less than the second predetermined number.

(2) Although the first CB state ST2 is a gaming state in which the amount of gaming media owned by the player is decreased, it may also be a gaming state in which the number of gaming media owned by the player is not increased or decreased. It is also possible to configure a game state in which the number of game media to be played can be increased, but the increase in the number of media is extremely small, such as one or two.

In addition, in a game executed in the first CB state ST2, the number of gaming media awarded in that game may be greater than the number of bets set to start that game (specifically, "3"), but due to the low probability of winning the combination that allows for the awarding of those gaming media, the first CB state ST2 as a whole may be configured to not increase or decrease the gaming media owned by the player, or to decrease the gaming media owned by the player.

(3) Although the second CB state ST3 is a gaming state in which the amount of gaming media owned by the player is decreased, it may also be a gaming state in which the number of gaming media owned by the player is not increased or decreased. A game state may be configured in which the number of game media owned by the player can be increased, but the increase in number is extremely small, such as one or two, and the game state can increase the number of game media owned by the player to a certain extent. A configuration may also be used.

In addition, in the game executed in the second CB state ST3, the number of game media awarded in the game is greater than the number of bets set to start the game (specifically, "2"). However, due to the low winning probability of the winning combination that allows the awarding of the game media, the overall number of game media owned by the player is not increased or decreased in the second CB state ST3, or the game media owned by the player is not increased or decreased. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the amount of energy is reduced.

(4) If the CB state ST2 or ST3 is entered in the middle of the ART state ST6, the ART state ST6 is temporarily interrupted, and the number of games executed in the CB state ST2 or ST3 is calculated from the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6. Although the configuration is such that the number of games executed in the CB state ST2 or ST3 is changed to the CB state ST2 or ST3 in the middle of the ART state ST6, the number of games executed in the CB state ST2 or ST3 is not limited to this. It may also be configured to be subtracted from the remaining number of consecutive games. This makes it possible to increase the disadvantage of transitioning to the CB states ST2 and ST3 in the middle of the ART state ST6. Further, the configuration may also be applied to a case where the CB state ST2 or ST3 is entered in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST5.

(5) In the third embodiment described above, the internal notification permission flag in the performance side RAM 94 may be set to "1" when the front door 12 is in the open state, and the internal notification permission flag in the performance side RAM 94 may be cleared to "0" when the front door 12 is in the closed state. In this case, it is possible to display the non-internal notification image G12 and the first internal indication image G13 on the image display device 63 simply by operating the front door 12 to open.

(6) In the third embodiment, when a specific effect button provided on the front of the front door 12 is continuously pressed for a specific period (e.g., 5 seconds), the internal notification permission flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1", and the internal notification permission flag in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" by operating an operation unit other than the specific effect button. In this case, it is possible to switch between a state in which the non-internal notification image G12 and the first internal indication image G13 are displayed on the image display device 63 and a state in which these images G12, G13 are not displayed, simply by continuously pressing the specific effect button without the need to open the front door 12.

(7) A configuration may be adopted in which notification regarding the winning state of at least one of the first CB combination and the second CB combination is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (step S106) is being executed. For example, if the setting value update process (step S106) is executed in a situation where the second CB winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74, a notification indicating that the second CB winning combination has not been won is displayed on the image display device 63. It may also be configured to be executed. By configuring the notification to end when the setting value update process (step S106) is finished, the period during which the notification is executed is limited to the period during which the setting value update process (step S106) is being executed. It becomes possible to do so. For example, if the setting value update process (step S106) is executed in a situation where the first CB combination winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, the image display device 63 indicates that the first CB combination has been won. A configuration may also be adopted in which notification is executed. By configuring the notification to end when the setting value update process (step S106) is finished, the period during which the notification is executed is limited to the period during which the setting value update process (step S106) is being executed. It becomes possible to do so.

(8) In a situation where the second CB combination has not been won, the image display device 63 may display a procedure for achieving the winning state of the second CB combination. In this case, if you have not won either the 1st CB role or the 2nd CB role, you can win the 2nd CB role by running a game where the bet number is "2", and you can also win the 2nd CB role in the winning game. Without winning a prize, it is notified that a game with a bet number of "3" should be executed thereafter. In addition, if you have won the 1st CB combination, by executing a game where the number of bets is "3", you can make the 1st CB win and move to the 1st CB state ST2, and also finish the 1st CB state ST2. What should be done will be announced. Then, when the first CB state ST2 is exhausted, by executing a game where the number of bets is "2", the second CB combination is won, and the second CB prize is not established in the winning game. Furthermore, it is notified that a game with a bet number of "3" should be executed thereafter. This makes it possible to encourage the player to enter a situation where he or she has won the second CB combination. In addition, by applying the configuration to the configuration of the third embodiment or the configurations (5) to (7) above, the management of the game hall can promote the situation where the second CB combination is won. This makes it possible to limit the number of users.

(9) In a situation where the second CB role has not been won but the second CB role is won and the second CB winning is not established, a notification may be executed to indicate that the second CB role has been won. For example, the notification may be an alarm sound such as "Completed" that is output from the speaker 62.

(10) If a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in a situation where the second CB combination is won, a corresponding notification may be executed on the image display device 63. For example, as the notification, the display image of the image display device 63 may be displayed darker than before. Furthermore, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in a situation where the first CB combination is won, a corresponding notification may be executed on the image display device 63. For example, as the notification, the display image of the image display device 63 may be displayed darker than before.

(11) If the number of bets becomes "2" when the second CB role has been won, an invalid period for operation of the start lever 41 may occur afterwards. The invalid period is arbitrary, but may be, for example, 10 seconds. In this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a game with the number of bets "2" will be executed even if the second CB role has already been won. In addition, during this invalid period, a notification indicating that the second CB role has already been won may be issued by the speaker 62 or the image display device 63, and the notification may be issued in response to the operation of the start lever 41 during the invalid period.

(12) When a game is started in the first section SC1, a decision is made to transition to the second section SC2 at the start of the game and a transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the start of the game, but this is not limited to the above. A decision to transition to the second section SC2 may be made at the start of the game and a transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the end of the game. A decision to transition to the second section SC2 may also be made at the end of the game and a transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the end of the game. In this case, it is possible to increase the number of games played in the first section SC1.

(13) The configuration is such that if any winning combination is won in the winning combination processing (FIG. 16) in the game executed in the first period SC1, the transition to the second period SC2 will definitely occur. It is not limited to this, and if you win a winning combination that has a different winning probability depending on the setting value of "1" to "6", the transition to the second section SC2 will not occur, and the winning probability will vary depending on the setting value of "1" to "6". A configuration may be adopted in which a transition to the second section SC2 occurs when a combination with no difference in winning probability is won depending on the set value of "6". This makes it possible to prevent the frequency of transition to the second section SC2 from being advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the set value. In addition, if you win a winning combination with no difference in winning probability depending on the setting values of "1" to "6", the transition to the second section SC2 will not occur, but depending on the setting values of "1" to "6". A configuration may also be adopted in which a shift to the second section SC2 occurs when winning combinations with different winning probabilities. Thereby, it becomes possible to easily make the transition frequency to the second section SC2 more advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the set value.

(14) When the game is executed in the first section SC1, a transition to the second section SC2 may occur regardless of the winning combination processing (FIG. 16). This allows the transition to the second section SC2 to occur early.

(15) When the game is executed in the first section SC1, a lottery process to move to the second section SC2 is executed, and if a player wins in the transfer lottery process, a transfer to the second section SC2 occurs. It may also be a configuration. This makes it possible to adjust the ease of transition to the second section SC2 according to the probability of winning the transition. Further, the probability of winning a transition prize in the transition lottery process may be configured to vary depending on the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), or may be configured not to vary. In the case of a structure that changes depending on the result of the winning combination lottery process (Fig. 16), the transition to the second section SC2 occurs when an index value IV with a low winning probability is won in the winning combination lottery process (Fig. 16). By increasing the probability of winning, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low probability of winning in the lottery process (FIG. 16). Furthermore, if no index value IV is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the transition lottery process may not be executed.

(16) If a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, a shift to the second section SC2 may occur, while if a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the transition to the second section SC2 may occur. Although the configuration is such that the transition to section SC2 does not occur, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the transition to the second section SC2 will occur. It may also be configured to obtain. In this case, the probability of transition to the second section SC2 is the same or approximately the same when a game where the number of bets is "3" is executed and when a game where the number of bets is "2" is executed. A configuration may also be used. Furthermore, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, the probability of transition to the second section SC2 is higher than when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed. It may also be a configuration. Furthermore, when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, the probability of transition to the second section SC2 is higher than when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed. It may also be a configuration.

(17) When a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, a transition to an advantageous gaming state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6) may occur, while the number of bets is "2". '' is executed, the transition to an advantageous gaming state does not occur. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game in which the number of bets is ``2'' is executed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a transition to an advantageous gaming state can occur even when the game is played. In this case, the probability of transition to an advantageous gaming state is the same or almost the same when a game where the number of bets is ``3'' is executed and when a game where the number of bets is ``2'' is executed. A certain configuration may also be used. In addition, when a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the probability of transition to an advantageous gaming state is higher than when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed. You can also use it as Additionally, the probability of transition to an advantageous gaming state is higher when a game where the number of bets is ``2'' is executed than when a game where the number of bets is ``3'' is executed. You can also use it as

(18) The currently set setting value may be confirmed by executing a setting confirmation process based on a setting confirmation operation performed by the manager of the game hall. For example, the setting confirmation process may be executed by inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turning it ON when operating power is supplied to the main MPU 72, and the currently set setting value may be displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 when the setting confirmation process is executed. In this configuration, a partial clear process (step S104) may be executed when the setting confirmation process is executed. When the partial clear process is executed, the first CB winning data is erased, but the second CB winning data and the setting value information are not erased. This makes it possible to confirm the currently set setting value while preventing the second CB winning data from being erased.

(19) In the partial clearing process (step S104), it is not limited to the second CB winning data that is excluded from the information to be deleted, and the intrusion abnormality flag of the main side RAM 74 may also be excluded. . As a result, even if the power is temporarily turned off after the intrusion abnormality notification is started, and the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed when the power is turned on afterwards, the intrusion abnormality notification will not be restarted. Become. In this case, in order to prevent the intrusion abnormality notification from being restarted, it is necessary to execute the all clear process (step S105), and if the all clear process (step S105) is executed, the second CB is elected. The data will be deleted.

(20) If the intrusion abnormality flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", the subsequent progress of the game may be prevented. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being continued even though an intrusion abnormality has occurred.

(21) A configuration in which, when the partial clear process (step S104) is executed, predetermined information is left while other information is erased may be applied to a slot machine having multiple RT states. For example, in a configuration in which, when a specific number of games are executed without transitioning to a state advantageous to the player, the state transitions to a ceiling RT state in which the probability of winning a replay and winning a replay is higher than before, and, when a predetermined role is won in the role lottery process (FIG. 16), the state transitions to a predetermined RT state in which the probability of winning a replay and winning a replay is higher than before, when the partial clear process (step S104) is executed, the flag indicating that the state is the ceiling RT state is not cleared to "0", but the flag indicating that the state is the predetermined RT state is cleared to "0". In this case, the setting value update process (step S106) is executed, so that the ceiling RT state can be continued as it is even when the partial clear process (step S104) is executed. Also, even in this configuration, when the full clear process (step S105) is executed, both the flag indicating that the state is the ceiling RT state and the flag indicating that the state is the predetermined RT state may be cleared to "0".

(22) A configuration may be used in which the transition to the second section SC2 can occur on the condition that the second CB combination is won, or a pseudo A configuration may be adopted in which transition to the bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 can occur. In this case, it becomes possible to increase the importance of achieving the winning state of the second CB combination.

In addition, the configuration may be such that when the first CB role is won, the transition to the second section SC2 does not occur, and when the first CB role is won, the configuration may be such that even in the second section SC2, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 does not occur. In this case, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of entering the winning state of the first CB role.

(23) As the lottery mode, the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode are set so that the probabilities of winning a replay prize are different, but it is also possible to have a configuration in which these lottery modes are not set. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the AT state exists instead of the ART state ST6 as a gaming state advantageous to the player. In this configuration, since there is no need to shift to the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST5, the normal gaming state ST1 directly shifts to the pseudo bonus state ST5. Furthermore, when transitioning from the normal gaming state ST1 to the AT state, it is sufficient to directly shift from the normal gaming state ST1 to the AT state, and there is no need to intervene in the preparation state ST4. In this configuration, the preparation state ST4 does not exist, so in mode A of the second section SC2, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the AT state is 761 games, and in mode B of the second section SC2, the minimum value is 761 games. In the case where the state occurs only once, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the AT state is 842 games, and in the C mode of the second section SC2, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the AT state is 842 games. That's 956 games. In this case, in the AT state, the start period ST11, the first unit execution time ST12, and the second unit execution time ST13 are executed as in the ART state ST6, and the first unit execution time in the AT state is By setting 170 games as the maximum number of games in the total number of additional games that occur in the round ST12, it is possible to leave room for the second unit execution round ST13 to occur.

(24) In the non-winning state of the 1st CB role and the 2nd CB role, the lottery mode becomes the non-internal medium mode, and in the winning state of the 1st CB role or the winning state of the 2nd CB role, the lottery mode becomes the internal medium mode. Good too. In this case, the internal medium mode is configured to be a mode in which the winning probability of the replay combination and the replay winning probability are higher than the non-internal medium mode. In addition, if the transition condition is satisfied based on the result of lottery processing of winning combinations in the internal medium mode, the non-AT state will transition to the AT state, and if the number of games played in the AT state reaches a predetermined number of games or AT It is configured to shift to a non-AT state when a predetermined end-corresponding winning is achieved in the state.

In addition, in the winning state of the first CB role or the winning state of the second CB role, the lottery mode may be either the first internal mid-time RT mode or the second internal mid-time RT mode. In this case, the second internal mid-time RT mode is configured to be a mode in which the winning probability of the replay role and the probability of winning a replay are higher than the first internal mid-time RT mode. In addition, in the first internal mid-time RT mode, if the transition condition is established based on the result of the role lottery process, the mode transitions to the second internal mid-time RT mode, and in the second internal mid-time RT mode, if the number of games played reaches a predetermined number of games, the mode transitions to the first internal mid-time RT mode. In addition, while the first internal mid-time RT mode does not enter an AT state, the second internal mid-time RT mode enters an AT state.

(25) Although the present embodiment has three types of stay modes, namely, A mode, B mode, and C mode, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may have two types of stay modes, or may have four or more types of stay modes.

(26) In mode B of the stay mode, the number of ceiling games for the first time and the number of ceiling games for the second time are set, but it may also be configured that the number of ceiling games for the third time is further set. , the number of ceiling games for the fourth time may be further set. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of ceiling games from the second time onward is set regardless of the type of stay mode.

(27) In the case of B mode, when the first advantageous gaming state (pseudo-bonus state ST5 or ART state ST6) is ended, the second ceiling game number is definitely set. There is no limitation, and when the first advantageous gaming state ends, the setting lottery process is executed, and when the setting lottery process results in a set winning (for example, 50% probability), the second ceiling game number is set. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

(28) Although a period during which the section display unit 67 is off may occur even in the second section SC2, this is not limited thereto, and the section display unit 67 may be reliably configured to be on when it is in the second section SC2.

(29) An advantageous display section is provided separately from the section display section 67, so that the section display section 67 is always turned on when the second section SC2 is on, and the section display section 67 is always lit when the section is the first section SC1. is turned off, and when in an advantageous gaming state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6), the advantageous display section is always turned on, and when not in an advantageous gaming state, the advantageous display section is always turned on. A configuration may be adopted in which the light is turned off.

(30) In B mode, when the first advantageous gaming state ends and the state shifts to the normal gaming state, the section display section 67 temporarily turns off, and when the state shifts to the advantageous gaming state after that, the section display section 67 turns off. A configuration may also be adopted in which the light is turned on again.

(31) Although the maximum number of games is set to the total number of games of the number of added games that can occur in the first unit execution ST12, multiple groups may be set as the number of times the first unit execution ST12 is executed, and the maximum number of games may be set for each of these groups. For example, the first to fourth times of the first unit execution ST12 are set as the first group, the fifth to eighth times of the first unit execution ST12 are set as the second group, and the ninth to twelfth times of the first unit execution ST12 are set as the third group, and the maximum number of games for each of these first, second, and third groups is set to 60 games. This makes it easier to award the number of added games even in later executions of the first unit execution ST12. In addition, in this configuration, if the total number of games of the number of added games in the first group does not reach the maximum number of games, the remaining maximum number of games may be added to the maximum number of games in the second group, and if the total number of games of the number of added games in the second group does not reach the maximum number of games, the remaining maximum number of games may be added to the maximum number of games in the third group.

(32) The timing at which the number of additional games to be added to the initial number of games in the first unit execution time ST12 is determined is not limited to the start of the start game of the immediately preceding execution time, but at the end of the start game. The game may be a later game than the starting game of the immediately preceding run. However, by determining the number of additional games that can occur next to the current execution at a timing before the final game of the previous execution, the number of additional games that can occur next to the current execution It becomes possible to execute a continuous performance with the performance content corresponding to the number of additional games.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to determining the number of additional games for the execution that may be executed after the first unit execution ST12 when a new execution of the first unit execution ST12 is started, and may be configured to determine the initial number of games for the execution that may be executed after the new execution of the first unit execution ST12 when a new execution of the first unit execution ST12 is started.

(33) In a configuration in which the number of added games to be awarded when a new execution of the first unit execution time ST12 occurs is determined in the execution time prior to the new execution time, regardless of whether the new execution time occurs, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect corresponding to the number of added games is performed in the previous execution time in a situation in which it has not been determined whether a new execution time will occur. The effect may be an effect that clearly indicates the number of added games, or an effect that suggests the number of added games. In this case, it is possible to clearly indicate or suggest the number of added games that would be awarded if a new execution time were to occur in the currently executed execution time. In addition, the timing at which this effect is performed is arbitrary, and may be a configuration in which it is performed in the start game of the currently executed execution time, for example, or in a game during the execution time.

(34) The number of additional games awarded in each run of the first unit run ST12 is determined before the first run of the first unit run ST12 starts, such as when the start period ST11 ends. It is also possible to have a configuration in which In this case, each time a new run of the first unit run ST12 is started, a predetermined number of additional games will be awarded.

(35) Although the configuration is such that a continuous lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to generate a new execution time in the final game of each execution time of unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the game before the final game It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the continuous lottery process can be executed even in the case of the present invention. Further, if the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game in each of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is a predetermined result, a continuous lottery process may be executed.

(36) When a revival effect indicating a transition to the ART state ST6 occurs in the pseudo bonus state ST5, the revival effect is started after all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped spinning in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5. However, the revival effect may be started when a bet is set on the gaming medium to start the first game of the ART state ST6 after the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 has ended. Even in this case, if the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends without transitioning to the ART state ST6, the end preparation state ST7 is executed for one game after the end of the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the interval display unit 67 remains lit until the end preparation state ST7 ends. Therefore, even if it is confirmed whether the interval display unit 67 is lit after the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 has ended, it is not possible to determine whether the revival effect will occur.

(37) The number of games in which the termination preparation state ST7 continues is not limited to one game, and may be two games, three games, or four or more games. Alternatively, there may be a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of continuous game numbers in the termination preparation state ST7, and the termination preparation state ST7 is maintained over the number of continuous games selected by lottery from among the plurality of types of continuous game numbers.

(38) In the second control process for the game section (FIG. 47), the update process (steps S2008 to S2012) of the total wins counter 74d in the main RAM 74 is not executed when a replay win is achieved, but the update process may be executed. In this case, when a replay win is achieved, the number of bets for the current game is subtracted from the total wins counter 74d in step S2008, and the number of bets for the current game is added to the total wins counter 74d in step S2010. Therefore, even if the above update process is executed, the value of the total wins counter 74d remains constant.

(39) In the loop lottery process, the variation value is the lower 4 bits of the previous second random number, but it is not limited to this, and the variation value is the upper 4 bits of the previous second random number. It may be configured as a configuration, or it may be configured as a medium-order 4 bits.

(40) In the loop lottery process, the variation value is determined based on the previous second random number, but this is not limited to the above. The variation value may be determined based on the second random number before the previous one, or based on the previous second random number and the second random number before the previous one.

(41) In the loop lottery process, a numerical lottery process may be executed to determine the variance value. Even in this case, it is possible to vary the variance value.

(42) In the loop lottery process, when executing the process for generating the second waiting period, first set the repetition number counter 74g of the main side RAM 74 to "15", and then set the variation value and the repetition number counter 74g. In addition to determining the magnitude relationship with the value, each time the determination is made, the value of the repetition number counter 74g is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the repetition number counter 74g becomes "0", it is determined that the second waiting period has elapsed. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the repetition number counter 74g is first set to "0", and thereafter, each time the magnitude relationship is determined, the value of the repetition number counter 74g is incremented by 1, and the value of the repetition number counter 74g is incremented by 1, and the number of repetitions is It may be configured to determine that the second waiting period has elapsed when the value of the number counter 74g becomes "15".

(43) Although the configuration is such that when a transition is made to the second section SC2, the second section SC2 does not end without a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 occurring, this is not limited thereto, and the second section SC2 may end without a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 occurring even if a transition is made to the second section SC2.

(44) In a configuration in which the section display unit 67 is in a lit state (i.e., a display state) in the second section SC2, if a predetermined abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10, the section display unit 67 may be in an unlit state (i.e., a non-display state). In this case, a display corresponding to the type of abnormal state may be performed in the dual-purpose display unit 66. In this configuration in which the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the section display unit 67 are integrated in the common display area 68, if a predetermined abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10, the section display unit 67 is turned off and a display corresponding to the type of abnormal state is performed in the dual-purpose display unit 66. This prevents the display state of the common display area 68 from changing depending on whether the section is in the second section SC2 or not, even if the same abnormal state occurs, making it easier to identify the type of abnormal state.

(45) When it is determined that a new execution of the first unit execution time ST12 will occur, if the number of added games awarded in the new execution time is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of games, the special continuation effect is reliably executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, when it is determined that a new execution of the first unit execution time ST12 will occur, a lottery process for the continuation effect may be executed, and in the lottery process for the continuation effect, the more the number of added games awarded in the new execution time, the higher the probability that the special continuation effect will be selected, and the fewer the number of added games awarded in the new execution time, the higher the probability that the normal continuation effect will be selected.

(46) As a condition for starting the ending effect of the second section SC2, in addition to the conditions in the first embodiment, the number of games played continuously in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the ending start reference number of games. A configuration may also be adopted in which a condition is set that this has occurred.

(47) The total number of games played and the number of advantageous games, which is the total number of games played in the second section SC2, are stored as history information, and the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of wins of the predetermined role that is the subject of the lottery in the role lottery process and the total number of games may be stored as history information, and the winning probability of the predetermined role may be calculated. In this case, the first predetermined role and the second predetermined role are present as the target predetermined roles, and the number of wins for each of the first and second predetermined roles may be stored as history information individually, and the winning probability for each of the first and second predetermined roles may be calculated. Also, the number of wins for each of all roles may be stored as history information individually, and the winning probability for each role may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the winning probability of the roles under management.

The total number of gaming media awarded and the total number of games may also be stored as historical information, and the number of gaming media awarded per unit number of games may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall of the number of gaming media awarded per unit number of games. The combination of the total number of gaming media awarded and the total number of games may also be stored as historical information separately for each gaming state and second section SC2, and the number of gaming media awarded per unit number of games may also be calculated separately for each gaming state and second section SC2.

(48) In an advantageous gaming state, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, so the structure is not limited to a configuration that is more advantageous than a non-advantageous gaming state, and for example, a small prize is achieved. In such a case, the advantageous gaming state may become more advantageous by increasing the number of game media awarded.

(49) Notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration in which it is performed by the combined display unit 66 and the interval display unit 67, and may be performed, for example, by using the credit display unit 65, or may be performed by using the credit display unit 65 and the combined display unit 66. Furthermore, when there are multiple types of calculation results to be notified, the events to be notified of each type may be displayed in a sequential switching manner. When the events to be notified are displayed in a sequential switching manner, for example, the type of event to be notified may be displayed in the credit display unit 65, and the calculation result for the event to be notified or information corresponding to the content of the calculation result may be displayed in the combined display unit 66. This makes it possible to notify of multiple types of events to be notified using a small number of display units, even when there are multiple types of events to be notified.

(50) A configuration may also be adopted in which an upper limit number of consecutive games is set for the first section SC1 as well. In this case, when the number of games continuously played in the first section SC1 reaches the upper limit number of games, the second section SC2 is set. This makes it possible to compensate for the fact that the first section SC1 continues until it reaches the upper limit number of games. In addition, by making the upper limit number of games in the first section SC1 the same between the setting values of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", no advantage or disadvantage will occur depending on the set value regarding the upper limit number of games. becomes possible.

(51) The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the number of effective lines is only one main line ML, and may be a configuration in which there are two, three, or four or more effective lines. In this case, it may be configured such that the number of active lines increases as the number of game media bet is large, or the maximum number of active lines may be set regardless of the number of game media bet.

(52) The type of information transmitted from the master MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92 is not limited to those in the above embodiments. For example, when a winning event corresponding to the award of game media is achieved, information on the number of game media awarded as a result of the winning event may be transmitted from the master MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92. In this case, the information on the number of game media awarded as a result of the winning event may be displayed on the image display device 63 or the like. In addition, when some of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped spinning or have stopped spinning even when all of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, corresponding information may be transmitted from the master MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92. In this case, a presentation corresponding to the spinning status of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be performed on the image display device 63 or the like.

(53) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the privilege of paying out medals is given when a small win is achieved, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and the configuration is such that some kind of benefit is granted to the player. That's fine. For example, it may be configured to pay out prizes other than medals when a small winning combination is achieved. Furthermore, in a slot machine that does not have an actual medal insertion or medal payout function and manages credit for medals owned by a player, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the granting of a benefit.

(54) The present invention may be applied to so-called B-type slot machines, or to any type of slot machine, such as C-type, a combination of A-type and C-type, a combination of B-type and C-type, or a type equipped with an RT game, CT game, or AT game. The present invention may also be applied to a configuration in which a bonus state advantageous to the player exists.

(55) The symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., but may also be geometric lines, figures, etc. In addition, symbols may be formed using light, color, etc., or using three-dimensional shapes, etc., or a combination of these. In other words, the symbols may function as identifiable information.

(56) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example of a slot machine 10 is shown, but the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which games are played using game balls as a gaming medium, or to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, their effects, etc. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays the pattern;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
a game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that determines the execution status of the game based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set as a bet; ,
A winning combination lottery means (a function of executing the winning combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that performs a winning combination lottery process when the game is in the execution status;
a stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the fluctuating display of the picture on the picture display means;
A pattern display that controls the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is being executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation device. A control means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
If a stop result corresponding to a winning role is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the fluctuation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is considered to have been won corresponding to the winning combination. A winning response control means (a function of executing the processing of step S310 and step S311 in the main MPU 72) that causes corresponding control to be executed;
In a gaming machine equipped with
When a game is executed in a situation where a first predetermined number (“3”) of game media among the predetermined number are set as a bet, a predetermined profit (transition to pseudo-bonus state ST5, transition to ART state ST6) ) may be awarded, but when a game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number (“2”) of gaming media among the predetermined number are set as a bet, the predetermined profit is not awarded; and the case where the game is executed in a situation where a bet is set on the first predetermined number of game media is better than the case where the game is executed in a situation where a bet is set on the second predetermined number of game media. Any of the configurations in which the prescribed profit is likely to be granted,
The winning response control means is
The first predetermined gaming state (first CB state ST2) is based on the fact that the first predetermined prize (first CB prize) is established in the situation where the first predetermined prize (first CB prize) is won in the lottery process for the said prize. a first transition means (a function of executing the process of step S1003 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the gaming state to;
A second predetermined gaming state (second CB state ST3) is established based on the fact that the second predetermined prize (second CB prize) has been established in a situation where the second predetermined prize (second CB prize) has been won in the lottery process for the said prize. a second transition means (a function of executing the process of step S1007 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the gaming state to;
Equipped with
The first predetermined combination is a combination that can be won in a situation where a bet is set on the first predetermined number of gaming media, but cannot be won in a situation where a bet is set on the second predetermined number of gaming media. ,
The first predetermined winning is achieved by executing the game in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is bet in a situation where the first predetermined winning combination is won. Even in a situation where a winning combination is won, if the game is executed in a situation where a bet is set on the second predetermined number of game media, the game will not be established.
The second predetermined combination is a combination that can be won in a situation where a bet is set on the second predetermined number of gaming media, but cannot be won in a situation where a bet is set on the first predetermined number of gaming media. ,
The second predetermined winning is achieved by executing the game in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set as a bet in a situation where the second predetermined winning combination is won. Even in a situation where a winning combination is won, if the game is executed in a situation where a bet is set for the first predetermined number of gaming media, the game will not be established.
Even if the second predetermined prize is not achieved in the game in which the second predetermined prize is won, the situation in which the second predetermined prize is won is maintained in the next game,
If the second predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined combination will not be won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set as a bet. can be,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that does not contribute to an increase in gaming media owned by a player.

According to feature A1, a predetermined profit is awarded or a predetermined profit is easily awarded by playing a game in a situation where a first predetermined number of gaming media is bet set, so that a player basically plays a game in a situation where a first predetermined number of gaming media is bet set.

In this configuration, a bet is set on a first predetermined combination that can be won in a situation where a bet is set on a first predetermined number of gaming media and a second predetermined number of gaming media as winning combinations in the winning combination processing. A second predetermined combination that can be won depending on the situation is set. The first predetermined prize can be achieved by executing the game in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media is set as a bet in a situation where the first predetermined combination is won. Then, when the first predetermined winning is established, a transition is made to the first predetermined gaming state. In addition, the second predetermined prize can be achieved by executing the game in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set as a bet while the second predetermined combination is won. Then, when the second predetermined winning is achieved, a transition is made to the second predetermined gaming state. In this case, if the second predetermined combination has been won, the first predetermined combination will not be won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set as a bet. In addition, the first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that does not contribute to an increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player.

Therefore, in an amusement parlor, by playing a game in a situation where the second predetermined number of gaming media is bet and winning the second predetermined role before the opening of business, it is possible to prevent a transition to the first predetermined gaming state from occurring for a player who repeatedly plays a game in a situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet after the opening of business. On the other hand, if a player commits a fraudulent act of repeatedly playing a game in a situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet by using the fraudulently acquired gaming media after fraudulently acquiring gaming media and then fraudulently initializing the information, the game will be repeated in a situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet without winning the second predetermined role. In this case, the first predetermined gaming state, which is a gaming state that does not contribute to an increase in the gaming media owned by the player, is more likely to occur. This makes it possible to make it more difficult for the fraudulent player to further increase the gaming media. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of acts that attempt to obtain fraudulent benefits by fraudulently initializing the information.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the second predetermined number is smaller than the first predetermined number.

According to feature A2, since the second predetermined number is smaller than the first predetermined number, it is possible to keep the number of gaming media necessary to achieve a winning situation of the second predetermined combination. Become.

Feature A3. A gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that the first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the gaming media owned by the player is reduced.

According to feature A3, when the first predetermined gaming state occurs, a disadvantage occurs, so when a fraudulent act as already described is committed, it is possible to reduce the gaming media held by the fraudster.

Feature A4. The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that does not contribute to an increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player, or a gaming state that reduces the number of gaming media owned by the player. The gaming machine according to any one of A3.

According to feature A4, a situation where a second predetermined number of gaming media is placed as a bet using the fraudulently acquired gaming media after the fraudster fraudulently initializes the information as described above. When playing a game, by winning the second predetermined combination and achieving the second predetermined prize, the player shifts to a second predetermined game state that does not contribute to an increase in the number of game media or reduces the number of owned game media. This makes it possible to do so.

Feature A5. If the first predetermined winning combination is won in a game in which the first predetermined number of game media is set as a bet, the first predetermined prize is established in the game regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means. (Configuration of Second Embodiment) The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4.

According to feature A5, if the first predetermined winning combination is won, the first predetermined prize is definitely achieved in that game, which contributes to an increase in gaming media even if the above-described fraudulent act is committed. It becomes possible to easily shift to the first predetermined gaming state in which the game is not played.

Feature A6. Even if the first predetermined winning is not achieved in the game in which the first predetermined combination is won, the situation in which the first predetermined combination is won is maintained in the next game,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that if the first predetermined role is won, the second predetermined role will not be won even if a lottery process for the role is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of gaming media is bet.

According to feature A6, even if the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media is set as a bet in a situation where the first predetermined combination has been won, the situation can be changed to a situation where the second predetermined combination has been won. Can not. As a result, the fraudster initialized the information as described above, then played the game with the first predetermined number of game media set as a bet, and won the first predetermined combination. After that, even if the game is played in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set as a bet, the second predetermined combination cannot be won.

Feature A7. Advantageous transition means (main side MPU72) that transitions the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (preparation state ST4, pseudo bonus state ST5, ART state ST6) when the situation is such that an advantageous shift is possible (second section SC2). ),
The predetermined profit is transition to the advantageous gaming state,
A situation where a bet is set on the second predetermined number of game media can be achieved by executing the game in a situation where a bet is set on the first predetermined number of game media, whereas a situation where a bet is set on the second predetermined number of game media can be achieved. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that even if the game is executed, the advantageous transfer possible situation does not occur.

According to feature A7, when a game is executed in a situation where a bet is set for the first predetermined number of game media, a situation where a transition to an advantageous gaming state is possible can occur, and an advantageous shift is possible. Even if the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media is set as a bet, an advantageous transition is not possible. Therefore, the player basically plays the game in a situation where a bet is set for the first predetermined number of game media.

Feature A8. The gaming machine described in Feature A7, which is characterized in that the advantageous transition possible situation can occur regardless of whether the second predetermined role has been won or not.

According to feature A8, regardless of whether or not the second predetermined winning combination is won, the game is executed in a situation where a bet is set for the first predetermined number of game media, so that an advantageous shift is possible. It can be. As a result, even if the player starts a game in which a bet is set for the first predetermined number of game media in a situation where the player has not won the second predetermined winning combination, the situation can become an advantageous transition situation. becomes possible.

Feature A9. The advantageous transition means transfers the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state based on the game being executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media is set as a bet in the case where the advantageous transition is possible. On the other hand, the game state is not shifted to the advantageous gaming state even if the game is executed in a situation where a bet is set for the second predetermined number of game media in the case where the advantageous shift is possible. The gaming machine according to feature A7 or A8.

According to feature A9, even after a favorable transition is possible, the game state will not transition to the favorable game state unless the game is played in a situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media has been bet. Therefore, even if a favorable transition is possible, the player will basically play the game in a situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media has been bet.

Feature A10. A game number corresponding termination means for terminating the advantageous transition possible situation based on the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation reaching an upper limit game number (a function of making a positive determination in step S2006 in the master MPU 72 and executing the processing of step S2014),
The gaming machine described in feature A9 is characterized in that the termination means corresponding to the number of games measures the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation, regardless of whether the game is executed in a situation in which the first predetermined number of gaming media is betted in the advantageous transition possible situation, or the game is executed in a situation in which the second predetermined number of gaming media is betted in the advantageous transition possible situation.

According to feature A10, the advantageous transfer possible situation ends based on the number of games played in the advantageous transfer possible situation reaching the upper limit number of games, so the advantageous transfer possible situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible to do so. In addition, in a situation where advantageous transition is possible, either a game is executed in a situation where a bet is set on a first predetermined number of game media, or a game is executed in a situation where a bet is set on a second predetermined number of game media. However, the number of games played in situations where advantageous transitions are possible will be counted. As a result, if a game is executed in a situation where a bet is set for the second predetermined number of gaming media, the game state will not shift to an advantageous gaming state even if it is possible to shift to an advantageous state. If the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media is set as a bet, the remaining upper limit number of games in an advantageous transition possible situation will decrease accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where a bet is set for the second predetermined number of game media.

Feature A11. From the total number of game media awarded for games executed while the advantageous transfer possibility situation continues, the number of game media consumed to execute the game when the advantageous transfer possibility situation continues. When the predetermined difference number is the value obtained by subtracting the total number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is taken as a predetermined reference value, and the increase in the predetermined number of differences from the predetermined reference value has reached the upper limit difference number. comprises an end means corresponding to the difference number (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2013 in the main MPU 72 and executing the process of step S2014) that ends the advantageous transition possible situation based on
The end means corresponding to the difference number includes a game executed in a situation where a bet is set for the first predetermined number of game media in the advantageous transfer possible situation and a game executed in a situation where a bet is set for the first predetermined number of game media in the advantageous transfer possible situation. The gaming machine according to feature A9 or A10, wherein the predetermined difference number is measured regardless of whether the game is executed in a situation where a bet is set.

According to feature A11, the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so that it is possible to prevent the advantageous transition possible situation from continuing for an excessively long time. In addition, the predetermined difference number is measured regardless of whether the game is executed in a situation in which the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet in the advantageous transition possible situation or the game is executed in a situation in which the second predetermined number of gaming media is bet. As a result, even if the advantageous transition possible situation is a situation in which the game state does not transition to the advantageous game state when the game is executed in a situation in which the second predetermined number of gaming media is bet, the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value may approach the upper limit difference number. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing in a situation in which the second predetermined number of gaming media is bet.

Feature A12. A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, characterized in that it is equipped with a first predetermined notification means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1117, S1202, S1205, and S1211 in the presentation side MPU 92) that causes a first predetermined notification (non-internal notification image G12) to be executed in a situation where the second predetermined role has not been won.

According to feature A12, when the second predetermined role is not won, the first predetermined notification is executed, so that when the second predetermined role is not won, it is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall or the like to help the player win the second predetermined role.

Feature A13. The gaming machine according to feature A12, wherein the first predetermined notification means is configured to notify the number of games played in a situation where the first predetermined notification is being executed.

According to feature A13, in a situation where the first predetermined notification is executed because the second predetermined combination has not been won, the number of games played is notified, so that the second predetermined combination has not been won. This makes it possible for the game hall manager etc. to recognize how long the game continues.

Feature A14. Even if the first predetermined prize is not achieved in the game in which the first predetermined prize is won, the situation in which the first predetermined prize is won is maintained in the next game,
If the first predetermined combination is won, the second predetermined combination will not be won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set as a bet. can be,
The first predetermined notification means is characterized in that the first predetermined notification is executed in a situation where the first predetermined combination has not been won and the second predetermined combination has not been won. The gaming machine according to feature A12 or A13.

According to feature A14, by confirming that the first predetermined notification is being executed, the game hall manager or the like can confirm that neither the first predetermined winning combination nor the second predetermined winning combination has been won. It becomes possible to understand.

Feature A15. The first predetermined notification means is configured to execute the first predetermined notification when a notification enable condition is satisfied based on a specific operation being performed in a situation where the second predetermined winning combination has not been won. , means for preventing the first predetermined notification from being executed if the notification enable condition is not satisfied even in a situation where the second predetermined combination has not been won (the production side MPU 92 in the third embodiment) The gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A14, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing an internal notification switching control process.

According to feature A15, even if the second predetermined role has not been won, if the notification condition is not met based on the performance of a specific operation, the first predetermined notification is not executed. This makes it possible for only the manager of the gaming hall to confirm whether or not the second predetermined role has not been won through the execution of the first predetermined notification.

Feature A16. A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, characterized in that it is provided with a second predetermined notification means (a function for executing the process of step S1503 in the presentation side MPU 92) that causes a second predetermined notification (a two-bet corresponding notification) to be executed when the game is started in a situation where the second predetermined number of gaming media is bet-set in a situation where the second predetermined role is won.

According to feature A16, if the game is started in a situation where a bet is set for the second predetermined number of game media even though the second predetermined combination has already been won, the second predetermined notification is not issued. Since this is executed, it is possible to encourage avoidance of the establishment of the second predetermined winning prize.

Feature A17. When a game is started in a situation where a bet is set on the first predetermined number of game media in a situation where the second predetermined combination has not been won, a third predetermined notification (notification corresponding to 3 bets) is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, further comprising a third predetermined notification means (a function of executing the process of step S1305 in the production side MPU 92).

According to feature A17, if the game is started in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set as a bet in a situation where the second predetermined combination has not been won, the third predetermined notification is executed. By playing the game in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media is set as a bet, it is possible to encourage the player to win the second predetermined combination.

Feature A18. Even if the first predetermined prize is not achieved in the game in which the first predetermined prize is won, the situation in which the first predetermined prize is won is maintained in the next game,
If the first predetermined combination is won, the second predetermined combination will not be won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set as a bet. can be,
This gaming machine includes a fourth predetermined notification means (processing of step S1107 in the production side MPU 92) that causes a fourth predetermined notification (first internal explicit image G13) to be executed in a situation where the first predetermined combination is won. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the above functions.

According to feature A18, when the first predetermined role is won, the fourth predetermined notification is executed, so that when the first predetermined role is won, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall or the like aware that the first predetermined role has been won.

Feature A19. An information storage means (main RAM 74) that stores first predetermined winning information (first CB winning data) when the first predetermined role is won in the lottery process of the role, and stores second predetermined winning information (second CB winning data) when the second predetermined role is won in the lottery process of the role;
A predetermined erasure means (a function of executing a partial clear process in the main MPU 72) that executes a predetermined erasure process for erasing information stored in the information storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined erasure condition;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A18, characterized in that when the predetermined erasure means erases information stored in the information storage means during the predetermined erasure process, the second predetermined winning information is excluded from the information to be erased.

According to feature A19, even when information stored in the information storage means is erased based on the establishment of a predetermined erasure condition, the second predetermined winning information indicating that the second predetermined role has been won is excluded from the information to be erased. This makes it possible to maintain the state of winning the second predetermined role even after the predetermined erasure condition is established and the predetermined erasure process is executed.

Feature A20. The role selection means executes the role selection process in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the use target from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
The gaming machine includes a setting-related execution means (a function for executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for executing a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value,
The gaming machine described in feature A19, wherein the specified erasure condition is met when the setting-related process is executed.

According to feature A20, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is selected from among the setting values in multiple stages, it is possible to change the advantage of the gaming machine by selecting the setting value to be used. Become. Furthermore, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, the predetermined deletion condition is satisfied and the predetermined deletion process is executed, so that when the predetermined setting-related process is executed, the information in the information storage means is deleted. It becomes possible to do so. In this case, even if the predetermined deletion process is executed, the second predetermined winning information is excluded from the deletion target. Thereby, even if a predetermined setting-related process is executed, it is possible to maintain a state in which the second predetermined combination has been won.

Feature A21. The gaming machine described in Feature A19 or A20, wherein the predetermined erasing means erases the first predetermined winning information when erasing information stored in the information storage means in the predetermined erasing process.

According to feature A21, when the predetermined deletion process is executed, the second predetermined winning information is not deleted, but the first predetermined winning information is deleted. This makes it possible to change a situation where the first predetermined role has been won to a situation where the first predetermined role has not been won by satisfying a predetermined deletion condition.

Feature A22. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A19 to A21, characterized in that the predetermined erasure condition is met based on a predetermined operation (turning the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 ON) being performed when the supply of operating power is started.

According to feature A22, it is possible to execute the predetermined erasing process when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature A23. An information storage means (main RAM 74) that stores first predetermined winning information (first CB winning data) when the first predetermined role is won in the lottery process of the role, and stores second predetermined winning information (second CB winning data) when the second predetermined role is won in the lottery process of the role;
A specific erasure means (a function of executing a clear all process in the main MPU 72) that executes a specific erasure process for erasing information stored in the information storage means based on the establishment of a specific erasure condition;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A22, characterized in that the specific erasing means erases the second predetermined winning information when erasing information stored in the information storage means during the specific erasing process.

According to feature A23, when the specific deletion condition is met, the specific deletion process is executed, and the information stored in the information storage means, including the second predetermined winning information, is deleted. In this case, if the specific deletion process is executed by fraudulently satisfying the specific deletion condition, it is possible to create a situation in which the second predetermined role is not won.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features A1 to A23. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

According to the invention related to the features of feature group A above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to a tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is assumed that attempts are made to obtain illegal profits by illicitly initializing information, and it is necessary to suppress the occurrence of such fraudulent acts. .

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A symbol display means (reel unit 31) that displays symbols in a variable manner;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that is operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
A game start means for determining that a game is in progress based on the operation of the start operation means when a predetermined number of gaming media have been bet on, (a function of making a positive determination in step S304 in the master MPU 72);
A role selection means (a function for selecting a role in the master MPU 72) for selecting a role when the game is in the execution state;
A stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) that is operated to stop the variable display of the picture in the picture display means;
A symbol display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) controls the symbol display means so that the display of the symbols is started when the game is in the execution state, and the display of the symbols is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means;
A winning corresponding control means (a function for executing the processes of steps S310 and S311 in the master MPU 72) for executing a control corresponding to a winning role when a stop result corresponding to a winning role in the lottery process for the winning role is displayed after the changing display of the pattern under the control of the pattern display control means, as a winning corresponding to the winning role is established;
In a gaming machine equipped with
a situation setting means (a function for executing the processing of step S1805 in the main MPU 72) for setting a situation in which a favorable transition is possible (second section SC2) based on the fact that a game has been executed in a situation in which a first predetermined number ("3") of the predetermined number of gaming media has been bet on, but not setting the situation in which a favorable transition is possible even if a game has been executed in a situation in which a second predetermined number ("2") of the predetermined number of gaming media has been bet on;
When the advantageous transition is possible, advantageous transition means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2403 to S2405, S2413 and S2414 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state (preparation state ST4, pseudo bonus state ST5, ART state ST6) advantageous to the player;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature B1, when a game is executed in a situation where a first predetermined number of gaming media has been bet, it may result in a favorable transition situation in which a transition to a favorable gaming state is possible, whereas even if a game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of gaming media has been bet, it does not result in a favorable transition situation. Therefore, the player basically executes the game in a situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media has been bet. This makes it possible to play the game in a preferred manner.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the first predetermined number is greater than the second predetermined number.

According to feature B2, since the first predetermined number is greater than the second predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the number of game media required to achieve an advantageous shift from becoming excessively small. It becomes possible.

Feature B3. The gaming machine described in Feature B1 or B2, characterized in that the advantageous transition means can transition the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet when the advantageous transition is possible, but does not transition the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state even if the game is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of gaming media is bet when the advantageous transition is possible.

According to feature B3, even after a situation in which an advantageous transition is possible, the game state does not shift to an advantageous gaming state unless the game is executed in a situation where a bet is set for the first predetermined number of gaming media. . Therefore, even in a situation where an advantageous transition is possible, the player basically plays the game in a situation where a bet is set for the first predetermined number of game media.

Feature B4: A termination means corresponding to the number of games that terminates the advantageous transition possible situation based on the number of games that have been played in the advantageous transition possible situation reaching an upper limit number of games (a function of making a positive determination in step S2006 in the master MPU 72 and executing the processing of step S2014),
The gaming machine described in feature B3 is characterized in that the termination means corresponding to the number of games measures the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation, regardless of whether the game is executed in a situation in which the first predetermined number of gaming media is betted in the advantageous transition possible situation, or the game is executed in a situation in which the second predetermined number of gaming media is betted in the advantageous transition possible situation.

According to feature B4, the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the upper limit number of games, so that the advantageous transition possible situation does not continue for an excessively long time. In addition, whether the game is executed in the advantageous transition possible situation in a situation where a first predetermined number of gaming media is betted or in a situation where a second predetermined number of gaming media is betted, the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation is measured. As a result, even if the advantageous transition possible situation is in a situation where a game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of gaming media is betted, the remaining upper limit number of games in the advantageous transition possible situation is reduced by that much, even though the game state does not transition to the advantageous game state when the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of gaming media is betted. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing in a situation where a second predetermined number of gaming media is betted.

Feature B5. The winning response control means includes a second transition means (a function of executing the process of step S1007 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to a second predetermined game state (second CB state ST3) based on the establishment of a second predetermined winning (second CB winning) in a situation where a second predetermined role (second CB role) is won in the lottery process of the role,
The second predetermined combination may be a winning combination when the second predetermined number of gaming media is bet, but may not be a winning combination when the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet,
The second predetermined winning is established when a game is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is bet when the second predetermined combination is won, whereas the second predetermined winning is not established when a game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is bet even when the second predetermined combination is won.
The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that does not contribute to an increase in gaming media owned by the player,
The gaming machine described in feature B4 is characterized in that the termination means corresponding to the number of games measures the number of games played in the advantageous transition possible situation, even if the game was played in the second specified gaming state.

According to feature B5, when a game is played in a situation where a second predetermined number of gaming media has been bet, the second predetermined role is won and the second predetermined prize is achieved, resulting in a transition to a second predetermined gaming state. The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that does not contribute to an increase in the gaming media owned by the player, and even games played in the second predetermined gaming state are included in the counting of the number of games played in a situation where a favorable transition is possible. This makes it possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where a second predetermined number of gaming media has been bet.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to feature B5, characterized in that the advantageous transfer possible situation can occur regardless of whether or not the second predetermined winning combination is won.

According to feature B6, a situation where a favorable transition is possible can be achieved by executing a game in a situation where a first predetermined number of gaming media is betted, regardless of whether or not the second predetermined role has been won. This makes it possible to achieve a situation where a favorable transition is possible even if a player starts a game in a situation where a first predetermined number of gaming media is betted, but the player has not won the second predetermined role.

Feature B7. The gaming machine described in Feature B5 or B6, wherein the second predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the gaming media owned by the player is reduced.

According to feature B7, when the second predetermined gaming state occurs, there is a disadvantage, and even games executed in the second predetermined gaming state are subject to measurement of the number of games executed in a situation where advantageous transition is possible. becomes. This makes it possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where a bet is set for the second predetermined number of game media.

Feature B8. From the total number of game media awarded for games executed while the advantageous transfer possibility situation continues, the number of game media consumed to execute the game when the advantageous transfer possibility situation continues. When the predetermined difference number is the value obtained by subtracting the total number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is taken as a predetermined reference value, and the increase in the predetermined number of differences from the predetermined reference value has reached the upper limit difference number. comprises an end means corresponding to the difference number (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2013 in the main MPU 72 and executing the process of step S2014) that ends the advantageous transition possible situation based on
The end means corresponding to the difference number includes a game executed in a situation where a bet is set for the first predetermined number of game media in the advantageous transfer possible situation and a game executed in a situation where a bet is set for the first predetermined number of game media in the advantageous transfer possible situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B7, wherein the predetermined difference number is measured regardless of whether the game is executed in a situation where a bet is set.

According to feature B8, the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so that it is possible to prevent the advantageous transition possible situation from continuing for an excessively long time. In addition, the predetermined difference number is measured regardless of whether the game is executed in a situation in which the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet in the advantageous transition possible situation or the game is executed in a situation in which the second predetermined number of gaming media is bet. As a result, even if the advantageous transition possible situation is a situation in which the game state does not transition to the advantageous game state when the second predetermined number of gaming media is bet, the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value may approach the upper limit difference number when the game is executed in a situation in which the second predetermined number of gaming media is bet. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing in a situation in which the second predetermined number of gaming media is bet.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features B1 to B8. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1. A symbol display means (reel unit 31) for displaying symbols in a variable manner;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that is operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
A game start means for determining that a game is in progress based on the operation of the start operation means when a predetermined number of gaming media have been bet on, (a function of making a positive determination in step S304 in the master MPU 72);
A role selection means (a function for selecting a role in the master MPU 72) for selecting a role when the game is in the execution state;
A stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) that is operated to stop the variable display of the picture in the picture display means;
A symbol display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) controls the symbol display means so that the display of the symbols is started when the game is in the execution state, and the display of the symbols is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means;
A winning corresponding control means (a function for executing the processes of steps S310 and S311 in the master MPU 72) for executing a control corresponding to a winning role when a stop result corresponding to a winning role in the lottery process for the winning role is displayed after the changing display of the pattern under the control of the pattern display control means, as a winning corresponding to the winning role is established;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The winning response control means includes a predetermined transition means (a function of executing the process of step S1007 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning a game state to a predetermined game state (second CB state ST3) based on the establishment of a predetermined winning (second CB winning) in a situation where a predetermined role (second CB role) is won in the lottery process of the role,
Even if the predetermined winning is not achieved in the game in which the predetermined combination is won, the situation in which the predetermined combination is won is maintained in the next game,
A case where a game is executed in a situation where a first predetermined number ("3") of the predetermined number of gaming media is bet when the predetermined combination is won is more advantageous to a player than a case where a game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet when the predetermined combination is not won,
This gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with a first predetermined notification means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1117, S1202, S1205 and S1211 in the presentation side MPU 92) that causes a first predetermined notification (non-internal notification image G12) to be executed when the predetermined role has not been won.

According to feature C1, in a configuration in which it is advantageous to execute the game in a situation where the predetermined combination has been won, the first predetermined notification is executed in a situation where the predetermined combination has not been won. Thereby, in a situation where the player has not won the predetermined combination, it is possible to encourage the player to win the predetermined combination. Therefore, the game can be played in a suitable manner.

Feature C2. The gaming machine described in Feature C1, wherein the first predetermined notification means notifies the number of games that have been played when the first predetermined notification is being executed.

According to feature C2, by reporting the number of games played in a situation where the first predetermined notification is executed due to not winning the predetermined combination, it is possible to determine how long the situation in which the predetermined combination has not been won continues. This makes it possible to recognize what is being done.

Feature C3. The gaming machine described in Feature C1 or C2, characterized in that the first predetermined notification means is provided with a means (a function for executing the internal notification switching control process of the presentation side MPU 92 in the third embodiment) that executes the first predetermined notification when a notification enabling condition is met based on a specific operation being performed in a situation where the predetermined role has not been won, and does not execute the first predetermined notification when the notification enabling condition is not met even in a situation where the predetermined role has not been won.

According to feature C3, even if the predetermined combination is not won, if the notification condition is not met based on the performance of a specific operation, the first predetermined notification is not executed. This makes it possible for only the manager of the game hall to confirm whether or not the predetermined combination is not won through the execution of the first predetermined notification.

Feature C4. The predetermined combination is a combination that can be won when a second predetermined number ("2") of the predetermined number of gaming media is bet, but is not won when the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet,
The predetermined winning is established when the game is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is bet when the predetermined combination is won, whereas the predetermined winning is not established when the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is bet even when the predetermined combination is won.
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a second predetermined notification means (a function of executing the processing of step S1503 in the presentation side MPU 92) that causes a second predetermined notification (a two-bet compatible notification) to be executed when the game is started in a situation where the second predetermined number of gaming media has been bet set when the predetermined role has been won.

According to feature C4, if the game is started in a situation where a bet is set for the second predetermined number of game media even though the predetermined combination has already been won, the second predetermined notification is executed. Therefore, it is possible to encourage avoidance of the establishment of the second predetermined prize winning.

Feature C5. The predetermined combination is a combination that can be won when a second predetermined number ("2") of the predetermined number of gaming media is bet, but is not won when the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet,
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a third predetermined notification means (a function of executing the processing of step S1305 in the presentation side MPU 92) that causes a third predetermined notification (a 3 bet corresponding notification) to be executed when a game is started in a situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media has been bet set when the predetermined role has not been won.

According to feature C5, if a game is started in a situation where a first predetermined number of gaming media has been bet on and the predetermined role has not been won, a third predetermined notification is executed, so that it is possible to encourage a player to win a predetermined role by playing the game in a situation where a second predetermined number of gaming media has been bet on.

Feature C6. When a game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number (“3”) of game media is set as a bet, a predetermined profit (transition to pseudo bonus state ST5, transition to ART state ST6) is awarded. However, when a game is executed in a situation where a bet is set on a second predetermined number (“2”) of game media among the predetermined number, the predetermined profit is not awarded; A predetermined profit is provided when the game is executed in a situation where a bet is set on a predetermined number of game media than when a game is executed in a situation where a bet is set on the second predetermined number of game media. It is one of the configurations that are likely to be
The winning response control means executes the first predetermined game based on the fact that a first predetermined prize (first CB prize) is achieved in a situation where the first predetermined prize (first CB prize) is won in the lottery process for the prize. A first transition means (a function of executing the process of step S1003 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the gaming state to the state (first CB state ST2),
The first predetermined combination is a combination that can be won in a situation where a bet is set on the first predetermined number of gaming media, but cannot be won in a situation where a bet is set on the second predetermined number of gaming media. ,
The first predetermined winning is achieved by executing the game in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is bet in a situation where the first predetermined winning combination is won. Even in a situation where a winning combination is won, if the game is executed in a situation where a bet is set on the second predetermined number of game media, the game will not be established.
The predetermined combination is a combination that can be won in a situation where a bet is set on the second predetermined number of gaming media, but cannot be won in a situation where a bet is set on the first predetermined number of gaming media,
The predetermined winning is achieved by executing the game in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set as a bet in a situation where the predetermined combination is won, and the predetermined combination is won. Even if the situation is such that the game is executed in a situation where a bet is set for the first predetermined number of game media, the game will not be established.
If the predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media is set as a bet;
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that does not contribute to an increase in gaming media owned by the player.

According to feature C6, by having a configuration in which a predetermined profit is awarded or a predetermined profit is easily awarded when a game is executed in a situation where a bet is set on the first predetermined number of game media, the player can Basically, the game is executed in a situation where a bet is set for a first predetermined number of game media.

In this configuration, a first predetermined role that can be won when a first predetermined number of game media is bet, and a predetermined role that can be won when a second predetermined number of game media is bet are set as winning roles in the lottery process for roles. A first predetermined winning can be achieved by playing a game when a first predetermined number of game media is bet when the first predetermined role is won. Then, when the first predetermined winning is achieved, a transition to a first predetermined game state occurs. Also, a predetermined winning can be achieved by playing a game when a second predetermined number of game media is bet when the predetermined role is won. Then, when the predetermined winning is achieved, a transition to a predetermined game state occurs. In this case, if a predetermined role is won, the first predetermined role will not be won even if the lottery process for roles is executed when a first predetermined number of game media is bet, and the first predetermined game state is a game state that does not contribute to an increase in game media owned by the player.

Therefore, in an amusement hall, by playing a game in a situation where the second predetermined number of gaming media is bet and winning a predetermined combination before the opening of business, it is possible to prevent a transition to the first predetermined gaming state from occurring for a player who repeatedly plays a game in a situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet after the opening of business. On the other hand, if a player commits a fraudulent act of repeatedly playing a game in a situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet by using the fraudulently acquired gaming media after fraudulently acquiring gaming media and then fraudulently initializing the information, the game will be repeated in a situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet without winning a predetermined combination. In this case, the first predetermined gaming state, which is a gaming state that does not contribute to an increase in the gaming media owned by the player, is more likely to occur. This makes it more difficult for the fraudulent actor to further increase the gaming media. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of acts that attempt to obtain fraudulent benefits by fraudulently initializing the information.

Feature C7. Even if the first predetermined prize is not achieved in the game in which the first predetermined prize is won, the situation in which the first predetermined prize is won is maintained in the next game,
If the first predetermined combination has been won, the predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of gaming media is set as a bet;
The first predetermined notification means is characterized in that the first predetermined notification is executed in a situation where the first predetermined combination has not been won and the predetermined combination has not been won. The gaming machine described in C6.

According to feature C7, by confirming that the first predetermined notification is being executed, the game hall manager or the like can understand that neither the first predetermined prize nor the predetermined prize has been won. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature C8. Even if the first predetermined winning is not achieved in the game in which the first predetermined combination is won, the situation in which the first predetermined combination is won is maintained in the next game;
When the first predetermined combination is won, the player will not win the predetermined combination even if a lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is bet.
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a fourth predetermined notification means (a function of executing the processing of step S1107 in the presentation side MPU 92) that causes a fourth predetermined notification (first internal explicit image G13) to be executed when the first predetermined role is won.

According to feature C8, in a situation where the first predetermined combination has been won, the fourth predetermined notification is executed. It becomes possible to make the player recognize that he/she has won the role.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features C1 to C8. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Equipped with a predetermined storage execution means (function of executing the process of step S706 in the master MPU 72) for storing predetermined game information (second CB winning data) in the information storage means (master RAM 74);
When the predetermined game information is stored in the information storage means, the game status becomes a predetermined game status (a game status in which the first CB role is not won),
This gaming machine is
A processing execution means for awarding a profit (a function for executing a lottery process for a winning combination in the master MPU 72) for executing a processing for awarding a profit in a manner corresponding to a set value set as a target for use from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the advantage level of a player;
A setting-related execution means (a function for executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for executing a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value;
A predetermined erasing means (a function of executing a partial clearing process in the main MPU 72) that executes a predetermined erasing process for erasing information stored in the information storage means when the setting-related process is executed;
Equipped with
The predetermined erasing means excludes the predetermined gaming information from the information to be erased when erasing information stored in the information storage means in the predetermined erasing process.

According to feature D1, the setting value to be used is selected from multiple levels of setting values, so that it is possible to vary the advantageous degree of the gaming machine by selecting the setting value to be used. In addition, since a predetermined erasing process is executed when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, it is possible to erase information from the information storage means when the predetermined setting-related process is executed. In this case, even if the predetermined erasing process is executed, the predetermined gaming information is excluded from the items to be erased. This makes it possible to maintain the predetermined gaming situation even if the predetermined setting-related process is executed.

Feature D2. Equipped with specific storage execution means (a function for executing the process of step S706 in the main MPU 72) for storing specific game information (first CB winning data) in the information storage means (main RAM 74),
When the specific gaming information is stored in the information storage means, the gaming situation is a specific gaming situation (a gaming situation in which the second CB combination is not won),
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the predetermined erasing means erases the specific game information when erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the predetermined erasing process.

According to feature D2, when the predetermined deletion process is executed, the predetermined game information is not deleted, but the specific game information can be deleted. As a result, when the gaming situation becomes a specific gaming situation, it becomes possible to change the gaming situation to a game situation other than the specific gaming situation by satisfying a predetermined deletion condition.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, characterized in that the setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related process based on a predetermined operation (turning the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 ON) being performed when the supply of operating power is started.

According to feature D3, the predetermined erasing process can be executed when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature D4. A specific erasing means (a function of executing an all clearing process in the main MPU 72) for executing a specific erasing process for erasing information stored in the information storage means based on the satisfaction of a specific erasing condition. ,
Any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the specific erasing means erases the predetermined game information when erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the specific erasing process. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature D4, when the specific erasure condition is met, the specific erasure process is executed, and the information stored in the information storage means, including the specified game information, is erased.

Feature D5. A symbol display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying symbols;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that is operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
A game start means for determining that a game is in progress based on the operation of the start operation means when a predetermined number of gaming media have been bet on, (a function of making a positive determination in step S304 in the master MPU 72);
A role selection means (a function for selecting a role in the master MPU 72) for selecting a role when the game is in the execution state;
A stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) that is operated to stop the variable display of the picture in the picture display means;
A symbol display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) controls the symbol display means so that the display of the symbols is started when the game is in the execution state, and the display of the symbols is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means;
A winning corresponding control means (a function for executing the processes of steps S310 and S311 in the master MPU 72) for executing a control corresponding to a winning role when a stop result corresponding to a winning role in the lottery process for the winning role is displayed after the changing display of the pattern under the control of the pattern display control means, as a winning corresponding to the winning role is established;
Equipped with
a configuration in which a predetermined profit (transition to pseudo bonus state ST5, transition to ART state ST6) can be awarded when a game is executed in a situation in which a first predetermined number ("3") of the predetermined number of gaming media has been bet, whereas the predetermined profit is not awarded when a game is executed in a situation in which a second predetermined number ("2") of the predetermined number of gaming media has been bet, or a configuration in which the predetermined profit is more likely to be awarded when a game is executed in a situation in which the first predetermined number of gaming media has been bet than when a game is executed in a situation in which the second predetermined number of gaming media has been bet,
The winning response control means is
A first transition means (a function of executing the process of step S1003 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to a first predetermined game state (first CB state ST2) based on the establishment of a first predetermined winning (first CB winning) in a situation where a first predetermined role (first CB role) has been won in the lottery process of the role;
A second transition means (a function of executing the process of step S1007 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to a second predetermined game state (second CB state ST3) based on the establishment of a second predetermined winning (second CB winning) in a situation where a second predetermined role (second CB role) has been won in the lottery process of the role;
Equipped with
The first predetermined combination may be a winning combination when the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet, but may not be a winning combination when the second predetermined number of gaming media is bet,
The first predetermined winning is established when a game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is bet when the first predetermined combination is won, whereas the first predetermined winning is not established when a game is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is bet even when the first predetermined combination is won;
The second predetermined combination may be a winning combination when the second predetermined number of gaming media is bet, but may not be a winning combination when the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet,
The second predetermined winning is established when a game is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is bet when the second predetermined combination is won, whereas the second predetermined winning is not established when a game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is bet even when the second predetermined combination is won.
Even if the second predetermined winning is not achieved in the game in which the second predetermined winning combination is won, the situation in which the second predetermined winning combination is won is maintained in the next game,
When the second predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined combination is not won even if a lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is bet set,
the first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that does not contribute to an increase in gaming media owned by the player;
The predetermined storage execution means stores second predetermined winning information as the predetermined game information in the information storage means when the second predetermined role is won in the lottery process of the role,
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the predetermined game situation is a situation in which the second predetermined role is won.

According to feature D5, a predetermined profit is awarded or a predetermined profit is easily awarded by playing a game in a situation where a first predetermined number of gaming media has been bet, so that a player will basically play a game in a situation where a first predetermined number of gaming media has been bet.

In this configuration, a bet is set on a first predetermined combination that can be won in a situation where a bet is set on a first predetermined number of gaming media and a second predetermined number of gaming media as winning combinations in the winning combination processing. A second predetermined combination that can be won depending on the situation is set. The first predetermined prize can be achieved by executing the game in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media is set as a bet in a situation where the first predetermined combination is won. Then, when the first predetermined winning is established, a transition is made to the first predetermined gaming state. In addition, the second predetermined prize can be achieved by executing the game in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set as a bet while the second predetermined combination is won. Then, when the second predetermined winning is achieved, a transition is made to the second predetermined gaming state. In this case, if the second predetermined combination has been won, the first predetermined combination will not be won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set as a bet. In addition, the first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that does not contribute to an increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player.

Therefore, in an amusement hall, by playing a game in a situation where the second predetermined number of gaming media is bet and winning the second predetermined role before the opening of business, it is possible to prevent a transition to the first predetermined gaming state from occurring for a player who repeatedly plays a game in a situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet after the opening of business. On the other hand, if a fraudulent act is committed, for example, by fraudulently obtaining gaming media and then fraudulently initializing information, and then repeatedly playing a game in a situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet using the fraudulently obtained gaming media, the game will be repeated in a situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet without winning the second predetermined role. In this case, the first predetermined gaming state, which is a gaming state that does not contribute to an increase in the gaming media owned by the player, is more likely to occur. This makes it more difficult for the fraudulent actor to further increase the gaming media. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of acts that attempt to obtain fraudulent benefits by fraudulently initializing information.

Note that for the configuration of features D1 to D5, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to Any one or more of H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Features Group E>
Feature E1. A situation setting means (a function for executing the processing of step S1805 in the main MPU 72) for setting a favorable transition possible situation (second section SC2);
When the advantageous transition is possible, advantageous transition means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2403 to S2405, S2413 and S2414 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state (preparation state ST4, pseudo bonus state ST5, ART state ST6) advantageous to the player;
A game number corresponding termination means for terminating the advantageous transition possible situation based on the fact that the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation has reached an upper limit game number (a function of making a positive determination in step S2006 in the master MPU 72 and executing the processing of step S2014);
Equipped with
The advantageous transition means includes a first release transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1903, S1906, S1909, and S2411 to S2414 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to the advantageous game state based on the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation and in the specific game state reaching a first release game number (first ceiling game number),
A gaming machine characterized in that the first release number of games is a number of games that is smaller than the upper limit number of games.

According to feature E1, the advantageous transfer possible situation ends based on the number of games played in the advantageous transfer possible situation reaching the upper limit number of games, so the advantageous transfer possible situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by shifting to the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the number of games played in the advantageous shift possible situation reaches the first number of canceled games, it is possible to provide an opportunity to shift to the advantageous gaming state. In addition, since the number of first unlocked games is smaller than the upper limit number of games in a situation in which advantageous transition is possible, it is possible to reliably provide an opportunity to transition to an advantageous gaming state when a situation in which advantageous transition is possible occurs. becomes.

Feature E2. In the advantageous transition possible situation, there are multiple types of stay modes (A mode, B mode, C mode) such that the number of first unlocked games is different,
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the first number of canceled games is smaller than the upper limit number of games in any type of stay mode.

According to feature E2, by having multiple types of stay modes with different first release game numbers, it is possible to diversify the game content in a situation where an advantageous transition is possible. In addition, regardless of the type of stay mode, the first release game number is a number of games less than the upper limit game number in a situation where an advantageous transition is possible, so that it is possible to reliably provide an opportunity to transition to an advantageous game state when a situation where an advantageous transition is possible occurs, regardless of which stay mode is selected.

Feature E3. The gaming machine described in Feature E2, characterized in that the upper limit number of games is the same regardless of the multiple types of stay modes.

According to feature E3, the upper limit number of games in a situation where a favorable transition is possible is the same regardless of the type of stay mode, so that the degree of advantage of a single favorable transition possible situation can be set within a predetermined range of advantage even in a configuration in which the game content in the favorable transition possible situation is diversified.

Feature E4: The advantageous transition means includes a second release transition means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2411 to S2414 and step S2805 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to the advantageous game state based on the fact that the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation and the specific game state reaches a second release game number (second ceiling game number) when the advantageous transition possible situation is maintained in the advantageous transition possible situation when the advantageous game state ends and transitions to the specific game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the maximum number of games is greater than the total number of games of the first release number of games, the second release number of games, and the minimum number of continuing games of the advantageous gaming state.

According to feature E4, even if a transition to an advantageous gaming state occurs once in an advantageous transition possible situation, the advantageous transition possible situation continues after the advantageous gaming state ends, and the second release game number of games is played in the specific gaming state, so that a transition to the advantageous gaming state can be made again. The upper limit number of games in the advantageous transition possible situation is set to a number of games that is greater than the total number of games of the first release game number, the second release game number, and the minimum number of continuing games in the advantageous gaming state. This makes it possible to create a situation in which a transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs twice in one advantageous transition possible situation.

Feature E5. The advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous gaming state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5) and a second advantageous gaming state (ART state ST6) that can be transitioned to when the first advantageous gaming state ends. ,
The upper limit number of games is greater than the total number of games of the first number of unlocked games, the second number of unlocked games, and the number of games that is twice the number of consecutive games in the first advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature E4.

According to feature E5, although a transition to the first advantageous gaming state occurs due to the first unlocked game number being exhausted in a situation where advantageous transition is possible, the transition to the second advantageous gaming state occurs after the first advantageous gaming state ends. Even if the transition does not occur, as the number of second unlocked games is further used up in this situation where advantageous transition is possible, it becomes possible to transition to the first advantageous gaming state again, and the first advantageous game is It becomes possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous gaming state can continue after the state. As a result, even if a transition from the first advantageous gaming state that occurs in an advantageous transition possible situation to the second advantageous gaming state does not occur, the second advantageous gaming state will be changed to the second advantageous gaming state in a subsequent advantageous transition possible situation. It becomes possible to make the player expect the transition.

Feature E6. A gaming machine as described in Feature E4 or E5, characterized in that the second release number of games is a number of games less than the first release number of games that was set before the second release number of games was set.

According to feature E6, because the second number of unlocked games is smaller than the first number of unlocked games, if the advantageous transition possible situation continues after the end of the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state This makes it possible to increase the expectations of the players regarding the transition.

Feature E7. The above-mentioned advantageous transfer possible situation includes:
a first stay mode (A mode) in which the advantageous transferable situation ends when the advantageous gaming state ends in the advantageous transferable situation;
a second stay mode (B mode) in which the advantageous transferable situation can continue even after the advantageous gaming state ends in the advantageous transferable situation;
is set,
The second cancellation/transition means is configured to perform a process in the advantageous transition possible situation when the advantageous transition possible situation is maintained when the advantageous gaming state ends in the second stay mode and the transition is made to the specific gaming state. and the game state is shifted to the advantageous gaming state based on the number of games executed in the specific gaming state reaching the second number of unlocked games. The gaming machine according to any one of E6.

Feature E7 makes it possible to create a situation in which an advantageous game state occurs only once in one advantageous transition situation, and a situation in which an advantageous game state occurs multiple times in one advantageous transition situation. This makes it possible to create relatively advantageous and relatively unfavorable advantageous transition situations, making it possible to diversify the game content.

Feature E8. According to feature E7, the total number of games of the first number of unlocked games and the second number of unlocked games in the second stay mode is less than or equal to the first number of unlocked games in the first stay mode. Game machine.

According to feature E8, the total number of the first release game count and the second release game count in the second stay mode is equal to or less than the first release game count in the first stay mode, making it possible to make the second stay mode a mode in which a transition to an advantageous play state can occur multiple times in one advantageous transition situation, making it easy to transition to an advantageous play state.

Feature E9. An advantageous game state is maintained in the advantageous game state by an advantageous notification means (section display unit 67);
an advantageous notification control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1809, S1814, S2015, S2408, and S2417 in the main MPU 72 and a function of making a positive judgment in step S2802) for setting the advantageous notification means to a non-notification state when the advantageous transition possible state ends, and for maintaining the advantageous notification means in the notification state even after the advantageous game state ends when the advantageous transition possible state continues even after the advantageous game state ends, when the advantageous transition possible state ends as a result of the end of the advantageous game state;
A gaming machine according to any one of features E4 to E8, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature E9, by providing an advantage notification means that maintains the notification state in an advantageous gaming state, it becomes easier to confirm whether or not the game is in an advantageous gaming state. In this case, if the advantageous transfer possible situation ends due to the end of the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous notification means becomes a non-notification state when the advantageous transferable situation ends, whereas the advantageous gaming state If the advantageous transition possible situation continues even if the advantageous gaming state ends, the advantageous notification means is maintained in the notification state even after the advantageous gaming state ends. This makes it possible for the player playing the game at the gaming machine to recognize that the advantageous transfer possible situation continues even after the advantageous gaming state ends.

Feature E10. The gaming machine described in Feature E9, characterized in that the advantageous notification control means includes a means for changing the advantageous notification means from the non-notification state to the notification state when the advantageous transition situation occurs (a function for executing the processing of steps S1809 and S1814 in the main MPU 72).

According to feature E10, the advantageous notification means can switch from a non-notification state to a notification state when an advantageous transition situation occurs, so that players other than the player who continued playing on the gaming machine, even if they confirm that the advantageous notification means is in the notification state, will not be able to know whether the advantageous transition situation continues after the advantageous playing state has ended, or whether a new advantageous transition situation has occurred.

Feature E11. The gaming machine described in Feature E10, characterized in that the advantageous notification control means maintains the advantageous notification means in the non-notification state when the advantageous transition situation occurs, and has a means for changing the advantageous notification means from the non-notification state to the notification state when the advantageous game state is subsequently transitioned to (a function for executing the processing of steps S1815, S2408, and S2417 in the main MPU 72).

According to feature E11, even if an advantageous shift is possible, the advantageous notifying means may be maintained in a non-notifying state, and when the advantageous gaming state is subsequently shifted to, the advantageous notifying means may be in a notifying state. This makes it possible to diversify the opportunities at which the advantageous notification means is switched to the notification state.

Feature E12. A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E11, characterized in that it is provided with a difference number corresponding termination means (a function of making a positive determination in step S2013 in the main MPU 72 and executing the process of step S2014 in the main MPU 72) that terminates the advantageous transition possible situation when the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is a predetermined reference value and the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value reaches an upper limit difference number, where the predetermined difference number is set to a predetermined reference value, where the predetermined difference number is calculated by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute games when the advantageous transition possible situation continues from the total number of game media awarded by games executed when the advantageous transition possible situation continues.

According to feature E12, the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so it is possible to prevent the advantageous transition possible situation from continuing for an excessively long time.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features E1 to E12. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristic group F>
Feature F1. A predetermined advantageous transition means (a function of executing the processing of step S906 and step S2704 in the main MPU 72) that shifts the gaming state to a predetermined advantageous state (ART state ST6) that is advantageous to the player;
A first determining means for determining the number of consecutive games in the predetermined advantageous state based on the occurrence of a first decision opportunity in the predetermined advantageous state (a function of executing a loop lottery process in the main MPU 72, step S3401 in the main MPU 72) and a function of executing the process of step S3402);
A second determining means for determining a predetermined number of additional games to be added to the number of consecutive games in the predetermined advantageous state based on the occurrence of a second decision opportunity in the predetermined advantageous state (a second determining means (including processing for adding on the next set in the main MPU 72) function) and
Equipped with
The second decision opportunity may occur multiple times in the predetermined advantageous state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second determining means sets the total number of games of the predetermined number of additional games in one predetermined advantageous state to be equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit number of games (170 games).

According to feature F1, in a predetermined advantageous state, the number of consecutive games is determined based on the occurrence of the first decision opportunity, and the predetermined number of additional games is determined based on the occurrence of the second decision opportunity. This makes it possible for the player to expect that a large number of games will be awarded as the number of consecutive games in a predetermined advantageous state. In this case, the predetermined number of additional games may be awarded multiple times in the predetermined advantageous state, and the total number of games of the predetermined number of additional games in one predetermined advantageous state is limited to a predetermined upper limit number of games or less. This makes it possible to increase the number of timings at which the predetermined number of additional games are awarded, while also preventing the predetermined number of additional games from being awarded in excess.

Feature F2: An update means (a function for executing the process of step S2005 in the master MPU 72) for updating the information on the number of games stored in the game number storage means (the continued game number counter 74c) when a game is executed in the predetermined advantageous state;
A termination means for terminating the predetermined advantageous state based on the fact that the information on the number of games stored in the game number storage means corresponds to the upper limit number of games (a function of making a positive determination in step S2006 in the master MPU 72 and executing the processing of step S2014);
The gaming machine described in feature F1 is characterized by comprising:

According to feature F2, the predetermined advantageous state is ended when the number of games measured by the number of games storage means reaches the upper limit number of games. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined advantageous state from continuing excessively. In this case, the configuration of feature F1 is provided, and the total number of games including the predetermined number of additional games in one predetermined advantageous state is limited to a predetermined upper limit number of games or less. As a result, in a situation where there is a limit to the number of consecutive games in a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the granting of the number of consecutive games in a predetermined advantageous state from being biased towards granting a predetermined number of additional games.

Feature F3. Feature F1 or F2, characterized in that the second determining means sets the predetermined number of additional games to be generated in response to one occurrence of the second determining opportunity to be a smaller number of games than the predetermined upper limit number of games. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature F3, it is possible to prevent the predetermined number of add-on games awarded from reaching the predetermined upper limit number of games by giving the predetermined number of add-on games once. Therefore, it is possible to cause the timing at which the predetermined number of additional games are awarded to occur multiple times.

Feature F4: A configuration in which a plurality of unit execution times (a first unit execution time ST12, a second unit execution time ST13) can be executed in the predetermined advantageous state,
the first determination trigger occurs based on a determination that a new execution round of the unit execution round is to be started;
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that the first determination means determines the number of continuing games of the unit execution round to be newly started based on the occurrence of the first determination trigger.

According to feature F4, the predetermined gaming state continues by repeating new execution times of the unit execution times. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting that the number of unit executions will increase.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to feature F4, characterized in that, when the unit execution times are executed a plurality of times, the second decision trigger may occur in each of the plurality of unit execution times.

According to feature F5, when a unit execution is performed multiple times, not only is the number of continued games determined for each of the multiple unit executions, but a predetermined number of additional games may also be awarded. This makes it possible for the player to expect the award of a predetermined number of additional games for each unit execution.

Feature F6. The present invention includes a start determining means (a function of executing the process of step S3017 in the main MPU 72) that executes a start determination lottery process for determining whether or not to start a new execution of the unit execution. The gaming machine according to feature F4 or F5.

According to feature F6, a new execution of the unit execution is started by winning in the start determination lottery process. This makes it possible for the player to expect that a new execution of the unit execution will be started even if the number of remaining consecutive games in one execution of the unit execution is small.

Feature F7. The start determining means determines the winning probability of the start determination lottery process to be executed thereafter when the number of unit executions is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference number. The gaming machine according to feature F6, characterized in that the winning probability is higher than the winning probability of the start determination lottery process executed until the start determination lottery process is executed.

According to feature F7, when the number of unit executions exceeds the predetermined reference number, the probability of winning in the start determination lottery process becomes higher than before. In other words, when a unit execution time is repeated and the number of execution times exceeds a predetermined reference number of times, a new execution time of the unit execution time becomes more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction with the start of a new execution of the unit execution.

Feature F8. The predetermined upper limit number of games is determined by the first determining means from the minimum number of games assumed as the upper limit number of games in the predetermined advantageous state until the unit execution time of the predetermined reference time is started. The gaming machine according to feature F7, wherein the number of games is set to be smaller than the number of games obtained by subtracting the maximum number of games assumed as the total number of games of the number of consecutive games.

According to feature F8, the predetermined upper limit number of games for the predetermined number of additional games is determined from the minimum number of games assumed as the upper limit number of games in the predetermined advantageous state before the unit execution time of the predetermined reference time is started. The number of games is set to be smaller than the number of games obtained by subtracting the maximum number of games expected as the total number of consecutive games. As a result, even if the upper limit number of games for a predetermined advantageous state is determined and the predetermined upper limit number of games is given as the predetermined number of additional games, the number of unit executions becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined standard number of times. It becomes possible to create a situation in which the start determination lottery process is executed with a higher probability of winning than before.

Feature F9. The gaming machine described in feature F7 or F8, wherein the second determination means does not generate the specified number of additional games in the unit execution in a situation where the number of times the game has been started is equal to or exceeds the specified reference number.

According to feature F9, in a configuration in which an upper limit number of games in a predetermined advantageous state is set, a predetermined number of additional games is not generated in a unit execution round when the number of times started is equal to or exceeds a predetermined reference number, so that after the number of times started in a unit execution round is equal to or exceeds the predetermined reference number, it is possible to provide more opportunities for the start determination lottery process to be executed with a high probability of winning.

Feature F10. The second determining means is
a lottery determination means (a function of executing the process of step S3302 in the main MPU 72) that determines the predetermined number of additional games by lottery based on the occurrence of the second determination opportunity;
If the remaining number of games until the predetermined upper limit number of games is reached is greater than the predetermined number of additional games determined by the lottery determining means, or is greater than or equal to the predetermined number of additional games determined by the lottery determining means. In this case, the predetermined number of additional games determined by the lottery determining means is given, and the remaining number of games until the predetermined upper limit number of games is reached is less than or equal to the predetermined number of additional games determined by the lottery determining means. In this case, or when it is less than the predetermined number of additional games determined by the lottery determining means, means for not granting the predetermined number of additional games for the current occurrence of the second determination opportunity (step S3304 in the main MPU 72) function to execute the process of step S3305);
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, characterized by comprising:

According to feature F10, it is possible to delay the timing at which the total number of games of the given predetermined number of additional games reaches the predetermined upper limit number of games. Thereby, even in a configuration where a predetermined upper limit number of games is set, it is possible to maintain the expectation that a predetermined number of additional games will be given.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features F1 to F10. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. A situation setting means (a function for executing the processing of step S1805 in the main MPU 72) for setting a favorable transition possible situation (second section SC2);
When the advantageous transition is possible, advantageous transition means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2403 to S2405, S2413 and S2414 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state (preparation state ST4, pseudo bonus state ST5, ART state ST6) advantageous to the player;
A state ending means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2002 to S2004, S2014, S2803 and S2804 in the main MPU 72) for ending the advantageous transition possible state based on the end of the advantageous game state;
Equipped with
The state ending means ends the advantageous transition possible state after a predetermined number of games (one game) have been played since the advantageous gaming state ended.

According to feature G1, since the gaming state transitions to the advantageous gaming state when the situation is such that an advantageous transition is possible, it is possible to limit the situations in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs. In this case, if the advantageous transferable situation ends based on the end of the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous transferable situation ends after a predetermined number of games have been played after the advantageous gaming state ends. As a result, even if the advantageous transferable situation ends when the advantageous gaming state ends, it is possible to create a period in which the advantageous transferable situation is maintained after the advantageous gaming state ends.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the predetermined number of games is one game.

According to feature G2, it is possible to shorten as much as possible the period during which the advantageous transition possible situation is maintained after the advantageous gaming state ends.

Feature G3. An advantageous game state is maintained in the advantageous game state by an advantageous notification means (section display unit 67);
When the advantageous game state ends and the advantageous transition possible situation ends, advantageous notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1809, S1814, S2015, S2408 and S2417 in the main MPU 72) sets the advantageous notification means to a non-notification state when the advantageous transition possible situation ends;
A gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature G3, by providing an advantageous notification means that maintains a notification state during an advantageous gaming state, it becomes easier to check whether or not a game is in an advantageous gaming state. In this case, if the advantageous transition possible state ends when the advantageous gaming state ends, the advantageous notification means goes into a non-notification state when the advantageous transition possible state ends after a predetermined number of games have been played since the advantageous gaming state ended. This makes it possible to maintain the notification state of the advantageous notification means for a predetermined number of games even after the advantageous gaming state ends.

Feature G4: A continuation determination means (a function for executing the processing of step S2704 and steps S3016 to S3020 in the master MPU 72) for determining whether or not to continue the advantageous gaming state after the remaining number of continued games in the advantageous gaming state becomes 0;
A continuation execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3110 to S3112 and steps S3401 to S3404 in the master MPU 72) for newly setting the number of games to be continued in the advantageous gaming state when the continuation determination means determines to continue the advantageous gaming state;
The gaming machine according to feature G3 is provided with:

According to feature G4, the advantageous gaming state may continue after the number of remaining continuing games in the advantageous gaming state becomes 0. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the advantageous gaming state will continue even if the number of remaining continuing games in the advantageous gaming state becomes 0. In addition, when the advantageous gaming state ends with the configuration of feature G3, the advantageous notification means goes into a non-notification state when the advantageous transition possible situation ends after a predetermined number of games have been played since the advantageous gaming state ended. This makes it possible to prevent the player from identifying whether the advantageous gaming state will actually end even if he or she checks the advantageous notification means, since the advantageous notification means is maintained in a notification state until the predetermined number of games have been played.

Feature G5. Effect control means (effect side MPU 92) for executing an effect that allows a player to recognize whether or not to continue the advantageous gaming state after the number of remaining continuation games of the advantageous gaming state becomes 0 games. Equipped with a function to execute performance control processing for pseudo bonuses in
When the advantageous gaming state is continued after the remaining number of continuous games in the advantageous gaming state becomes 0 games, the effect control means is configured to control, in a game in which the remaining number of continuous games in the advantageous gaming state becomes 0 games, Means for executing a continuation performance indicating that the advantageous gaming state continues after the performance indicating that the advantageous gaming state does not continue (executes the processing of steps S2910 and S2913 in the performance side MPU 92 The gaming machine according to feature G4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of:

According to feature G5, after the number of remaining games to be continued in the advantageous game state becomes 0, a presentation is executed to enable the player to recognize whether or not to continue the advantageous game state, so that it is possible to increase the expectation that the advantageous game state will continue through the presentation. In this case, when the advantageous game state ends with the configuration of feature G3, the advantageous notification means is in a non-notification state when the advantageous transition possible situation ends after a predetermined number of games have been played since the advantageous game state ended. As a result, even if a presentation indicating that the advantageous game state will not continue is executed when the number of remaining games to be continued in the advantageous game state becomes 0 and the advantageous game state ends without continuing, the advantageous notification means is maintained in a notification state until the predetermined number of games have been played, so that it is possible to prevent the player from identifying whether or not the advantageous game state will actually end, even if he or she checks the advantageous notification means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the continuation presentation to be executed even in that situation.

Feature G6. If a predetermined termination condition for the advantageous transfer possible situation is satisfied, separate ending means (an affirmative determination is made in step S2006 in the main MPU 72) terminates both the advantageous transfer possible situation and the advantageous gaming state in the same game. In any one of the features G1 to G5, the main MPU 72 makes an affirmative determination in step S2013 and executes the process in step S2014. The game machine described.

According to feature G6, when a predetermined terminating condition for a favorable transition possible situation is met, both the favorable transition possible situation and the favorable game state are ended in the same game, so that when the predetermined terminating condition is met, the favorable transition possible situation can be ended immediately.

Feature G7. The gaming machine described in Feature G6, characterized in that the predetermined end condition is met when the number of games played in the advantageous transition situation reaches an upper limit number of games.

According to feature G7, the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the number of games played in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the upper limit number of games, so it is possible to prevent the advantageous transition possible situation from continuing for an excessively long period of time.

Feature G8. The predetermined termination condition is based on the total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the advantageous transfer possibility situation continues, in order to execute the game when the advantageous transfer possible situation continues. When the predetermined difference is the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed, the minimum value of the predetermined difference is taken as the predetermined reference value, and the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value is the upper limit. The gaming machine according to feature G6 or G7, characterized in that it is established when the difference number is reached.

According to feature G8, the advantageous transfer possible situation ends based on the increase in the predetermined number of differences from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous transfer possible situation reaching the upper limit difference number, so that the advantageous transfer possible situation becomes excessive. It is possible to prevent this from continuing for a long time.

Feature G9. A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G8, characterized in that the advantageous transition means includes a means for transitioning to the advantageous gaming state if a revival condition is met before the predetermined number of games are played in a situation where the advantageous transition is possible after the advantageous gaming state ends (a function for executing the end preparation state process of the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment).

According to feature G9, even after the advantageous gaming state ends, if the situation in which advantageous transition is possible continues, the restoration condition is satisfied and the game returns to the advantageous gaming state. As a result, even after the advantageous gaming state has ended, it is possible for the player to expect the transition to the advantageous gaming state again.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features G1 to G9. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature H Group>
Feature H1. A difference number update execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2008 to S2010 in the master MPU 72) for executing a difference number update process for storing information on the predetermined difference number from a predetermined reference value as predetermined difference number information in a difference number storage means (total acquisition number counter 74d), when a predetermined difference number is a value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute a game when a special situation (second section SC2) continues from the total number of game media awarded by the game executed when the special situation (second section SC2) continues;
an arrival determination means (a function for executing the process of step S2013 in the main MPU 72) for executing an arrival determination process for determining whether the predetermined difference number information stored in the difference number storage means corresponds to an increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value reaching an upper limit difference number;
a difference number corresponding termination means (a function of making a positive determination in step S2013 in the main MPU 72 and executing the process of step S2014) that terminates the special state based on the determination that the predetermined difference number information stored in the difference number storage means corresponds to the increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value reaching an upper limit difference number in the reaching determination process;
Equipped with
When a replay win is made, a new game can be started with the same number of gaming media bet as the number of gaming media bet in the game in which the replay win was made,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the achievement determination means executes the achievement determination process even in a game in which the replay winning is achieved in the special situation.

According to feature H1, the special situation ends when the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the special situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so that the special situation can be prevented from continuing for an excessively long time. In this case, even though the predetermined difference number does not change when a replay win is established in the special situation, an arrival determination process is executed to determine whether the predetermined difference number information stored in the difference number storage means corresponds to the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value reaching the upper limit difference number. As a result, even if the upper limit difference number has actually already been reached in a game prior to the game in which the replay win is established but this has been overlooked due to noise or the like, it is possible to identify that the upper limit difference number has been reached in the game in which the replay win is established thereafter, and it is possible to prevent the special situation that would have ended from continuing.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the difference number update execution means does not execute the difference number update process in a game in which the replay winning is established in the special situation.

According to feature H2, the difference number updating process is not executed in a game in which a replay win has been achieved, thereby making it possible to reduce the processing load on a game in which a replay win has been achieved. In addition, in a game where a replay prize is established in this way, even if the difference update process is not executed, the reaching determination process is executed to determine whether the upper limit difference number has been reached as described above. Ru. As a result, even with a configuration designed to reduce the processing load as described above, it is possible to prevent a special situation from continuing, which should normally end.

Feature H3. A gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, characterized in that it is provided with a game number corresponding termination means (a function of making a positive determination in step S2006 in the master MPU 72 and executing the processing of step S2014) that terminates the special situation based on the number of games executed in the special situation reaching the upper limit game number.

According to feature H3, the special situation ends when the number of games played in the special situation reaches the upper limit, so it is possible to prevent the special situation from continuing for an excessively long time. becomes. In addition, since the special situation is configured to end based on reaching the maximum number of games, the special situation will end when it is determined that the maximum number of differences has been reached in the game where the replay winning is achieved. It is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort even when the player is playing a game.

Feature H4. In the case of the special situation, a means for shifting the game state to a favorable game state (preparation state ST4, pseudo bonus state ST5, ART state ST6) favorable to the player (function for executing the processing of steps S2403 to S2405, S2413 and S2414 in the main MPU 72) is provided;
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, characterized in that when the special situation is ended by the difference number corresponding ending means, the advantageous gaming state is ended.

According to feature H4, since the advantageous gaming state is executed in special situations, it is possible to limit the situations in which the advantageous gaming condition is executed. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Note that for the configuration of features H1 to H4, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to Any one or more of H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A game number update means (a function for executing the process of step S3101 in the master MPU 72) for updating the remaining number of games to be continued in a unit execution time (first unit execution time ST12) by executing a game in the unit execution time;
A start determination means (a function for executing the process of step S3017 in the main MPU 72) for determining whether or not to start a new execution of the unit execution cycle after the currently executed unit execution cycle is completed;
A number-of-games-to-be-added determining means (a function for executing a process for adding the next set in the master MPU 72) determines the number of games to be added as the number of continued games for a new execution in a situation where the start determining means has not yet determined that a new execution of the unit execution is to be started;
a game number awarding means (a function for executing the processing of step S3404 in the master MPU 72) that awards the number of award games determined by the award number determination means as the number of continued games for the new execution round when the new execution round is started based on the decision by the start determination means to start a new execution round of the unit execution round;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature I1, even in a situation where it has not been decided that a new execution round will be started, the number of games to be awarded as the number of continued games for that new execution round is decided, and when a new execution round actually starts, the decided number of games to be awarded is awarded as the number of continued games for that new execution round. This makes it possible to decide in advance the number of games to be awarded when a new execution round starts, and when a new execution round is to start, it becomes possible to execute an effect corresponding to the number of games to be awarded before the new execution round starts.

Feature I2. The gaming machine described in Feature I1, wherein the means for determining the number of games to be awarded determines the number of games to be awarded before the final game of the currently executed execution round is started.

According to feature I2, the number of games to be awarded is determined before the final game of the currently executed execution round is started, so that it is possible to execute an effect that corresponds to the number of games to be awarded for the execution round that may be executed next to the currently executed execution round in the final game of the currently executed execution round.

Feature I3. The gaming machine described in Feature I1 or I2, wherein the means for determining the number of games to be awarded determines the number of games to be awarded for the execution that may be executed next to the execution currently being executed.

According to feature I3, the number of awarded games is determined only for the next execution time, so there is no need to cumulatively store multiple numbers of awarded games.

Feature I4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features I1 to I3, characterized in that the award game number determination means determines the award game number of an execution that may be executed next to the new execution when a new execution of the unit execution is started.

According to feature I4, when a new execution of a unit execution is started, the number of games to be awarded for the execution that may be executed next to the new execution is determined, so that it is possible to determine the number of games to be awarded for the next execution at an early stage.

Feature I5. Features I1 to I1 characterized in that the start determining means determines whether or not to start a new run after the end of the current run when the final game of the run that is currently being executed is started. The gaming machine according to any one of I4.

According to feature I5, when the final game of the currently executed execution round is started, a decision is made as to whether or not to start a new execution round after the currently executed execution round ends, so it is possible to shorten the period from when it is decided to start a new execution round to when the new execution round starts.

Feature I6. A performance (normal continuous performance, special continuous performance) of the performance content corresponding to the number of games awarded for the execution time that can be executed next to the current execution time is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a means for executing the processing of steps S3510 to S3512 in the production side MPU 92.

According to feature I6, it becomes possible to execute an effect corresponding to the number of bonus games that will be given to the execution time that can be executed next to the execution time that is currently being executed, and It is possible to draw the attention of the player not only to whether or not this occurs, but also to the number of games awarded for the next execution.

Feature I7. When the start determination means determines that a new execution round of the unit execution round is to be started, a start response effect control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3510 to S3512 in the performance side MPU 92) is provided to execute a start response effect (normal continuation effect, special continuation effect) corresponding to the start of a new execution round in the currently executed execution round;
The gaming machine described in any one of features I1 to I6, characterized in that the start-response effect control means determines the content of the start-response effect in a manner corresponding to the number of games to be awarded determined by the number of games to be awarded determination means.

According to feature I7, the content of the start response effect corresponding to the start of a new execution round is determined in a manner corresponding to the number of games awarded, so that a player who confirms the start response effect can not only understand that a new execution round is starting, but can also predict or understand the number of games awarded for the new execution round. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the start response effect.

Feature I8. A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I7, characterized in that the means for determining the number of games to be awarded determines the number of games to be awarded by lottery.

According to feature I8, it is possible to diversify the number of games awarded.

Feature I9. When a new execution of the unit execution is started, the number-of-games granting means assigns the number of awarded games determined by the number-of-granted games determining means to the initial number of games of the new execution. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I8, characterized in that the gaming machine performs addition.

According to feature I9, the number of games to be awarded is given as an additional number of games to the number of consecutive games in the execution of the unit execution. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the number of games awarded.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features I1 to I9. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. A situation setting means (a function for executing the process of step S1805 in the main MPU 72) for setting an advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Advantageous transition means (step S2403 to step S2403 in the main MPU 72) that transitions the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, ART state ST6) that is advantageous to the player when the situation is such that the advantageous shift is possible. a function of executing the processes of S2405, S2413 and S2414);
Advantage notification means (section display section 67) whose notification state is maintained in the advantageous gaming state;
Advantageous notification control means for controlling the advantageous notification means (a function of executing the processes of step S1809, step S1814, step S2015, step S2408, and step S2417 in the main side MPU 72);
Equipped with
The advantageous notification control means is
means for maintaining the advantageous notifying means in a non-notifying state when the advantageous shift is possible, and changing the advantageous notifying means from the non-notifying state to the notifying state when the advantageous gaming state is subsequently entered; A function of executing the processes of step S1815, step S2408, and step S2417 in the main MPU 72),
If the advantageous shift possible situation continues even if the advantageous gaming state ends, means for maintaining the advantageous notification means in the notification state even after the advantageous gaming state ends (a positive determination in step S2802 in the main MPU 72) (judgment function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature J1, a transition to an advantageous gaming state occurs when an advantageous transition is possible, making it possible to limit the circumstances under which a transition to an advantageous gaming state occurs. In addition, an advantageous notification means is provided that maintains a notification state in an advantageous gaming state, making it easier to check whether or not a player is in an advantageous gaming state.

In this case, even if an advantageous shift is possible, the advantageous notifying means may be maintained in a non-notifying state, and when the advantageous gaming state is subsequently shifted to, the advantageous notifying means may be in a notifying state. As a result, the advantage notifying means is maintained in the notifying state in the advantageous gaming state, and the advantage notifying means is maintained in the non-notifying state in the gaming state in which an advantageous transition is possible but not in the advantageous gaming state. It becomes possible to create a situation where Therefore, even if the advantage notification means is in a non-reporting state, there is a possibility that a situation in which advantageous transfer is possible is possible, and the player is made to expect that even if the advantage notification means is in a non-reporting state, there is a situation in which advantageous transfer is possible. becomes possible.

Further, even if the advantageous gaming state ends, if the advantageous shift possible situation continues, the advantageous notification means is maintained in the notification state even after the advantageous gaming state ends. This makes it possible for the player playing the game at the gaming machine to recognize that the advantageous transfer possible situation continues even after the advantageous gaming state ends.

Feature J2. The advantageous notification control means is characterized by comprising means (a function of executing the process of step S2015 in the main MPU 72) for setting the advantageous notification means to a non-reporting state when the advantageous shift possible situation ends. The gaming machine according to feature J1.

According to feature J2, when the advantageous transfer possible situation ends, the advantageous notification means becomes a non-reporting state, so by confirming that the advantageous notification means changes from the notification state to the non-reporting state, the advantageous transfer possible situation is changed. This makes it possible to know when the process has ended.

Feature J3. The gaming machine described in feature J1 or J2, characterized in that the advantageous notification control means includes a start response control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1809 and S1814 in the main MPU 72) that changes the advantageous notification means from the non-notification state to the notification state when the advantageous transition possible situation occurs.

According to feature J3, the advantageous notification means can switch from a non-notification state to a notification state when an advantageous transition situation occurs, so that players other than the player who continued playing on the gaming machine, even if they confirm that the advantageous notification means is in the notification state, will not be able to know whether the advantageous transition situation continues after the advantageous transition means has ended, or whether a new advantageous transition situation has occurred.

Feature J4. The gaming machine described in Feature J3, wherein the start response control means changes the advantageous notification means from the non-notification state to the notification state when the advantageous transition possible situation occurs, even if the advantageous game state has not been transitioned to.

According to feature J4, when a favorable transition situation occurs, the favorable notification means changes from a non-notification state to a notification state even if the favorable transition state has not been transitioned to. This makes it possible to generate a situation in which the favorable notification means is in a notification state in a favorable transition situation that is not a favorable game state, even in cases other than when the favorable transition situation is maintained even after the favorable game state has ended.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features J1 to J4. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The invention relating to each of the features in group B to group J above can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to a tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to make the game content suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A numerical value updating means (second random number circuit 76) for updating numerical value information;
An acquisition means for acquiring the numerical information updated by the numerical value update means when an acquisition trigger occurs (a function for executing the process of step S3212 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S3910 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
A predetermined determination means for executing a predetermined determination process for determining whether or not the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means corresponds to predetermined correspondence information (a function for executing the process of step S3213 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S3911 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
A response processing execution means for executing a response processing based on the determination in the predetermined determination processing that the numerical information corresponds to the predetermined response information (a function for executing the processing of step S3215 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S3913 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that in a predetermined situation (the start game of unit execution cycle ST12, ST13), the numerical information is acquired by the acquisition means each time a predetermined waiting period (the first waiting period and the second waiting period in the first embodiment, and the interrupt period and the second waiting period of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 74) in the fifth embodiment) has elapsed, and the predetermined judgment processing is executed by the predetermined judgment means on the acquired numerical information.

According to feature K1, in a predetermined situation, every time a predetermined standby period elapses, numerical information is acquired from the same numerical value updating means and a predetermined determination process is performed on the acquired numerical information. This makes it possible to repeatedly execute the predetermined determination process while using the same numerical value updating means.

Feature K2. The gaming machine described in Feature K1, characterized in that the predetermined waiting period is set to a period longer than the period required for the numerical value update means to complete one cycle of updating the numerical value information.

According to feature K2, the specified waiting period is set to a period longer than the period required for the numerical information to be updated once in the numerical update means, so that the numerical information is updated once in the numerical update means at least once between the time when the numerical information is acquired once and the time when the numerical information is acquired again, and it is possible to ensure that the entire numerical range is the subject of acquisition at each acquisition timing, even if the acquisition of the numerical information is repeated in a short period of time.

Feature K3. Specific processing execution means (timer interrupt processing in the fifth embodiment) that executes the specific processing (timer interrupt processing in the fifth embodiment) every time a specific period (interrupt cycle of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 74)) elapses. functions),
A configuration in which a process of acquiring the numerical information by the acquisition means is executed in the specific process,
The gaming machine according to feature K1 or K2, wherein the predetermined waiting period is longer than the specific period, or the predetermined waiting period is the specific period.

Feature K3 makes it possible to secure a specified waiting period or at least a portion of a specified waiting period by utilizing a specific period during which execution of a specific process is to be waited for.

Feature K4. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, wherein the predetermined waiting period is a variable period.

According to feature K4, the specified waiting period is a variable period, which makes it possible to prevent the interval at which numerical information is acquired from becoming constant.

Feature K5. The predetermined waiting period includes a first predetermined waiting period (the first waiting period in the first embodiment, the interrupt cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) in the fifth embodiment) and a second predetermined waiting period (the second predetermined waiting period). (waiting period),
The first predetermined waiting period is set to a period longer than a period required for the numerical information updating means to update the numerical information once,
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, wherein the second predetermined waiting period is a variable period.

According to feature K5, the first predetermined waiting period is set to a period longer than the period required for the numerical information to be updated once in the numerical update means, so that the numerical information is updated at least once in the numerical update means between the acquisition of numerical information once and the acquisition of numerical information the next time. Even if the acquisition of numerical information is repeated in a short period of time, it is possible to ensure that the entire numerical range is acquired at each acquisition timing. In addition, since the second predetermined waiting period is a variable period, it is possible to prevent the acquisition interval of the numerical information from becoming constant. In particular, since the second predetermined waiting period set separately from the first predetermined waiting period is a variable period, it is possible to prevent the acquisition interval of the numerical information from becoming constant while ensuring that the numerical information is updated at least once in the numerical update means between the acquisition of numerical information once and the acquisition of numerical information the next time.

Feature K6. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, wherein the predetermined situation ends when it is determined in the predetermined determination process that the numerical information does not correspond to the predetermined correspondence information. .

According to feature K6, it is possible to prevent a predetermined situation from continuing for an excessively long time.

Feature K7. Features K1 to K6 characterized in that the predetermined situation ends when the number of times the predetermined determination process is executed on the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means at different timings reaches an upper limit number of times. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

Feature K7 makes it possible to prevent a specified situation from continuing for an excessively long period of time.

Feature K8. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays the pattern;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
a game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that determines the execution status of the game based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set as a bet; ,
A winning combination lottery means (a function of executing the winning combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that performs a winning combination lottery process when the game is in the execution status;
a stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the fluctuating display of the picture on the picture display means;
A pattern display that controls the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is being executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation device. A control means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
If a stop result corresponding to a winning role is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the fluctuation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is considered to have been won corresponding to the winning combination. A winning response control means (a function of executing the processing of step S310 and step S311 in the main MPU 72) that causes corresponding control to be executed;
means for starting the predetermined situation when the game is being executed (in the first embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step S3201 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
Any of the features K1 to K7, characterized in that an end condition for the predetermined situation is set such that the predetermined situation ends after the execution state of the game starts and before the variable display of the symbols starts. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature K8, the specified situation ends before the display of the changing patterns begins, so it is possible to allow the player to play the game in which the specified situation has occurred in a manner that takes into account the results of the specified judgment process that has been repeatedly performed in the specified situation.

Feature K9. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays the pattern;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
a game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that determines the execution status of the game based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set as a bet; ,
A winning combination lottery means (a function of executing the winning combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that performs a winning combination lottery process when the game is in the execution status;
a stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the fluctuating display of the picture on the picture display means;
A pattern display that controls the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is being executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation device. A control means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
If a stop result corresponding to a winning role is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the fluctuation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is considered to have been won corresponding to the winning combination. A winning response control means (a function of executing the processing of step S310 and step S311 in the main MPU 72) that causes corresponding control to be executed;
means for starting the predetermined situation when the game is being executed (in the fifth embodiment, a function for making an affirmative determination in step S3902 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K7, wherein the predetermined situation can continue even after the symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

According to feature K9, since the predetermined situation can continue even after the pattern is displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to ensure a long period during which the predetermined determination process is repeatedly executed.

Feature K10. A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K9, characterized in that it is equipped with a period variation means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3205 to S3210 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S3903 to S3908 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment) that varies the predetermined waiting period that is subsequently set in accordance with the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means.

According to feature K10, since the predetermined waiting period is a period that can vary, it is possible to prevent the acquisition interval of numerical information from becoming constant. Furthermore, since the configuration is such that the predetermined standby period is varied using the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means, it is possible to vary the predetermined standby period while suppressing the complexity of the configuration.

Feature K11. The period varying means is
Means for setting a reference numerical value (variation numerical value) corresponding to the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3207 in the main MPU 72, in the fifth embodiment, the main a function of executing the process of step S3905 in the side MPU 72);
Size determination means (in the first embodiment, the process of step S3208 in the main MPU 72 a function to execute, in the fifth embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S3906 in the main MPU 72),
By executing an information update process for updating the information stored in the number information storage means when the size relationship is determined by the size determination means, the information stored in the number information storage means is stored in the number information storage means. A number updating means (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3209 in the main MPU 72, in the fifth embodiment) for updating the information such that the information corresponding to the number of times the magnitude relationship determination is performed; (The function of executing the process of step S3907 in the main MPU 72)
If the information in the number of times storage means updated by the number of times updating means does not become end information, means for causing the size determination means to make the determination of the magnitude relationship again (in the first embodiment, the main side (a function of making a negative determination in step S3210 in the MPU 72, a function of making a negative determination in step S3908 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
Equipped with
The acquisition means acquires the numerical information after the information in the number storage means updated by the number updating means becomes the end information,
The gaming machine according to feature K10, characterized in that the period from the start of the determination of the magnitude relationship until the start of the information update process varies depending on the determination result of the magnitude relationship.

According to feature K11, it is possible to vary the specified waiting period by using a reference numerical value corresponding to the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means and the number of times a magnitude relationship determination has been performed.

Feature K12. The gaming machine according to feature K11, wherein the maximum value of the reference numerical value matches the number of terminations corresponding to the termination information.

According to feature K12, since the maximum value of the reference numerical value and the number of termination times match, it is possible to make the predetermined waiting period different if the reference numerical value is different.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features K1 to K12. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A numerical value setting means for setting a reference numerical value (variation numerical value) (in the first embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S3207 in the main MPU 72, and in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S3905 in the main MPU 72);
a magnitude determination means for determining whether a value corresponding to information stored in a number information storage means (a repetition number counter 74g) is larger than or smaller than the reference value (a function for executing the process of step S3208 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S3906 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
a number update means (a function for executing the process of step S3209 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S3907 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment) for executing an information update process for updating the information stored in the number information storage means when the magnitude relationship determination means has determined whether the magnitude relationship is greater or less, so that the information stored in the number information storage means corresponds to the number of times the magnitude relationship determination has been performed;
a means for causing the magnitude determination means to determine the magnitude relationship again when the information in the number storage means updated by the number update means is not end information (a function for making a negative determination in step S3210 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function for making a negative determination in step S3908 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
A special process execution means for executing a special process after the information in the count storage means updated by the count update means becomes the end information (a function for executing the process of step S3212 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S3910 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the period from when the determination of the magnitude relationship begins to when the information update process begins varies depending on the result of the determination of the magnitude relationship.

According to feature L1, since the period from the start of the determination of the magnitude relationship until the start of the information update process varies depending on the determination result of the magnitude relationship, the period until the special process is executed according to the reference value varies. This makes it possible to vary the period required. This makes it possible to prevent the period in which special processing is executed from becoming constant.

Feature L2. The gaming machine described in Feature L1, characterized in that the reference value fluctuates depending on the result of the special process executed prior to the current setting of the reference value by the value setting means.

According to feature L2, by using the results of previously executed special processes, it is possible to prevent the cycle in which special processes are executed from being constant.

Feature L3. The gaming machine described in feature L1 or L2, characterized in that the maximum value of the reference numerical value coincides with the number of endings corresponding to the ending information.

According to feature L3, since the maximum reference value and the number of terminations are the same, it is possible to make the specified waiting period different if the reference value is different.

Note that for the configuration of features L1 to L3, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to Any one or more of H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to each feature of the above feature K group and the above feature L group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to a player, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and launched toward the game area in response to the player's launch operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known for a pachinko machine, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, and the game balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to perform processing appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine that starts the rotation of a rotating body based on the operation of a start operation means, stops the rotation of the rotating body based on the operation of a stop operation means, and awards a bonus to the player based on the image that appears after the rotation has stopped.

10...slot machine, 31...reel unit, 41...start lever, 42-44...stop buttons, 57...setting key insertion hole, 67...interval display, 72...main MPU, 74...main RAM, 74c...continued game counter, 74d...total win counter, 74g...repetition counter, 76...second random number circuit, 92...presentation MPU, G12...non-internal notification image, G13...first internal indication image, SC2...second interval, ST2...first CB state, ST3...second CB state, ST4...preparation state, ST5...pseudo bonus state, ST6...ART state, ST12...first unit execution time, ST13...second unit execution time.

Claims (1)

Predetermined storage execution means for storing predetermined game information in the information storage means;
specific storage execution means for storing specific game information in the information storage means;
a progress control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Notification control means for executing notification processing based on the information transmitted by the progress control means,
When the predetermined gaming information is stored in the information storage means, the gaming situation becomes a predetermined gaming situation,
When the specific gaming information is stored in the information storage means, the gaming situation is a specific gaming situation,
The progress control means is
profit grant processing execution means for executing profit grant processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set as a target of use from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to a player's advantage level;
Setting-related execution means for executing a predetermined setting-related process regarding the setting value;
a predetermined erasing means for executing a predetermined erasing process for erasing information stored in the information storage means when the setting-related process is executed;
Equipped with
When erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the predetermined erasing process, the predetermined erasing means includes the specific game information as an object to be erased, and includes the predetermined game information as an object to be erased. It is configured to prevent
After executing the predetermined erasing process, the progress control means transmits to the notification control means specific information that enables the notification control means to specify whether or not the predetermined game information is stored in the information storage means. have the means to
When the notification control means receives the specific information corresponding to the fact that the predetermined game information is not stored in the information storage device, the notification control means corresponds to the fact that the predetermined game information is not stored in the information storage device. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing notification processing.

Images